Archives

Only Skin Deep: The Pharmacist’s Guide to Intradermal Vaccine Administration 2025

Learning Objectives

 

After completing this knowledge-based continuing education activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians  will be able to

  • DISCUSS the potential benefits of intradermal vaccine delivery
  • IDENTIFY how to administer intradermal injections

     

    Release Date: December 5, 2025

    Expiration Date: December 5, 2028

    Course Fee

    FREE

    There is no grant funding for this CE activity

    ACPE UANs

    Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-073-H06-P

    Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-073-H06-T

    Session Codes

    Pharmacist: 22YC66-BXV44

    Pharmacy Technician:  22YC66-VBT84

    Accreditation Hours

    0.5 hours of CE

    Accreditation Statements

    The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-073-H06-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

     

    Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

    The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

    Faculty

    Kelsey Giara, PharmD
    Freelance Medical Writer
    Pelham, NH

    Faculty Disclosure

    In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

    Dr. Giara does not have any relationships with ineligible companies and therefore has nothing to disclose.

     

    ABSTRACT

    Researchers have studied intradermal vaccination for various diseases for over a decade, so it was only a matter of time before pharmacists would be asked to learn this route of administration. This is arguably the most challenging method of vaccine administration, and inaccurate technique could render an immunization ineffective. Given the need for intradermal administration of the monkeypox vaccine, pharmacists should be prepared to offer intradermal vaccination to eligible individuals to increase immunization rates, slow viral spread, and improve outcomes for affected individuals.

    CONTENT

    Content

    INTRODUCTION

    Major developments to vaccines and vaccine administration in recent years have demanded a great deal from pharmacists. The coronavirus disease-19 pandemic asked us to fight misinformation and vaccine hesitancy to educate the public about a new virus and new vaccine technology. We’ve been challenged to keep up with booster recommendations and the increased workflow that comes with vaccine administration. Many of us also taught our pharmacy technicians how to immunize.

     

    Now, with the emergence of monkeypox comes yet another new vaccine with an unfamiliar method of administration (see our FREE monkeypox activity for a more in-depth discussion about this virus). In August 2022, the United States (U.S.) declared monkeypox a public health emergency and ramped up efforts to vaccinate at-risk individuals subcutaneously (a method with which pharmacists are generally familiar).1 Shortly thereafter, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) recognized that the country’s supply of monkeypox vaccine was unable to meet the current demand given the rapid spread of the virus.2 Administering the vaccine intradermally only requires one-fifth of the subcutaneous dose, so the FDA issued an emergency use authorization (EUA) allowing healthcare providers to use this method of administration. This effectively increased the total number of available doses by up to five-fold.2

     

    In September 2022, the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services authorized pharmacists, pharmacy interns, and pharmacy technicians, as appropriate, to administer monkeypox vaccines and therapeutics, under certain conditions.3 Pharmacists should be prepared to offer intradermal vaccination to eligible individuals to increase vaccination rates, slow viral spread, and improve outcomes both for this virus and any future viruses for which this applies.

     

    THE ROLE OF INTRADERMAL ADMINISTRATION

    Researchers have studied intradermal vaccination for a range of viral diseases, but only a few things are administered intradermally including4,5

    • tuberculosis skin testing
    • BCG (tuberculosis) vaccine
    • rabies vaccine
    • allergy skin testing

     

    Intradermal administration occurs in the dermis just below the epidermis (see Figure 1).4 The epidermis—the thinnest layer—is made up mostly of epithelial cells, but also contains melanocytes (pigment-producing cells), Merkel cells (for light-touch stimuli), and Langerhans cells (tissue-resident macrophages).5 The dermis is a thicker layer containing cells of the adaptive and innate immune systems including macrophages, mast cells, Langerhans cells, and dermal dendritic cells. Cells of the dermis are essential in processing incoming antigens to decide if they are harmful and activate the immune system accordingly.5

     

     

    Figure 1. Methods of Vaccine Administration

     

    High levels of antigen-presenting cells in the dermis induce a more potent immune response, making this an attractive (and potentially superior) vaccination site.5,6 This significant reactivity in the dermis also prompts a strong immune response to a smaller quantity of vaccine antigen—as little as one-fifth to one-tenth the dose—compared to intramuscular or subcutaneous administration.5,7 For this reason, intradermal administration is dose-sparing and potentially cost saving.5 Intradermal administration also avoids the rare risk of nerve, blood vessel, or joint space injury.7

     

    Clinical studies are evaluating intradermal delivery of other vaccines, but none are currently available in the U.S. aside from monkeypox under the recent EUA.5 In years past, an intradermal influenza vaccine was available, but the manufacturer stopped production after the 2017-2018 flu season for unknown reasons.8 Of all parenteral routes, intradermal injections have the longest absorption time due to the lack of blood vessels and muscle tissue in this area. This is attractive for sensitivity testing, as reactions are easier to visualize and assess for severity.4

     

    While intradermal administration is more efficient and cost-effective, it requires more skill and practice compared to subcutaneous or intramuscular administration.9 If incorrectly administered, the vaccine may enter the subcutaneous tissue instead and be ineffective because the dose is too small.

     

    INTRADERMAL ADMINISTRATION TECHNIQUE

    The most common intradermal injection sites are the volar aspect (inner surface) of the forearm and the upper back below the scapula (shoulder blade).4 Intradermal injection is not the best choice for every patient. Skin should be free of lesions, rashes, moles, or scars that could alter visual inspection of the injection site (or interpretation of test results, when applicable).4 In the case of the monkeypox vaccine, intradermal administration is only authorized for patients 18 years or older without a history of keloids (thick, raised scars).10

     

    Researchers have developed various devices for intradermal drug delivery, but in the absence of specialized devices, individuals can employ the Mantoux technique using a hypodermic needle.5 The Mantoux technique is named for French physician Charles Mantoux who used this method for tuberculosis testing in the early 1900s.11 The optimum needle size for this method is 26 to 27 gauge and ¼ to ½ inch long.4

     

    The Mantoux technique is new to pharmacists (we know because we could only find information about administration technique in nursing resources), so listen up, take notes, and remember that practice makes perfect4,10:

    • Inspect the injection site and select an area that is free from lesions, rashes, moles, or scars. Avoid vaccination in an area where there is a recent tattoo (less than one month old). If tattoos cover both arms, select an area without pigment (ink) if possible. If the tattoo is unavoidable, administer through it.
    • Clean the site with an alcohol or antiseptic swab using a firm, circular motion. Allow the site to dry completely to prevent alcohol from entering the tissue, which can cause stinging and irritation.
    • Using the nondominant hand, spread the skin taut at the injection site. Taut skin provides easy entrance for the needle. This is especially important in older individuals with less elastic skin.
    • Hold the syringe in the dominant hand between the thumb and forefinger at a 5- to 15-degree angle at the selected injection site with the bevel of the needle facing up.
    • Place the needle almost flat against the patient’s skin and insert the needle into the skin no more than 1/8-inch (about 3 mm) to cover the bevel. Keeping the bevel side up allows the needle to smoothly pierce the skin and deliver the medication to the dermis.
    • Once the needle is in place, use the thumb of the nondominant hand to slowly push the plunger to inject the medication.
    • Inspect the injection site for a bleb (small blister) which should appear under the skin. The presence of a bleb indicates that the medication is correctly placed in the dermis. The bleb is desired but not required, so if it doesn't appear, don't panic. Simply adjust your technique for next time.
    • Withdraw the needle at the same angle it was placed so as not to disturb the bleb and to minimize patient discomfort and tissue damage. Safely discard the syringe in a sharps container.

     

    More visual learners can find a video demonstrating how to administer a vaccine intradermally at https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dRsQf_UHsjs. 

     

    CONCLUSION

    Vaccines work, that much we know. However, this is only true if they’re accessible, trusted, and used appropriately. Pharmacists can help promote access, education, and vaccine uptake if they have the knowledge and skills to do so. New vaccines and administration recommendations are challenging, but don’t let it get under your skin. We hope this quick-and-dirty overview of intradermal vaccines boosted your confidence and made it easier for you to give it a shot.

     

     

     

    Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

    Only Skin Deep: The Pharmacist’s Guide to Intradermal Vaccine Administration
    25-073 Posttest

    Learning Objectives
    • DISCUSS the potential benefits of intradermal vaccine delivery
    • IDENTIFY how to administer intradermal injections

    *

    1. Which of the following is a benefit of intradermal vaccine delivery?
    A. It can deliver a larger vaccine dose
    B. It has the fastest rate of absorption
    C. It avoids the risk of nerve injury

    *

    2. Which of the following makes the dermis a good site for vaccine administration?
    A. High levels of Merkel cells
    B. High levels of antigen-presenting cells
    C. Low levels of Langerhans cells

    *

    3. About how far should you insert the needle to administer an intradermal injection via the Mantoux technique?
    A. 1/8-inch
    B. 1/4-inch
    C. 1/2-inch

    *

    4. Travis Barker comes into your pharmacy asking for an intradermal vaccine. You inspect his forearms full of tattoos and find a small space without ink. You complete intradermal administration and notice a small bubble form under his skin. What does this mean?
    A. You administered the vaccine subcutaneously
    B. You administered the vaccine too close to a tattoo
    C. You administered the vaccine correctly

    *

    5. Which of the following is appropriate technique for intradermal administration?
    A. Insert the needle at a 5- to 15-degree angle with the bevel facing up
    B. Pinch the skin between the thumb and forefinger of the nondominant hand
    C. Remove the needle slowly at a 45-degree angle to reduce discomfort

    Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

    Only Skin Deep: The Pharmacist’s Guide to Intradermal Vaccine Administration
    25-073 Posttest

    Learning Objectives
    • DISCUSS the potential benefits of intradermal vaccine delivery
    • IDENTIFY how to administer intradermal injections

    *

    1. Which of the following is a benefit of intradermal vaccine delivery?
    A. It can deliver a larger vaccine dose
    B. It has the fastest rate of absorption
    C. It avoids the risk of nerve injury

    *

    2. Which of the following makes the dermis a good site for vaccine administration?
    A. High levels of Merkel cells
    B. High levels of antigen-presenting cells
    C. Low levels of Langerhans cells

    *

    3. About how far should you insert the needle to administer an intradermal injection via the Mantoux technique?
    A. 1/8-inch
    B. 1/4-inch
    C. 1/2-inch

    *

    4. Travis Barker comes into your pharmacy asking for an intradermal vaccine. You inspect his forearms full of tattoos and find a small space without ink. You complete intradermal administration and notice a small bubble form under his skin. What does this mean?
    A. You administered the vaccine subcutaneously
    B. You administered the vaccine too close to a tattoo
    C. You administered the vaccine correctly

    *

    5. Which of the following is appropriate technique for intradermal administration?
    A. Insert the needle at a 5- to 15-degree angle with the bevel facing up
    B. Pinch the skin between the thumb and forefinger of the nondominant hand
    C. Remove the needle slowly at a 45-degree angle to reduce discomfort

    References

    Full List of References

    References

       
      REFERENCES
      1. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Biden-Harris Administration Bolsters Monkeypox Response; HHS Secretary Becerra Declares Public Health Emergency. August 4, 2022. Accessed October 26, 2022. https://www.hhs.gov/about/news/2022/08/04/biden-harris-administration-bolsters-monkeypox-response-hhs-secretary-becerra-declares-public-health-emergency.html
      2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Monkeypox Update: FDA Authorizes Emergency Use of JYNNEOS Vaccine to Increase Vaccine Supply. August 9, 2022. Accessed October 26, 2022. https://www.fda.gov/news-events/press-announcements/monkeypox-update-fda-authorizes-emergency-use-jynneos-vaccine-increase-vaccine-supply
      3. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Notice of Amendment to the January 1, 2016 Republished Declaration under the Public Readiness and Emergency Preparedness Act. October 3, 2022. Accessed October 26, 2022. https://public-inspection.federalregister.gov/2022-21412.pdf
      4. Administering intradermal medications. Open Resources for Nursing (Open RN). Accessed October 26, 2022. https://wtcs.pressbooks.pub/nursingskills/chapter/18-4-administering-intradermal-medication/
      5. Kim YC, Jarrahian C, Zehrung D, Mitragotri S, Prausnitz MR. Delivery systems for intradermal vaccination. Curr Top Microbiol Immunol. 2012;351:77-112.
      6. Hickling JK, Jones KR, Friede M, Zehrung D, Chen D, Kristensen D. Intradermal delivery of vaccines: potential benefits and current challenges. Bull World Health Organ. 2011;89(3):221-226.
      7. Brooks JT, Marks P, Goldstein RH, Walensky RP. Intradermal Vaccination for Monkeypox - Benefits for Individual and Public Health. N Engl J Med. 2022;387(13):1151-1153.
      8. Influenza vaccine. Aetna Clinical Policy Bulletins. Reviewed August 1, 2022. Accessed October 26, 2022. https://www.aetna.com/cpb/medical/data/1_99/0035.html
      9. Miller K. What Is an Intradermal Injection, the New Way the Monkeypox Vaccine Is Being Given? Prevention. August 12, 2022. Accessed October 26, 2022. https://www.prevention.com/health/health-conditions/a40869782/what-is-intradermal-injection/
      10. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. JYNNEOS Smallpox and Monkeypox Vaccine:
      ALTERNATE REGIMEN Preparation and Administration Summary (Intradermal Administration). Updated September 27, 2022. Accessed October 26, 2022. https://www.cdc.gov/poxvirus/monkeypox/files/interim-considerations/guidance-jynneos-prep-admin-alt-dosing.pdf
      11. Kis EE, Winter G, Myschik J. Devices for intradermal vaccination. Vaccine. 2012;30(3):523-538.

      Patient Safety: Ketogenic Diet: Fad Weight Loss or True Medical Benefits?

      Learning Objectives

       

      After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

        • Describe the components and mechanisms of the ketogenic diet for medical purposes.
        • List disease states in which the ketogenic diet has been proven to help
        • Use this information to counsel patients who are interested in the ketogenic diet’s medical benefits

        After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

        • Describe the components of the ketogenic diet for medical purposes
        • List disease states in which the ketogenic diet has been proven to help
        • Identify situations in which patients need referral for additional information

         

        Release Date: December 1, 2025

        Expiration Date: December 1, 2028

        Course Fee

        Pharmacists: $7

        Pharmacy Technicians: $4

        There is no grant funding for this CE activity

        ACPE UANs

        Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-072-H05-P

        Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-072-H05-T

        Session Codes

        Pharmacist:  22YC65-ABC23

        Pharmacy Technician:  22YC65-CBA32

        Accreditation Hours

        2.0 hours of CE

        Accreditation Statements

        The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-072-H05-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

         

        Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

        The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

        Faculty

        Dylan DeCandia PharmD
        Franklyn's Pharmacy
        Ho-Ho-Kus, NJ

        Karisse T. Lora
        2023 PharmD Candidate
        University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy
        Storrs, CT

        Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA
        Director Office of Pharmacy Professional Development
        University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy
        Storrs, CT

                   

        Faculty Disclosure

        In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

        Dylan DeCandia, Karisse Lara and Jeannette Wick do not have any financial relationships with ineligibile companies.

         

        ABSTRACT

        The ketogenic diet, despite its current popularity, was initially developed to address seizure disorders. Its reliance on high fat, moderate protein, low carbohydrate intake can make it a challenge for patient adherence. By maintaining a constant state of ketogenesis from eating fatty foods, patients on the ketogenic diet change their natural fuel source from glucose to ketone bodies. Its medical uses include obesity, glaucoma, diabetes, seizures, and other neurode-generative disorders. A key concept is that patients must strive for ketosis (not ketoacidosis) and monitor medical conditions closely. It is contraindicated in patients with liver failure, pancreatitis, inborn disorders of fat metabolism, primarycarnitine deficiency, carnitine palmitoyl transferase deficiency, carnitine translocase deficiency, porphyria, and pyruvate kinase deficiency. People who have type1 diabetes or who are pregnant should not follow this diet. Some people develop the “keto-flu,” a slang term for symptoms indicative of carbohydrate withdrawal. Numerous reliable resources are available for patients and healthcare providers.

        CONTENT

        Content

        INTRODUCTION

         

        Did you know that the ketogenic diet was NOT initially created for weight loss? Recently, the “keto” diet has become another fad diet for people trying to lose weight. Since 2000, more researchers have started to study the ketogenic diet, causing an increase in dieters who are employing this diet.1

         

        For decades, various entities have promoted fad diets as a way to lose weight and accrue other health benefits, with no data to back them up. The ketogenic diet began to reach the public’s consciousness in the 1970s, gained popularity in the early 2010s, and by 2017, it was a frequent topic in national news media. Google searches for the ketogenic diet (sometimes called the paleo diet, which is similar but not identical) quadrupled that year; questions about this diet were in the top 10 health questions.2 Many people started using the ketogenic diet without understanding how it works or its associated benefits and risks. In 2014, celebrities like Lebron James, Kim Kardashian, and Megan Fox started using the ketogenic diet during its fad weight loss phase. In 2020, around 6% of Americans were consuming a ketogenic, high fat diet.3

         

        In the 1920s, researchers noticed that some patients with epilepsy experienced benefits during fasting, so they discovered a way to mimic fasting to treat the disease.1 Soon, physicians began to use the ketogenic diet for its antiepileptic properties.1 However, in the next decades, researchers introduced antiepileptic medications and the ketogenic diet’s popularity faded. Treatment for epilepsy still includes some of the first antiepileptic medications: phenobarbital and phenytoin.4 Although physicians began using phenobarbital in 1912 for epilepsy, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration did not approve phenytoin for use in epilepsy until 1938.5 In the 1940s, clinicians used troxidone, but its toxicity profile was unacceptable. Ethosuximide, approved in 1958, replaced it. Approval of carbamazepine and valproic acid in the 1960s made the ketogenic diet unnecessary and obsolete for the most part.5

         

        Although pharmacists are the medication experts on the clinical team, they must understand all types of treatment, including nonpharmacologic interventions. During a ketogenic diet, patients eat a limited number of carbohydrates so the body will enter ketosis. Because of the diet’s intensity, pharmacists and technicians need to understand how the diet works to ensure patient safety. When patients start or are on the ketogenic diet, pharmacists need to counsel patients to ensure no drug interactions occur. Pharmacists also need to counsel patients who may have started the diet by themselves about its benefits and the risks. Also, remember interested dieters might embrace a New Year's resolution regarding ketogenic dieting, because National Keto Day is January 5th!

         

        This continuing education activity summarizes knowledge of the ketogenic diet, the diet’s mechanism and its positive and negative effects, current medical uses for patients with epilepsy, diabetes, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and others, and recommendations for patient education and counseling.

         

        KETOGENIC DIET

         

        The ketogenic diet alters how the body burns energy, from carbohydrates to lipids. The traditional food pyramid places fats in the smallest section at the top, with carbohydrates in the largest bottom section. The ketogenic diet flips the pyramid, so most recommended foods are fats and very few are carbohydrates.

         

        According to the Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 25% to 35% of an adult’s diet should come from fats, 45% to 65% from carbohydrates, and 10% to 30% from protein.6 In a 2000 calorie day for ketogenic diet patients, fat should account for 70% to 80% or 165 g of daily caloric intake.7

         

        Although an exact timeframe is unknown, researchers believe that it can take the body up to four weeks to adapt to the ketogenic diet and ketosis.8 Patients initiating the diet could try daily exercise to force the body to break down fats, but its efficacy for reducing time to ketosis is unknown.8

         

        Ketogenesis

         

        The ketogenic diet uses ketosis and ketogenesis. When people eat carbohydrates, the body uses cellular respiration to produce energy from breaking down glucose molecules. However, if no carbohydrates are available, which would be the case during extended exercise or fasting periods, the body will naturally enter ketosis. Ketosis is a state of elevated ketone bodies, which include beta-hydroxybutyric acid, acetoacetic acid, and acetone in the blood.9 When the body needs energy, ketogenesis occurs to produce these ketone bodies, which can be used as an alternative energy source.

         

        In normal cellular respiration, acetyl-CoA is condensed with oxaloacetate to begin the citric acid cycle. Beta-oxidation of fatty acids can produce acetyl-CoA, similar to the production of acetyl-CoA from glycolysis of glucose. In times of reduced glucose (i.e., fasting, extended exercise, ketogenic diet), the body diverts the acetyl-CoA produced from the fatty acids into ketogenesis.

         

        Ketosis begins with fatty acid oxidation and the production of acetyl-CoA. Using the enzyme 3-ketothiolase, acetyl-CoA is converted into acetoacetyl-CoA. Then, the enzyme HMG-CoA synthase converts acetoacetyl-CoA to HMG-CoA.9 Low glucose levels during starvation or a high fat diet—a signal that the body needs to produce an alternative energy source for the brain—trigger this step of ketogenesis.10

         

        The last step of energy production during ketosis is the conversion of HMG-CoA to the ketone bodies acetoacetate (AcAc) and 3-beta-hydroxybutyrate (3HB). Using HMG-CoA lyase, AcAc and 3HB are cleaved from HMG-CoA.9 By being in a constant state of ketogenesis from eating fatty foods, patients on the ketogenic diet change their natural fuel source from glucose to ketone bodies.

         

        Ketone Bodies

         

        The 3 main types of ketone bodies are AcAc, 3HB, and least commonly, acetone. The liver produces AcAc, 3HB, and acetone in a 78:20:2 ratio, respectively, during fatty acid oxidation.11 Acetone is produced the least because it’s the byproduct of the uncommon and spontaneous decarboxylation of 3HB.11 Ketone bodies are the only non-glucose derived energy source for the brain.10 The brain cannot process fatty acids, so they must be converted into ketone bodies first. They provide energy to the brain because both AcAc and 3HB can diffuse across blood brain barrier.9

         

        During a normal day, ketone bodies account for only 2% to 6% of an individual's energy requirements. However, after a three- to four-day fast, ketone bodies account for 30% to 40% of the body's energy source.9 The liver can produce 185 grams of ketone bodies daily, which is enough to satisfy a person’s daily energy needs.9

         

        By using ketone bodies, patients can avoid breaking down carbohydrates as an energy source, similar to how the body naturally functions during fasting. Ketone bodies are thought to have a direct beneficial mechanism, which will be discussed later, in disorders like epilepsy.

         

        Effects of Insulin and Glucagon

         

        Insulin and glucagon are important in ketosis and ketone bodies. Low insulin levels trigger steps in the ketosis process. Insulin, also called the antiketogenic hormone, decreases 3HB production, whereas glucagon, the ketogenic hormone, increases 3HB production.12

         

        When humans consume carbohydrates and blood glucose levels rise, the pancreas releases insulin to absorb the blood sugar for energy storage.13 Insulin inhibits hormone-sensitive lipase and HMG-CoA synthase, enzymes that take part in fatty acid breakdown. It also stimulates acetyl-CoA carboxylase, causing the conversion of acetyl-CoA to malonyl-CoA, and blocking fatty acid transport into the mitochondria.10 As a result, insulin decreases the need for fatty acid oxidation and ketone bodies are decreased. The ketogenic diet requires patients to avoid carbohydrates to diminish insulin production and promote these mechanisms.

         

        Glucagon does the opposite of insulin. The body uses epinephrine and glucagon to stimulate adipose (fat) tissue to produce more fatty acid.9 Glucagon triggers phosphorylation of hormone-sensitive lipase and HMG-CoA synthase, thus promoting ketogenesis.9 The body releases fatty acids from triglycerides, so they can be broken down by the newly activated enzymes.

         

        A successful ketogenic diet requires a high glucagon/insulin ratio, similar to that experienced during fasting and by patients with diabetes. The high ratio increases fatty acid production and oxidation. Ketogenesis will follow.

         

        Foods Consumed

         

        Most foods for a ketogenic diet will have moderate amounts of proteins, no carbohydrates, with many fats. To prevent heart disease, physicians and pharmacists can counsel patients to eat healthy fats. Table 1 describes some examples of foods that are common in the ketogenic diet.

         

        Table 1. Food Options Commonly Used in the Ketogenic Diet14

        Fish and Seafood -        Full of protein

        -        No carbs

        -        Associated with positive cardiovascular and health benefits

        Poultry and Meat

        (Chicken, beef)

        -        Rich in protein

        -        No carbs

        -        Limit processed meats

        Nuts

        (Almonds, walnuts, pecans, cashews)

        -        High in fiber, protein, and unsaturated fats

        -        Very low carbs

        -        Antioxidants

        Non-starchy Vegetables

        (Broccoli, green beans, bell peppers)

        -        Include other vitamins and nutrients

        -        Antioxidants

        Cheese -        No carbohydrates

        -        High in fats, protein, calcium

        -        Too many saturated fats

        Avocados -        Potassium, unsaturated fats

        -        Most carbohydrates in avocados are fiber

         

        Patients on the ketogenic diet must understand how to track their nutrition to diet properly, calculating proteins, carbohydrates, and fats daily. Patients must calculate carbohydrates to account for dietary fiber because fiber is not digested with other carbohydrates.14 When tracking nutrition, patients on the ketogenic diet must track net carbohydrates, which can be found by subtracting the dietary fiber content from the total carbohydrates. The total carbohydrate level reported on nutrition labels does not accurately reflect the carbohydrate content the patient has consumed.

         

        Most of the foods mentioned in Table 1 are high in fat. Fish, seafood, meat, poultry, and eggs are main staples. Processed meats, like bacon, should be eaten more sparingly compared to non-processed meats, like chicken and beef.14 Patients can eat chicken and fish more frequently because they promote cardiovascular health, unlike red meat. Many people believe that berries are not allowed on the ketogenic diet, but strawberries, raspberries, and blackberries have very low net carbohydrates. The total carbohydrates in berries may appear high, but their high fiber content allows berries to have a low net carbohydrate content.

         

        A vegetarian ketogenic diet is a possibility, even though options are more limited. Vegetarian options with high protein and low carbohydrates include nuts, tofu, and seitan (a meat substitute made from the gluten in wheat).15 These dieters can also enjoy peanut butter-based desserts for more proteins. Seeds are high in fat and have high dietary fiber. For higher calorie meals, eggs and dairy (hard cheeses and plain yogurt) are an important fat option. Eggs have many fats, but essentially no carbohydrates.15

         

        Any food that is high in net carbohydrates will disrupt the body's ketosis. These are foods like starchy vegetables, juices, syrup, chips, and crackers.14 Foods high in carbohydrates will give the body enough energy to not oxidize fatty acids and prevent the production of ketone bodies.14

         

        PAUSE AND PONDER: Would a fasting patient reach ketosis quicker than a patient who is not fasting?

        WHO BENEFITS FROM THE KETOGENIC DIET?

        Obesity

        Obesity, a leading risk factor for many chronic health conditions, continues to rise in the United States. According to the CDC, the prevalence of diabetes has increased to 41.9% from 2017 to 2020.16 Many have adopted low-carbohydrate, high fat lifestyles to lose weight. A 2016 meta-analysis of 11 randomized control trials assessed the efficacy of the ketogenic diet. Among the 1369 participants, those on the ketogenic diet experienced greater weight loss than those who participated in a low-fat diet.17 After six months to two years of intervention, patients experienced significant weight loss, HDL cholesterol increase, and triacylglycerol (TAG) reduction. The studies were limited by moderate to high heterogeneity and possible publication bias. A 2021 study evaluated the efficacy of the ketogenic diet using a mobile health application in comparison to a calorie restricted, low-fat application.18 Of the 155 participants, those using the ketogenic diet app experienced greater weight loss (12.3 pounds) at 12 weeks. Hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c) and liver enzymes also improved for the ketogenic diet group. This study was limited by operating fully remotely via the application. Patients could have benefited from in-person counseling or on-site visits to promote adherence.18

        Another meta-analysis of 13 randomized controlled trials showed that participants on the ketogenic diet benefited from greater weight loss than those on a low-fat diet proving that the ketogenic diet can be used for obese patients. The low-fat diet group consisted of 787 patients while the ketogenic diet group consisted of 790. Patients that were part of the keto group lost approximately 3.6 pounds (1.6 kilograms) more than the low-fat group.19 Patients saw a greater increase in HDL and a more significant reduction in TAG in the keto group.

        Type 2 Diabetes

        Patients with type 2 diabetes (T2D) sometimes benefit from the ketogenic diet through improved glycemia and reduced insulin resistance. A study of 28 patients with T2D following a ketogenic diet showed that blood glucose and HbA1c improved. The ketogenic diet could potentially help patients with T2D reduce the number or dose of medications.20 Another comparative study showed that obese patients with T2D had improvement in blood glucose profiles, insulin sensitivity, and HbA1c when adhering to the ketogenic diet for two consecutive weeks.21 However, the study was limited by short duration and small sample size.

        Polycystic Ovary Syndrome

        Similar benefits seem to apply to patients with polycystic ovarian syndrome (PCOS). Patients with PCOS experience hyperandrogenism, insulin resistance, and ovulatory dysfunction.22 Current treatment options include metformin, clomiphene, and letrozole; the ketogenic diet may provide good results for these women through insulin reduction.

        In addition to the symptoms listed above, women with PCOS tend to gain weight, develop acne, and experience hirsutism.23 Physicians recommend lifestyle modifications and hormonal contraceptives as first line interventions, but often, these interventions are insufficient, and symptoms persist.23

        Researchers have conducted many studies to evaluate the benefits of the ketogenic diet for women with PCOS, yet the studies are greatly limited by sample size. For example, a 2019 study consisting of 14 women with PCOS struggling with their weight assessed changes in body weight, BMI, fat body mass, lean body mass, HDL, and several other parameters. At 12 weeks, participants saw a 9.43-kilogram (20.7 pound) reduction in body weight, 3.35 reduction in BMI, and an 8.29-kilogram (18.2 pound) reduction in fat body mass.23

        A pilot study consisting of five women tested the ability of the ketogenic diet to reduce PCOS symptoms. Researchers provided the women with low-carbohydrate diet books and handouts alongside group meetings to test the ketogenic diet’s efficacy for PCOS. Participants consumed fewer than 20 grams of carbohydrates per day for six months. To test participants’ adherence, researchers measured ketones and body weight. Throughout the 24-week period, participants lost weight with a mean BMI decrease of four kilograms (approximately 8.8 pounds) which was a 14.3% total reduction in body weight.24 The study resulted with clear reductions in testosterone, fasting serum insulin, and an overall improvement of PCOS symptoms.

        Additionally, an eight-week crossover study involving 30 women with PCOS demonstrated various benefits. On average, weight loss ranged from 1.3 to 1.6 kg (2.8-3.5 pounds). When compared to baseline, the results of this study highlight the relationship between decreases in testosterone and fasting insulin.25 Overall, improvements in insulin resistance, testosterone levels, and weight loss, the ketogenic diet may help patients with PCOS.

        Epilepsy

        The original use for the ketogenic diet was as an antiepileptic therapy in children.1 After the discovery of antiepileptic medications, the need for the ketogenic diet diminished. However, researchers are bringing the ketogenic diet back to help treat patients who are refractory to modern antiepileptic medications.

        In combination with medications, researchers have seen up to a 50% reduction in the number of seizures patients are having, with 10% to 15% becoming seizure free.26 Co-administration with antiepileptics is possible for some medications. However, most patients are children and maintaining this strict diet is difficult.

        During a retrospective study, researchers compared the effects of the ketogenic diet to modern anticonvulsant medications in 150 children. At one year, 55% of patients remained on the diet, and 27% of the patients who remained in the trial had a greater than 90% decrease in seizure frequency.27 The diet allowed children to reduce their medication burden (patients averaged having 6.2 anticonvulsant medications before the trial), and proved to be more effective than many medications. More studies in larger patient populations are needed over longer periods of time to make stronger conclusions.

        Research attributes the ketogenic diet’s anticonvulsant properties to an increased seizure threshold. Mitochondria in the brain have healthier biogenesis and density, leading to increased resistance to metabolic stress.28 Another way the diet increases seizure threshold is through decreased glucose consumption and production of glycolytic ATP.28 Subsequently, potassium channels remain open and hyperpolarize the neuronal membrane.28

        Researchers have found that ketone bodies produced from fatty acid oxidation have their own anticonvulsant effects. Although different ketone bodies have different effects, researchers have found that they can alter various neuronal membrane transporters to decrease excitability. Ketone bodies can inhibit transporters like the vesicular glutamate transporter and neuronal potassium channels. Inhibition of these transporters prevents signal transmission and causes decreased excitability of neuronal cells.29

        Other Neurodegenerative Disorders

        In addition to epilepsy, promising evidence shows that the ketogenic diet has favorable effects for other neurodegenerative disorders. As the incidence of Alzheimer’s disease (AD) increases, few treatment options are available. The ketogenic diet may reduce deposition of amyloid beta (Aβ) plaques in patients with AD. With the addition of D-β-hydroxybutyrate (an enantiomer of the ketone body 3HB) to the ketogenic diet, ketones were able to increase neuron survival by reversing Aβ (1-42) toxicity. 30 By increasing ketone production in the liver, the ketogenic diet can reduce the production of reactive oxygen species.31 Ketone bodies also work to block histone hyper-acetylation initiated by histone deacetylases (HDACs), increasing antioxidant levels. The ketogenic diet can improve metabolic efficiency which improves ATP concentrations resulting in further protective effects.31

        Ketones’ neuroprotective effects can potentially help patients with Parkinson’s disease by reducing oxidative stress, maintaining energy supply, and modulating deacetylation and inflammatory responses.31,32 Because they can reduce inflammation and inhibit the glutamate excitatory synapse, infusions of ketone bodies like 3HB may lead to small improvements in Parkinson’s symptoms.32 The use of the ketogenic diet for Parkinson’s is still controversial, thus further research is necessary.

        Glaucoma

        Glaucoma is the second leading cause of vision loss in the world.33 Because ketone bodies are the major source of energy when participating in the ketogenic diet, mitochondrial dysfunction in the retina and optic nerves associated with glaucoma may be decreased.32,34 A 2020 observational study assessed the benefit of the ketogenic diet in 185,638 adults with glaucoma from three studies between 1976 and 2017. Results showed that following a low carbohydrate diet was associated with 20% lower risk of developing primary open-angle glaucoma with initial paracentral visual field loss.35 However, evidence is still lacking, and researchers need to investigate more to prove the ketogenic diet’s efficacy for glaucoma.

        Colorectal Cancer

        According to the American Cancer Society, colorectal cancer is the third leading cause of cancer-related deaths in men and women in the United States.36 A 2022 study suggests that the ketone body, 3HB, can suppress colorectal cancer.37 In one experiment, investigators evaluated the ability of the ketogenic diet to prevent tumor growth and development in mice.

        They discovered that 3HB could suppress tumor growth by reducing proliferation of colonic crypt cells.37 3HB induced positive changes in tumor growth through the upregulation of the homeodomain-only protein X (HOPX). The HOPX protein inhibits cancer organoid growth when overexpressed.37 Mice fed the ketogenic diet showed elevated levels of HOPX specific to the colonic tissue.

        Overall, mice assigned to the ketogenic diet experienced improved long-term survival rates. To test the efficacy of the ketogenic diet for existing tumors, after two cycles of dextran sodium sulfate, researchers introduced the diet to the mice. After exposure to the diet, tumor growth decreased. When researchers discontinued the ketogenic diet from the mice, tumor development proceeded.37

        This discovery led to further testing, this time in human organoids. Organoids are tissue cultures derived from stem cells.38 In the right environment, they are used to replicate organs. They are an essential tool to monitor disease development. Findings mimicked the results from the mice in 41 patients with colorectal cancer. This suggests that the ketogenic diet may be used for the prevention and treatment of colorectal cancer in the future.37

        PAUSE AND PONDER: How do you think patients would feel using the ketogenic diet as a primary treatment for neurodegenerative diseases in the future?

        Contraindications to the Ketogenic Diet

        Some patients should not follow the ketogenic diet. It is contraindicated in patients with liver failure, pancreatitis, inborn disorders of fat metabolism, primary carnitine deficiency, carnitine palmitoyl transferase deficiency, carnitine translocase deficiency, porphyria, and pyruvate kinase deficiency.39,40

        Because of the high risk of developing diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA), patients with type 1 diabetes on SGLT2 inhibitors should not participate in the ketogenic diet.41 DKA occurs when the body produces a dangerously high level of ketones at a rapid pace. Feeling extremely thirsty and frequent urination are early symptoms of DKA. Later symptoms of DKA include dry skin and mouth, flushing, fatigue, stomach upset, and pain. Another notable warning sign of DKA is a fruity odor on the patient’s breath. Acetone is responsible for the sweet scent and indicates high levels of ketones in the body.42 If left untreated, DKA can further develop, ultimately leading to death.

        Pregnancy is also a contraindication. The CDC recommends 340 additional calories per day during the second trimester of pregnancy and 450 additional calories per day during the third trimester.43 The CDC also recommends a well-balanced diet for women who are expecting. Losing weight during pregnancy is not safe and can be harmful to a patient’s baby.43 Folic acid and iron supplementation is pivotal in a fetus’ development. The World Health Organization recommends daily iron and folic acid supplements to reduce the risk of low birth weight.44 If a pregnant woman were to go on the ketogenic diet, she would need to ensure she consumes the suggested dose of 120 mg elemental iron and 2800 µg (2.8 mg) folic acid daily.44 Overall, no evidence indicates that the ketogenic diet is safe for pregnant women.

        KETOGENIC DIET SAFETY AND COUNSELING

        Although several studies suggest the ketogenic diet can be effective for weight loss, limited literature is available concerning its long-term effects. Long-term effects include hepatic steatosis, hypoproteinemia, kidney stones, and vitamin and mineral deficiencies.40

        Currently, no guidelines address the ketogenic diet specifically, and other guidelines do not include the ketogenic diet for the treatment of the previously mentioned diseases. Researchers must complete longer term studies with larger patient populations to prove the ketogenic diet’s benefits and elucidate any long-term risks. Pharmacists and other healthcare providers should keep this in mind when recommending the diet to patients.

        The Keto-Flu

        A common adverse effect of the ketogenic diet is the “keto-flu.” The symptoms are indicative of carbohydrate withdrawal that can create symptoms like brain fog, fatigue, nausea, vomiting, constipation, and muscle soreness.40, 39 Symptoms usually begin within one to two days and resolve within a week or less. Pharmacists can counsel patients on proper hydration, light exercise, rest, and starting the diet slowly to try to prevent the keto-flu.

        Cardiovascular Effects

        As research has previously shown, the ketogenic diet shows short-term benefits for obesity and cholesterol. Due to the overconsumption of fats, researchers wondered about the longer-term effects. In rodent studies, the ketogenic diet led to the development of hepatic inflammation and nonalcoholic fatty liver disease.45 Limited research has been done for nonalcoholic fatty liver disease in humans and more study is needed.

        Other Adverse Effects

        While on the ketogenic diet, patients may experience constipation. The healthcare team should implement a bowel regimen for the patient including an agent like polyethylene glycol 3350 (MiraLAX®) that’s sugar-free, meaning it adds no additional carbs. Other notable side effects are kidney stones and a decrease in bone density. To prevent kidney stone occurrence, pharmacists can counsel patients on drinking large amounts of liquids.. Patients can reach out to their providers to ensure they check bone health routinely. Several advisory groups recommend bone mineral density screening for women aged 65 and older and men aged 70 and older, and for other patients who are at high risk. Patients participating in the ketogenic diet are no exception, and could be considered high-risk if they do not consume enough calcium and vitamin D. Pharmacists can counsel patients to monitor their calcium and vitamin D intake and supplement it if necessary. Upon screening, providers may also recommend calcium and vitamin D supplementation for patients who experience a decline in bone mineral density.46

        What Can Health Professionals Do?

        Pharmacists can counsel patients on ketone testing to prevent occurrences of DKA. When a patient’s blood glucose exceeds 240 mg/dL, testing ketone levels every four to six hours is warranted.47 Ketones can be monitored through the urine and blood. A urine stick test is the most common and changes color depending on the ketone level. Although urine tests are convenient, blood ketone tests from finger sticks are more accurate because they measure 3HB and/or AcAc in the blood.48 If ketone tests indicate high levels, the patient is at moderate or high risk for ketoacidosis and patients should seek medical attention. Table 2 shows normal ketone levels, the optimal state of nutritional ketosis, and the level for ketoacidosis.

        Table 2. Ketone Levels48
        Normal Ketone ≤ 0.5 mmol/L
        Nutritional Ketosis 1 - 3 mmol/L
        Ketoacidosis ≥ 20 mmol/L

        Patient adherence to long-term regimens always becomes challenging. Counseling patients on the importance of sticking to their diet and other medications will increase the likelihood of desired results.

        PAUSE AND PONDER: On average, how long do you think a patient can remain adherent to the ketogenic diet lifestyle?

        Medication management is a vital component of patient safety. To ensure that starting the ketogenic diet is safe, a healthcare professional should perform a complete medication reconciliation. Pharmacists, with an interdisciplinary team, should then develop a plan for medication adjustments (including OTCs) and carbohydrate intake. The use of medication package inserts, institutional databases, and manufacturer helplines can assist the team in determining carbohydrate content of drugs to make the process more seamless.46 The following oral suspensions contain high carbohydrate contents:49    

        • Amoxicillin
        • Nystatin
        • Levetiracetam
        • Midazolam
        • Phenobarbital
        • Phenytoin
        • Baclofen
        • Ibuprofen

        Making patients aware that they must inform the healthcare team of any new medications is equally as important.

        Some medications are of concern with the ketogenic diet.

        • Patients taking SGLT2 inhibitors should not participate in nutritional ketosis due to the increased risk of diabetic ketoacidosis.
        • Clinicians need to monitor patients taking the anticonvulsant valproate (a fatty acid) and might need to adjust their doses since the ketogenic diet increases metabolic efficiency and valproate can be burned by cells for energy.50 Patients may feel as though valproate is not as effective after starting the ketogenic The dose, in this case, may need to be increased temporarily.
        • A case study showed that topiramate can increase blood pH, inducing metabolic acidosis and kidney stones.51 This may become hazardous if patients are already in nutritional ketosis.
        • Patients may experience hypotension while taking antihypertensive agents and following the ketogenic They should monitor blood pressure frequently.

        Pharmacists and other health professionals should inform patients to stay hydrated to reduce the risk for kidney stones and eat low salt food items.

        MYTHS AND FACTS

        The ketogenic diet has become increasingly popular over the years. Halle Berry, Vanessa Hudgens, Kourtney and Kim Kardashian are a few of many celebrities that have tried the ketogenic diet and have seen incredible results. MTV’s Jersey Shore star, Vinny Guadagnino, also known as the Keto Guido, is no stranger to the diet and has even written a keto cookbook. Seeing such drastic transformations all over tabloids and social media, without a doubt leaves people wondering “Why not? If they can do it, so can I,” while others think, “This can’t be real.”

         

        Many misconceptions create skepticism among patients from the abundance of information available on the internet. Pharmacists can alleviate patient worries by staying informed and referring patients to reliable resources. Table 3 below dispels common myths.

         

        Table 3. Myths and Facts About the Ketogenic Diet52
        MYTH FACT
        The ketogenic diet is bad for your health. The ketogenic diet has several health benefits including:

        ●      Weight loss

        ●      Improved brain function

        ●      Reduction of seizures

        ●      Blood sugar management

        ●      Improvement of PCOS symptoms

        Side effects may include nausea, vomiting, constipation, or other common side effects.

        All I have to do is consume any type of fat while going keto. Patients should eat healthy fats like avocados, nuts, seeds, and fish. Healthy fats lower LDL levels and raise HDL levels. Unhealthy fats saturated and trans fatty acids (e.g., fried foods, pastries, butter, and cream) raise LDL levels.
        If I go keto, I will get ketoacidosis. Ketosis and ketoacidosis are different conditions. The ketogenic diet induces ketosis.

        ●      In ketosis, the body burns fat since carbohydrates are unavailable. Nutritional ketosis is a normal response.

        ●      Ketoacidosis is a complication seen primarily in patients with T2D where the blood becomes acidic. It can be life-threatening.

        I will have no energy if I start a ketogenic diet. Some people may experience an adjustment period while beginning the ketogenic diet. They may experience temporary fatigue, brain fog, or the “keto-flu.” Eventual ketone production fuels the brain with energy and resolves symptoms.
        The ketogenic diet is only useful for weight management. The ketogenic diet has proven effective in patients with diabetes, PCOS, metabolic syndromes, Alzheimer’s disease, and obesity.
        I can’t drink any alcohol while on the ketogenic diet. Various low-carb alcoholic beverages can be substituted. Light beer, vodka, gin, and rum are a few examples, but patients should keep intake low-moderate. Patients should avoid sweet drinks and cocktails to prevent high sugar intake.

         

        Another common misinterpretation is that any low-carbohydrate food is considered keto. No food item has the same benefit as the other. The healthcare team must work with patients to create dietary plans that are more feasible for them. With a tailored diet plan, patients are more likely to feel structured and reach their goals. Overall, providers should conclude that patient education is necessary to certify patient trust and safety.

         

        PATIENT RESOURCES

         

        Reliable resources for patients are hard to find. Table 4 describes some resources that pharmacists can provide to patients for more information.

         

        Table 4. Resources About the Ketogenic Diet for Patients

        Cleveland Health Clinic -        Discusses what patients eat on the ketogenic diet

        -        Small tidbits on benefits and risks

        -        Includes information on populations that could benefit from the diet

        -        https://health.clevelandclinic.org/what-is-the-keto-diet-and-should-you-try-it/

        Harvard University Health -        Discusses key-takeaways from a ketogenic diet review

        -        Gives food examples

        -        Easy-to-understand

        -        Discusses health implications for certain patient populations

        -        https://www.health.harvard.edu/blog/ketogenic-diet-is-the-ultimate-low-carb-diet-good-for-you-2017072712089

        Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics -        Popular nutrition website that presents findings on various health topics

        -        Discusses populations that the ketogenic diet would not be safe in

        -        Gives background on the diet

        -        https://www.eatright.org/health/wellness/fad-diets/what-is-the-ketogenic-diet

        Everyday Health -        Discusses risks and benefits of the diet

        -        Provides food substitutions and daily meal plans

        -        Discussion potential supplements and vitamins that may be beneficial to dieters

        -        Discusses other nutrition techniques for other topics

        -        Articles are peer-reviewed

        -        https://www.everydayhealth.com/diet-nutrition/ketogenic-diet/comprehensive-ketogenic-diet-food-list-follow/

        EatingWell -        Brief explanation about the ketogenic diet

        -        Provides variety of food options for dieters

        -        Easy-to-understand and discusses other nutrition techniques

        -        Peer reviewed and gives background on all authors/editors

        -        https://www.eatingwell.com/article/290697/ketogenic-diet-101-a-beginners-guide/

         

         

        CONCLUSION

        Following a low-carbohydrate, high fat diet that uses ketone production to fuel the body requires a large selection of foods if patients are to maintain this diet. This is the challenge of the ketogenic diet. Pharmacists and technicians need a good understanding of what this diet is—and what it is not—so they know when prescribers are likely to use it for diseases. Pharmacists, as they screen for contraindications, should identify the signs of ketosis and counsel patients on managing safe ketone levels.

        Patient education is the key to reaching patient goals. Pharmacists must be ready to address patient questions and concerns regarding the ketogenic diet in conjunction with current medications. When pharmacists are a part of the care process, outcomes improve.

         

        Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

        Ketogenic Diet: Fad Weight Loss or True Medical Benefits?
        PHARMACIST POST TEST QUESTIONS
        25-072 P

        LEARNING OBJECTIVES
        After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to:
        - Describe the components and mechanisms of the ketogenic diet for medical purposes.
        - List disease states in which the ketogenic diet has been proven to help
        - Use this information to counsel patients who are interested in the ketogenic diet’s medical benefits

        *

        1. Which of the following statements is a MYTH regarding the ketogenic diet?
        a. The ketogenic diet benefits patients wanting to lose weight from PCOS.
        b. A patient starting the ketogenic diet will have ketoacidosis.
        c. The ketogenic diet does not prevent patients from alcohol consumption.

        *

        2. James is a 46-year-old male with type 1 diabetes with a BMI of 28. His current medications include insulin-glargine, empagliflozin, and hydrochlorothiazide. He would like to start the ketogenic diet to lose weight. Would you recommend James start the ketogenic diet?
        a. Yes, James should start the ketogenic diet right away. It has proven to be efficacious in patients with type 1 diabetes.
        b. No, James is currently on an SGLT2 inhibitor. He is at an increased risk of developing DKA.
        c. James needs to contact his primary care physician for more information.

        *

        3. Which of the following chronic conditions needs more information for the ketogenic diet to be a proven treatment?
        a. PCOS
        b. Epilepsy
        c. Glaucoma

        *

        4. Mary is an obese 34-year-old female who comes into the pharmacy with a concern. She recently started the ketogenic diet and is experiencing fatigue, nausea, and brain fog. What advice can you give Maria?
        a. Inform Maria that she should stop the ketogenic diet immediately and contact her doctor.
        b. Inform Maria that this is completely normal, and she may be experiencing the keto-flu.
        c. Recommend Maria take over-the-counter acetaminophen for her nausea. Her symptoms will resolve in a few days.

        *

        5. Which neurodegenerative disorder has substantial evidence that the ketogenic diet may be beneficial?
        a. Refractory epilepsy
        b. Dementia
        c. Parkinson’s Disease

        *

        6. Which of the following best describes ketogenesis?
        a. The process of producing ketone bodies for energy, an alternative pathway to normal metabolism
        b. The last step in the creation of ketone bodies, when AcAc and 3HB are cleaved from HMG-CoA
        c. The process that breaks down fatty acids acetyl-CoA, so the body can enter the citric acid cycle

        *

        7. Which of the following disorders was seen in animal models after long term use of the ketogenic diet?
        a. Hematoma
        b. Non-alcoholic fatty liver disease
        c. Major rashes

        *

        8. What was the ketogenic diet originally created for?
        a. Weight loss
        b. Type 2 Diabetes
        c. Epilepsy

        *

        9. Becky comes into the pharmacy and is asking for help for recommendations on starting a ketogenic diet. If she is consuming 2000 calories per day, how many fats should you recommend for Becky to consume each day?
        a. About 100g of fats daily, which is around 50% of her daily calories
        b. About 165g of fats daily, which is around 70% of her daily calories
        c. About 30g of fats daily, which is around 15% of her daily calories

        *

        10. What are the general effects of insulin and glucagon on ketosis?
        a. Insulin and glucagon are both anti-ketogenic
        b. Insulin is pro-ketogenic, and glucagon is anti-ketogenic
        c. Insulin is anti-ketogenic, and glucagon is pro-ketogenic

        Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

        Ketogenic Diet: Fad Weight Loss or True Medical Benefits?
        TECHNICIAN POST TEST QUESTIONS
        25-072 T

        LEARNING OBJECTIVES
        After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to:
        - Describe the components of the ketogenic diet for medical purposes
        - List disease states in which the ketogenic diet has been proven to help
        - Identify situations in which patients need referral for additional information

        *

        1. Which of the following statements is a MYTH regarding the ketogenic diet?
        a. The ketogenic diet benefits patients wanting to lose weight from PCOS.
        b. A patient starting the ketogenic diet will have ketoacidosis.
        c. The ketogenic diet does not prevent patients from alcohol consumption.

        *

        2. James is a 46-year-old male with type 1 diabetes and is 156 lbs. He is currently taking empagliflozin (an SGLT2 inhibitor). He would like to start the ketogenic diet to lose weight. From what you learned, why should James avoid the ketogenic diet?
        a. James is not overweight. He does not need the ketogenic diet to lose more weight.
        b. James is currently on an SGLT2 inhibitor. He is at an increased risk of developing DKA.
        c. James needs to contact his primary care physician to see if he is a candidate before starting the diet.

        *

        3. Which of the following chronic conditions needs more information for the ketogenic diet to be a proven treatment?
        a. PCOS
        b. Epilepsy
        c. Glaucoma

        *

        4. Mary is an obese 34-year-old female who comes into the pharmacy with a concern. She recently started the ketogenic diet and is experiencing fatigue, nausea, and brain fog. What is Maria experiencing?
        a. Maria is experiencing withdrawal from not being adherent to the diet. She should create a new care-plan with her provider.
        b. Maria is experiencing the “keto-flu.” Refer her to the pharmacist so she can further explain the adverse effect.
        c. Maria is ketoacidotic. Ask Maria if anyone has mentioned that her breath smells fruity.

        *

        5. Which neurodegenerative disorder has substantial evidence that the ketogenic diet is beneficial for their condition?
        a. Epilepsy
        b. Parkinson’s Disease
        c. Dementia

        *

        6. A patient comes into the pharmacy after beginning a new ketogenic diet. The patient is worried because she read online that long term effects of the diet could cause a “fat liver.” What is the best response to the patient?
        a. Refer the patient to the pharmacist for additional information.
        b. Describe the many long-term effects of the ketogenic diet
        c. Describe a study about non-alcoholic fatty liver with long term dieting

        *

        7. What was the ketogenic diet originally created for?
        a. Weight loss
        b. Type 2 Diabetes
        c. Epilepsy

        *

        8. Becky comes into the pharmacy and is asking for help for recommendations on starting a ketogenic diet. If she is consuming 2000 calories per day, how many fats should Becky consume each day?
        a. About 100g of fats daily, which is around 50% of her daily calories
        b. About 165g of fats daily, which is around 70% of her daily calories
        c. About 30g of fats daily, which is around 15% of her daily calories

        *

        9. Which of the following best describes ketogenesis?
        a. The process of producing ketone bodies for energy, an alternative pathway to normal metabolism
        b. The last step in the creation of ketone bodies, when AcAc and 3HB are cleaved from HMG-CoA
        c. The process that breaks down fatty acids acetyl-CoA, so the body can enter the citric acid cycle

        *

        10. What is the best response to a patient who is wondering how to count carbohydrates for her ketogenic diet?
        a. Use any carbohydrate counting app, all you must do is enter the amount of carbohydrates on the nutrition label.
        b. Subtract the fiber carbohydrates from the total carbohydrates to get net carbohydrates and record that number.
        c. Record only the carbohydrates from fiber. Other types of carbohydrates do not count because they are not digested the same.

        References

        Full List of References

        References

           
          RE FERENCES
          1. Wheless JW. History of the ketogenic diet. Epilepsia. 2008;49 Suppl 8:3-5. doi:10.1111/j.1528-1167.2008.01821.x
          2. Howard J. 10 health questions that had you Googling this year. CNN Wire Service, Atlanta. December 14, 2017.
          3. 2020 Food & Health Survey. (n.d.). Accessed July 20, 2022. https://foodinsight.org/wp-content/uploads/2020/06/IFIC-Food-and-Health-Survey-2020.pdf
          4. 5 Treating Epileptic Seizures in Children, Young People and Adults. NICE. (n.d.). Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.nice.org.uk/guidance/ng217/chapter/5-Treating-epileptic-seizures-in-children-young-people-and-adults
          5. Brodie MJ. Antiepileptic drug therapy the story so far. Seizure. 2010;19(10):650-655. doi:10.1016/j.seizure.2010.10.027
          6. Home of the Office of Disease Prevention and Health Promotion. Accessed July 25, 2022. https://health.gov/sites/default/files/2019-09/2015-2020_Dietary_Guidelines.pdf
          7. Should you try the keto diet? Harvard Health. (2020, August 31). Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.health.harvard.edu/staying-healthy/should-you-try-the-keto-diet
          8. Ketogenic Diet FAQ. Diabetes UK. (2020, March 6). Accessed July 25, 2022. https://www.diabetes.co.uk/keto/ketogenic-diet-faqs.html
          9. Laffel L. Ketone bodies: a review of physiology, pathophysiology and application of monitoring to diabetes. Diabetes Metab Res Rev. 1999;15(6):412-426. doi:10.1002/(sici)1520-7560(199911/12)15:6<412::aid-dmrr72>3.0.co;2-8
          10. Mitchell GA, Kassovska-Bratinova S, Boukaftane Y, et al. Medical aspects of ketone body metabolism. Clin Invest Med. 1995;18(3):193-216.
          11. Dorland’s Illustrated Medical Dictionary. 28th edition (September 1, 1994)
          12. Reed WD, Baab PJ, Hawkins RL, Ozand PT, et al. The effects of insulin and glucagon on ketone-body turnover. Biochem J. 1984;221(2):439-444. doi:10.1042/bj2210439
          13. Carbohydrates and blood sugar. The Nutrition Source. Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/carbohydrates/carbohydrates-and-blood-sugar/#:~:text=When%20people%20eat%20a%20food,sugar%20for%20energy%20or%20storage.
          14. Lainey Younkin. Complete Keto Diet Food list: What you can and cannot eat if you're on a ketogenic diet. EatingWell. Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.eatingwell.com/article/291245/complete-keto-diet-food-list-what-you-can-and-cannot-eat-if-youre-on-a-ketogenic-diet/
          15. Brierley Horton, M. S. (n.d.). What can you eat on a vegetarian keto diet? EatingWell. Accessed July 25, 2022. https://www.eatingwell.com/article/291617/what-can-you-eat-on-a-vegetarian-keto-diet/
          16. CDC. Adult Obesity Facts. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Published February 11, 2021. Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.cdc.gov/obesity/data/adult.html
          17. Mansoor N, Vinknes KJ, Veierød MB, Retterstøl K , et al. Effects of low-carbohydrate diets v. low-fat diets on body weight and cardiovascular risk factors: a meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. British Journal of Nutrition. 2016;115(3):466-479. doi:10.1017/S0007114515004699
          18. Falkenhain K, Locke SR, Lowe DA, et al. Keyto app and device versus WW app on weight loss and metabolic risk in adults with overweight or obesity: A randomized trial. Obesity (Silver Spring). 2021;29(10):1606-1614. doi:10.1002/oby.23242
          19. Bueno NB, de Melo IS, de Oliveira SL, da Rocha Ataide T, et al. Very-low-carbohydrate ketogenic diet v. low-fat diet for long-term weight loss: a meta-analysis of randomised controlled trials. Br J Nutr. 2013;110(7):1178-1187. doi:10.1017/S0007114513000548
          20. Yancy WS Jr, Foy M, Chalecki AM, Vernon MC, Westman EC, et al. A low-carbohydrate, ketogenic diet to treat type 2 diabetes. Nutr Metab (Lond). 2005;2:34. Published 2005 Dec 1. doi:10.1186/1743-7075-2-34
          21. Boden G, Sargrad K, Homko C, Mozzoli M, Stein TP, et al. Effect of a low-carbohydrate diet on appetite, blood glucose levels, and insulin resistance in obese patients with type 2 diabetes. Ann Intern Med. 2005;142(6):403-411. doi:10.7326/0003-4819-142-6-200503150-00006
          22. Batch JT, Lamsal SP, Adkins M, Sultan S, Ramirez MN, et al. Advantages and Disadvantages of the Ketogenic Diet: A Review Article. Cureus. 2020;12(8):e9639. Published 2020 Aug 10. doi:10.7759/cureus.9639
          23. Paoli A, Mancin L, Giacona MC, Bianco A, Caprio M, et al. Effects of a ketogenic diet in overweight women with polycystic ovary syndrome. J Transl Med . 2020;18(1):104. Published 2020 Feb 27. doi:10.1186/s12967-020-02277-0
          24. Mavropoulos JC, Yancy WS, Hepburn J, Westman EC, et al. The effects of a low-carbohydrate, ketogenic diet on the polycystic ovary syndrome: a pilot study. Nutr Metab (Lond). 2005;2:35. Published 2005 Dec 16. doi:10.1186/1743-7075-2-35
          25. Gower BA, Chandler-Laney PC, Ovalle F, et al. Favourable metabolic effects of a eucaloric lower-carbohydrate diet in women with PCOS. Clin Endocrinol (Oxf). 2013;79(4):550-557. doi:10.1111/cen.12175
          26. Ketogenic diet. Epilepsy Foundation. Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.epilepsy.com/treatment/dietary-therapies/ketogenic-diet
          27. Freeman JM, Vining EP, Pillas DJ, Pyzik PL, Casey JC, Kelly LM , et al.The efficacy of the ketogenic diet-1998: a prospective evaluation of intervention in 150 children. Pediatrics. 1998;102(6):1358-1363. doi:10.1542/peds.102.6.1358
          28. Ułamek-Kozioł M, Czuczwar SJ, Januszewski S, Pluta R , et al. Ketogenic Diet and Epilepsy. Nutrients. 2019;11(10):2510. Published 2019 Oct 18. doi:10.3390/nu11102510
          29. Zhang Y, Xu J, Zhang K, Yang W, Li B, et al. The A nticonvulsant Effects of Ketogenic Diet on Epileptic Seizures and Potential Mechanisms. Curr Neuropharmacol. 2018;16(1):66-70. doi:10.2174/1570159X15666170517153509
          30. Kashiwaya Y, Takeshima T, Mori N, Nakashima K, Clarke K, Veech RL, et al. D-beta-hydroxybutyrate protects neurons in models of Alzheimer's and Parkinson's disease. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 2000;97(10):5440-5444. doi:10.1073/pnas.97.10.5440
          31. Yang H, Shan W, Zhu F, Wu J, Wang Q, et al. Ketone Bodies in Neurological Diseases: Focus on Neuroprotection and Underlying Mechanisms. Front Neurol. 2019;10:585. Published 2019 Jun 12. doi:10.3389/fneur.2019.00585
          32. Gough SM, Casella A, Ortega KJ, Hackam AS, et al. Neuroprotection by the Ketogenic Diet: Evidence and Controversies. Front Nutr. 2021;8:782657. Published 2021 Nov 23. doi:10.3389/fnut.2021.782657
          33. Quigley HA. Number of people with glaucoma worldwide. Br J Ophthalmol. 1996;80(5):389-393. doi:10.1136/bjo.80.5.389
          34. Zarnowski T, Tulidowicz-Bielak M, Kosior-Jarecka E, Zarnowska I, A Turski W, Gasior M, et al. A ketogenic diet may offer neuroprotection in glaucoma and mitochondrial diseases of the optic nerve. Med Hypothesis Discov Innov Ophthalmol. 2012;1(3):45-49.
          35. Hanyuda, A., Rosner, B.A., Wiggs, J.L. et al. Low-carbohydrate-diet scores and the risk of primary open-angle glaucoma: Data from three US cohorts. Eye (2020). https:/doi.org/10.1038/s41433-020-0820-5
          36. American Cancer Society. Key Statistics for Colorectal Cancer. Cancer.org. Published 2019. https://www.cancer.org/cancer/colon-rectal-cancer/about/key-statistics.html
          37. Dmitrieva-Posocco, O., Wong, A.C., Lundgren, P. et al. β-Hydroxybutyrate suppresses colorectal cancer. Nature 605, 160–165 (2022). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41586-022-04649-6
          38. Organoids: A new window into disease, development and discovery. hsci.harvard.edu. https://hsci.harvard.edu/organoids#:~:text=Organoids%20are%20tiny%2C%20self%2Dorganized
          39. Intermountain Healthcare. Beware the Keto Flu. intermountainhealthcare.org. Published November 2, 2017. Accessed July 20, 2022. https://intermountainhealthcare.org/blogs/topics/live-well/2018/03/beware-the-keto-flu/
          40. Masood W, Annamaraju P, Uppaluri KR. Et al. Ketogenic Diet. [Updated 2021 Nov 26]. In: StatPearls [Internet]. Treasure Island (FL): StatPearls Publishing; 2022 Jan-. Accessed July 20, 2022. Available from: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK499830/
          41. Bolla AM, Caretto A, Laurenzi A, Scavini M, Piemonti L. Et al. Low-Carb and Ketogenic Diets in Type 1 and Type 2 Diabetes. Nutrients. 2019;11(5):962. Published 2019 Apr 26. doi:10.3390/nu11050962
          42. Ruzsányi V, Péter Kalapos M. Breath acetone as a potential marker in clinical practice. Journal of Breath Research. 2017;11(2):024002. doi:10.1088/1752-7163/aa66d3
          43. Weight Gain During Pregnancy . Pregnancy .Maternal and Infant Health | CDC. www.cdc.gov. Published June 14, 2022. Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.cdc.gov/reproductivehealth/maternalinfanthealth/pregnancy-weight-gain.htm#:~:text=Eat%20a%20balanced%20diet%20high
          44. Antenatal iron supplementation. www.who.int. Accessed July 25, 2022. https://www.who.int/data/nutrition/nlis/info/antenatal-iron-supplementation
          45. Kosinski C, Jornayvaz FR. Effects of Ketogenic Diets on Cardiovascular Risk Factors: Evidence from Animal and Human Studies. Nutrients. 2017;9(5):517. Published 2017 May 19. doi:10.3390/nu9050517
          46. Medication Management on the Ketogenic Diet. Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.choc.org/wp/wp-content/uploads/2017/03/RT-6-CurlessJ-RDsInPractice-Keto.pdf
          47. CDC. Diabetic Ketoacidosis. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Published January 20, 2021. Accessed July 20, 2022. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/basics/diabetic-ketoacidosis.html
          48. Volek JS, Phinney SD. The Art and Science of Low Carbohydrate Performance. Beyond Obesity Llc; 2012.
          49. Matthews Friends. 2022. Carbohydrate Content of Medications. Accessed July 25, 2022. [online] Available at:
          50. Ede, Georgia. Ketogenic Diets and Psychiatric Medications | Psychology Today. Accessed July 20, 2022. www.psychologytoday.com. https://www.psychologytoday.com/us/blog/diagnosis-diet/201803/ketogenic-diets-and-psychiatric-medications#:~:text=The%20ones%20most%20likely%20to
          51. Salek T, Andel I, Kurfurstova I. Topiramate induced metabolic acidosis and kidney stones - a case study. Biochem Med (Zagreb). 2017;27(2):404-410. doi:10.11613/BM.2017.042
          52. McAuliffe L. 17 Keto Myths: Debunked. Dr. Robert Kiltz. Published January 6, 2022. https://www.doctorkiltz.com/keto-myths/.

          PATIENT SAFETY: The Art of Insulin Dose Adjustments in the Setting of GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs

          Learning Objectives

           

          Pharmacist Educational Objectives

          After completing the continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

          • Describe different types of insulin along with their appropriate use
          • Recall newer non-insulin medications for diabetes, along with risks vs. benefits
          • Analyze clinical information pertaining to insulin + GLP-1 or GLP-1/GIP agonist medication adjustments
          • Demonstrate medication adjustment recommendations while incorporating patient-specific data

          Pharmacy Technician Educational Objectives

          After completing the continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

          • Describe different types of insulin along with their appropriate use
          • Recognize over the counter treatment options for hypoglycemia
          • Recall newer non-insulin medications for diabetes, along with risks and benefits
          • Identify when to refer patients with questions about their diabetes medications to the pharmacist

            Pharmacist holding a paint brush and palette with insulin vials and syringes surrounding her.

            Release Date:

            Release Date: November 15, 2025

            Expiration Date: November 15, 2028

            Course Fee

            Pharmacists: $7

            Pharmacy Technicians: $4

            ACPE UANs

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-059-H05-P

            Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-059-H05-T

            Session Codes

            Pharmacist: 25YC59-UWT63

            Pharmacy Technician: 25YC59-WTU36

            Accreditation Hours

            2.0 hours of CE

            Accreditation Statements

            The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-059-H05-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

             

            Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

            The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

            Faculty

             
            Janki Shah, PharmD, BCACP, BC-ADM
            Clinical Pharmacist
            9amHealth
            Encinitas, CA

            Faculty Disclosure

            In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

            Janki Shah, PharmD, BCACP, BC-ADM has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

            ABSTRACT

            Insulin remains a cornerstone of treatment for diabetes mellitus (DM). Access to newer DM medications, which have cardiorenal benefits and a lower risk of hypoglycemia, is increasing with improved insurance coverage and lower cost options. With these newer medications having greater accessibility, the need to adjust the patient’s current medication regimen to incorporate the new medicines safely is increased. The adjustments should account for the patient’s current glycemic control, glycemic targets, planned lifestyle changes, risk of hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia, and risk of adverse drug reactions.

            CONTENT

            Content

            INTRODUCTION

            This continuing education (CE) activity aims to guide safe insulin dose adjustments when adding glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) receptor agonists (GLP-1-RAs), and dual glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP)/GLP-1 RAs (GIP/GLP-1 RAs) in those with type 2 diabetes (T2D). Clinical utilization of GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs in combination with insulin has been lagging despite their benefits.1 This is due to a lack of clinician comfort with insulin adjustment despite Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approval and improved insurance coverage. Pharmacists can optimize a patient’s regimen by reducing the risk of hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia, adverse drug reactions (ADRs), and medication/injection burden.

             

            Diabetes Basics

            Diabetes is an endocrinological disorder characterized by metabolic imbalance (glucose utilization and insulin effect).2 In patients who have diabetes, hyperglycemia occurs and could lead to long-term complications such as myocardial infarction, cerebrovascular accident, peripheral artery disease, retinopathy, nephropathy, and neuropathy.2

             

            A glycated hemoglobin level (A1c) greater than or equal to 6.5% indicates a person has diabetes.3 When discussing how an A1c correlates to a patient’s self-monitored blood glucose (SMBG; home blood glucose testing using a glucometer or a continuous glucose monitor [CGM]), it can be helpful to consider an estimated average glucose (eAG).3 The complete equation and calculator can be found at https://professional.diabetes.org/glucose_calc. A simplification is remembering that an A1c of 7% equals an eAG of 154 mg/dL and that each A1c percentage represents about 30 mg/dL. Generally, for an A1c goal of less than 7%, fasting blood sugars (FBGs) should be between 80 and 130 mg/dL, and 2-hour post-prandial glucose (PPGs) values should be less than 180 mg/dL.3

             

            Previously, mainstay treatment options for glycemic control included metformin, sulfonylureas (glimepiride, glipizide, and glyburide), thiazolidinediones (pioglitazone), and dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitors (alogliptin (Nesina), linagliptin (Tradjenta), saxagliptin (Onglyza), and sitagliptin (Januvia). Newer treatment options that are focused on cardiorenal benefits, weight management, and glycemic control include4

            • Sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 (SGLT-2) inhibitors: canagliflozin (Invokana), bexagliflozin (Brenzavvy), dapagliflozin (Farxiga), empagliflozin (Jardiance), and ertugliflozin (Steglatro)
            • GLP-1-RAs: dulaglutide (Trulicity), exenatide ER (Bydureon), exenatide IR (Byetta), liraglutide (Victoza), lixisenatide (Adlyxin), and semaglutide (Ozempic)
            • GIP/GLP-1 RA (tirzepatide [Mounjaro])

             

            The diabetes management landscape is changing. Even if patients have appropriate glycemic control, their medication regimen may not be optimal based on co-morbidities. Please see the following link to the American Diabetes Association’s recommendations on medication selection: https://diabetesjournals.org/view-large/figure/5311673/dc25S009f3.tif.

             

            Insulin

            Insulin has been a cornerstone of diabetes management for decades. With the advent of newer medication classes, it can appear as though insulin’s importance in current practice is diminishing. Many individuals still benefit from the use of insulin, including those with type 1 diabetes (T1D), patients with newly diagnosed T2D with an elevated A1c, and those with access/cost concerns regarding branded medications.

             

            Although treatment options for diabetes have advanced and include SGLT-2 inhibitors, GLP-1-RAs, and GIP/GLP-1 RAs, these drugs can be cost prohibitive depending on the situation.4 Insulin itself can also be cost-prohibitive depending on insurance coverage (or lack thereof) and patient-specific dosing needs. In certain situations where patients pay out-of-pocket, reducing the daily insulin dose can help reduce the cost.

             

            Insulin’s onset of action, duration of action, and concentration help to categorize it.

            • Patients use bolus insulins such as ultra rapid, short, or regular insulin prior to meals to manage blood glucose spikes. These insulin types generally help lower PPGs. Checking SMBGs two hours after a meal helps to understand the effect while checking prior to mealtimes ensures safety.
            • Patients use basal insulins, injected once or twice daily, to provide constant insulin action throughout the day and night. Options include intermediate, long-acting, and ultra-long-acting. These insulin types generally help lower FBGs and patients who use these insulins should check their SMBGs when in a fasting state as well.
            • Examples of concentrated insulins include insulin lispro U-200 (insulin lispro U-200), insulin degludec (Tresiba U-200), insulin glargine U-300 (Tuojeo U-300), and insulin regular U-500. Testing for insulin degludec U200 and insulin glargine U-300 would match basal insulin testing. Testing for insulin lispro U-200 and insulin regular U-500 would match bolus insulin testing.
            • Mixed insulins contain a mix of a bolus/regular insulin and an intermediate insulin in pre-fixed percentages to reduce the injection burden. Examples include insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart (Novolog 70/30), insulin lispro protamine/insulin lispro (Humalog 75/25 or Humalog 50/50), and insulin isophone (NPH)/insulin regular (Humulin 70/30 or Novolin 70/30). For safety, these require fixed meal timings and portions and thus testing is recommended two hours before and after breakfast and dinner.

             

            Insulin Dosing

            In practice, clinicians usually start patients on a basal insulin rather than a bolus insulin as it involves fewer injections and provides steadier coverage throughout the day. Generally, a starting basal insulin dose is calculated using 0.1 to 0.2 units/kg/day or 10 units daily.5 When insulin needs increase beyond 0.5 units/kg/day of basal insulin, providers (such as clinical pharmacists) can consider the addition of bolus insulin.6 Using greater than 0.5 units/kg/day of basal insulin is referred to as overbasalization (see SIDEBAR).

             

             

            SIDEBAR: Overbasalization6,7

            Overbasalization describes the situation in which the patient’s bedtime glucose readings are significantly higher (greater than 50 points) than their fasting values. Ideally, bedtime and fasting readings should be in equilibrium. Overbasalization is common in patients whose basal insulins are titrated to a fasting goal without considering the patient’s end-of-day blood sugars. It also occurs if prescribers think adding a medication would increase the patient’s injection/medication burden. This generally occurs when the patient’s basal insulin dosing exceeds 0.5 units/kg/day. Ideally, the provider should consider a medication that helps lower PPGs.

             

            Using GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs has increased the ability to minimize the need for bolus insulin, reduce the risk of hypoglycemia, and lower PPG. Using a collaborative practice agreement within an interprofessional collaborative team has significantly reduced overbasalization and A1c.

             

             

            The total amount of insulin a patient takes in a day is their total daily dose (TDD). This TDD is a helpful starting point when making insulin adjustments. For example, if a patient is taking 100 units of insulin per day (this could be basal or basal + bolus) then generally 10% to 15% is a reasonable adjustment.5 This equates to an increase or decrease of 10 to 15 units. For a smaller TDD of 20 units the adjustment would be 2 to 3 units. Alternately, patients can self-adjust the dosing within specified parameters such as increasing a basal insulin by 2 units (up to a pre-specified maximum) every three days that the FBGs are above goal.5

             

            Patient/situation specific parameters that additionally need to be considered are the patient specific glycemic goal, glycemic trends (variability vs. stability), planned lifestyle changes, hypo/hyperglycemia, and ADRs. The prior recommendations only account for medication changes while everything else remains constant. Realistically, dosing changes will likely need to be made at larger percentages to accommodate multiple changing factors.

             

            If PPGs indicate a need for improvement of glycemic control, clinicians can consider either a GLP-1 RA (for T2D) or bolus insulin (T1D or T2D). Adding a GLP-1 RA can be more complex for those on a multiple daily injection (MDI) insulin regimen (basal + bolus). Guidance regarding basal + bolus insulin dose deprescribing varies.

             

            Insulin Dose Adjustment with GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs

            Three studies have reviewed the efficacy of adding liraglutide to an MDI insulin regimen in patients with T2D.8-10 They documented a significant reduction in A1c from baseline in the GLP-1 RA group compared to the MDI control groups. Two studies—one conducted by researchers at the Mountain Diabetes and Endocrine Center, Asheville, North Carolina and a second conducted in Europe and Saudi Arabia called the MDI Liraglutide Trial—showed significantly reduced insulin dosing in the liraglutide groups.8,9 In contrast, the third study (N = 71), conducted at the University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center (UTSMC), Dallas, did not show a significant reduction in insulin dosing.10

             

            The Mountain Diabetes and Endocrine Center study made insulin dose adjustments based on A1c but included only 37 participants. The study protocol indicated that researchers should reduce the basal dose by 20% for those with an A1c less than or equal to 8%.8

             

            In the MDI Liraglutide Trial (N = 124), the insulin adjustments were based on FBGs and PPGs . When fasting values were less than 90 mg/dL or participants had nocturnal hypoglycemia, the researchers reduced the basal dose by 20% to 40%. If the fasting values were 90 to 126 mg/dL, the researchers reduced the basal doses by 20% to 30%. The researchers did not adjust the basal insulin dose if fasting glucose levels were above 126 mg/dL. If they found the patient’s pre-meal glucose value to be less than 126 mg/dL, they reduced the bolus dose of the prior meal by 10% to 20%. If participants experienced daytime hypoglycemia, the researchers reduced the bolus dose of the preceding meal by more than 20%.9

             

            The UTSMC study protocol reduced insulin doses by 20% if the A1c was less than or equal to 8%. The investigators did not adjust the insulin dose if the A1c was greater than 8%. They did not define the specific bolus and basal insulin dose adjustments.10

             

            The TRANSITION2D study (N = 60) reviewed insulin deintensification with once weekly semaglutide.11 These researchers transitioned patients who were reasonably well controlled (A1c 7.5% or less) from bolus insulin to a GLP-1 RA (semaglutide) in a one-step approach. They discontinued bolus insulin upon initiating semaglutide, then titrated the semaglutide dose.11 A limitation to real-world applicability was that less than 25% of the participants were on 80 to 120 units of insulin per day.11 Concerns in the real world would be a lack of tolerance to semaglutide or lack of follow-up on the patients’ behalf, as this would lead to hyperglycemia. Also, shared decision making between the patient/provider would first need to optimize glycemic control using insulin dose adjustments to reduce the risk of hyperglycemia/diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA)/hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS).

             

            Traditional insulin dosing guidance and these studies show that insulin dose adjustments can vary widely from 10% to 40%. One path isn’t necessarily correct as adjusting insulin doses is an art of sorts.

             

            HYPOGLYCEMIA TREATMENT

            Accounting for and incorporating historical patient-specific parameters helps minimize the risk of hypoglycemia. Patient education regarding appropriate identification, treatment, and prevention of recurrence is paramount for safety. Common hypoglycemia symptoms are hunger, difficulty concentrating, headache, shakiness, sweating, and irritability. The 15-15 Rule advises patients with low blood sugar, defined as less than 70 mg/dL, to consume 15 g of carbohydrates and then wait 15 minutes to recheck the SMBG. Options to increase the blood sugar are 4 ounces of regular juice or non-diet soda, 1 tablespoon of sugar, honey, or syrup, 3 to 4 glucose tablets, or 1 dose glucose gel.12 It is important to know that glucose tablets and gel are available without a prescription. Most patients know that if they experience hypoglycemia, they should eat something sweet. However, without following the treatment/prevention steps, patients may experience additional concerns. Table 1 describes appropriate action steps.

             

            Table 1. Action Steps to Address Hypoglycemia13

            Appropriate step Assessment questions
            Patients must check initial and subsequent glucose values to have objective data What values did you see when you checked your blood sugar?
            Initial treatment should consist of 15 grams of simple carbohydrates for the quickest improvement of hypoglycemia symptoms.

            Of note, treatment with complex carbohydrates or carbohydrates + protein/fat* will delay the improvement of hypoglycemia symptoms.

            What food/drink/treatment option did you initially use to address the low blood sugar?
            Overtreatment with more than 15 grams of carbohydrates leads to overcorrection (hyperglycemia) How much of the food/drink/treatment option did you initially use to address the low blood sugar?
            After consuming a simple carbohydrate, the patient should consume a complex carbohydrate + protein pairing, to prevent hypoglycemia from recurring within two hours Once the blood sugar returned to a safe range, what did you eat to keep the blood sugar steady?

            *Examples of complex carbohydrates (wheat/corn/peas/potatoes/fruit) and carbohydrates + protein/fat (apple + peanut butter/pizza/candy bar)

             

            NEWER THERAPIES

            As this activity discusses newer therapies, new information is consistently being learned. To provide comprehensive and current or guideline-directed care, these must be a part of the patient assistance process. Some patients have strong feelings for or against newer therapies, so it is helpful to be able to provide the information in a non-biased manner.

             

            SGLT-2 Inhibitors    

            SGLT-2 inhibitors increase urinary excretion of excess glucose and thus can increase the risk of genitourinary infections such as yeast infections and urinary tract infections. This class of medications also has significant long-term cardiorenal benefits.14 Optimization of these medications would also be ideal, especially when affordable, to reduce the need for insulin.

             

            Although this CE activity’s focus is to review insulin dosing adjustments when introducing concurrent GLP-1 RA and GIP/GLP-1 RA dose adjustments, clinicians can apply some of the same practices when adjusting other medications, such as SGLT2-inhibitors.

             

            GLP-1 RAs

            The FDA approved the first GLP-1 RA, exenatide, in 2005, and patients needed to inject it twice daily.15 Now, patients can inject GLP-1 RAs daily or weekly. In 2019, the FDA approved the first non-injectable GLP-1 RA, oral semaglutide (Rybelsus).15 Additionally, this group of medications provides cardiorenal protective effects and weight loss.16 Common ADRs are gastrointestinal intolerances such as nausea, upset stomach, constipation, and vomiting.16

             

            Semaglutide is the most effective medication in this class from a glycemic management perspective.16 Dulaglutide, liraglutide, and exenatide are the most tolerated in this class; however, of these options dulaglutide is the most effective.16 Before these newer DM medications were available, the commonly utilized PPG-lowering options were metformin, sulfonylureas, bolus insulin, and mixed insulin. Of those, metformin is the only one that does not increase risk of hypoglycemia.

             

            GIP/GLP-1 RAs

            GIP/GLP-1 RAs have a dual hormonal activation that promotes satiety, slows digestion, and reduces hunger. Common ADRs are similar to that of GLP1-RAs but even though tirzepatide is more potent at improving glycemic control than semaglutide, it is also better tolerated.16 Currently, the FDA has approved tirzepatide as the only medication in this class. Additionally, despite the dual activation, patients tend to tolerate tirzepatide better than some GLP-1 RAs based on anecdotal experience. Tirzepatide also provides cardiorenal protective effects.17

             

            Combination basal insulin + GLP-1 RA medications

            Currently, the FDA has approved two fixed-ratio combinations (FRC) of basal insulin/GLP-1 RA: insulin degludec/liraglutide, also known as iDeglira (Xultophy), and insulin glargine/lixisenatide, also known as iGlarlixi (Suliqua).18 These medications have a fixed level of a basal insulin and a once daily GLP-1 RA combined into a single pre-filled pen. Insulin has no maximum daily limit but the GLP-1 RAs do. Thus (because these products are fixed ratios combinations) the maximum daily GLP-1 RA dose limits the daily insulin dose in FRCs.19 The dosing is based on units of the insulin component.

             

            For example, each unit of iDeglira contains 1 unit of insulin and 0.036 units of liraglutide.20 The maximum dose is 50 units, which contains 50 units of insulin degludec and 1.8 mg of liraglutide (liraglutide's maximum daily dose). The manufacturer advises patients who are insulin and GLP-1 RA naïve to start at 10 units daily, whereas those that are currently on basal insulin can start at 16 units daily.12

             

            IGlarlixi is available in the United States as Soliqua 100/33, indicating that there is 0.33 mg of lixisenatide for every unit of insulin glargine. The maximum dosage of iGlarlixi is 60 units; however, this is based on the lixisenatide daily maximum of 20 mcg. Those transitioning from less than 30 units of basal insulin would be started on 15 units of iGlarlixi. For those between 30 to 60 units of basal insulin, the starting dose would be 30 units of iGlarlixi.21

             

            A study completed at the Diabetes Center of the Békés County Central Hospital in Hungary (N = 62) sought to review the safety and efficacy of switching well-managed patients with T2DM (A1c less than 7.5%) from basal/bolus insulin (low TDD) to insulin degludec/liraglutide combination.20 The study defined low TDD as less than or equal to 70 units of insulin per day. The transition method was to stop the prior basal/bolus insulin regimen and to start 16 units of iDeglira. Then the FBGs were titrated to 90 to 108 mg/dL by increasing the iDeglira dose by 2 units every 3 days. The study continued or initiated metformin and titrated it up to 3000 mg (the maximum daily dose of metformin is higher in Hungary than in the United States). The intervention reduced the TDD from 43.3 units to 22.55 units, which was significant.20

             

            Theoretically, this is a wonderful way to reduce injection burden and optimize adherence.6 These medications’ clinical utility depends on the patient’s lifestyle patterns, insurance coverage, medication availability, and out-of-pocket cost. Depending on the patient, the fixed ratio dosing and once-daily dosing could be a benefit or a drawback. Patients who would like to minimize injection burden and can safely delay insulin may prefer a once weekly GLP-1 RA or GIP/GLP-1 RA injection. Having the ability to titrate basal insulin and a GLP-1 RA separately allows more dosing individualization, which leads to more patients achieving goal FBGs.22

             

            INTRODUCTION TO THE CASES

            The rest of this activity focuses on case-based learning. For these cases, learners should assume that any information not provided is within normal limits, there is no change from baseline, or any change has been addressed. These cases derive from patients in a primary care setting, but this information can help in various settings. Also, due to the focus on insulin dose adjustments, the healthcare provider does not discuss the use of GLP-1 RAs or GIP/GLP-1 RAs for an indication of obesity. As obesity can co-exist with T2D, healthcare providers should monitor weight during initiation and titration of GLP-1 RAs or GIP/GLP-1 RAs.

             

            CGMs have been more accessible in recent years, and they provide excellent graphic review of glycemic control. This learning experience uses glycemic charts. The charts depicted here would be gathered from a patient’s glucometer or SMBG log and commonly depict the last 14 days of glycemic control. Clinicians should crosscheck values from a SMBG log with the patient’s glucometer if they have concerns about inaccuracy. Each column that lists a glucose value specifies the timing with regard to meals; acB is before breakfast, acL is before lunch, acD is before dinner, and HS is at bedtime. During the initial pharmacist visit, pharmacists need to manage patients expectations and urge frequent testing because it allows for the safest insulin dose adjustments. It also ideally decreases the testing needs moving forward by limiting the patient’s insulin doses and frequency.

             

            PAUSE AND PONDER: Thought Questions

            Safety:

            • Is the patient tolerating the current regimen?
            • Is the patient experiencing any hypoglycemia?

            Efficacy:

            • Is the current regimen helping the patient achieve glycemic goals?
            • What medication adjustments would help move the current glycemic patterns towards the goal?

             

            CASE 1: Arya Brown–pronouns: he/him/his

            Arya is a patient who presents for his first pharmacist visit. First, the pharmacist reviews the electronic medical record for Arya’s recent history.

             

            Visit 1

            Arya reported that he was doing well with dulaglutide 0.75 mg weekly and his current insulin glargine dose of 18 units daily. He reported that his appetite was more controlled, and he felt more energetic since starting dulaglutide. The patient was excited to increase the dose of dulaglutide.

             

            The patient’s current SMBG log shows he checks his FBGs only sporadically, and they fall between 128 and 154 (average = 143), no hypoglycemia, and consistent values above goal. Based on the anticipated improvement of glycemic control throughout the day by increasing the dulaglutide dose to 1.5 mg weekly, the pharmacist started shared decision making to continue the current insulin glargine for now. The pharmacist asked the patient to check his blood sugars in the evening, either before dinner or at bedtime, to allow for further assessment of glycemic trends throughout the day. Arya verbalized understanding of this request, but reports that he will likely only check blood sugars once a day and therefore asked to alternate testing times.

             

            Visit 2

            Arya presented for his second pharmacist visit after his third dose of dulaglutide 1.5 mg. He said that his blood sugars were at goal and that he had slight but tolerable nausea with the current dulaglutide dose. He reported that the nausea improved since the first injection at this dose. The pharmacist and Arya discussed the option of maintaining the dulaglutide dose for the next prescription to allow additional time for tolerance. However, Arya prefers to increase it to dulaglutide 3 mg weekly with the next prescription after four doses of 1.5 mg have been taken. He indicates the symptoms have improved over time and are barely noticeable.

             

            His current SMBGs show FBGs ranging from 128 to 141 (average = 135). Since his glycemic control is now closer to goal than previously, he will need to adjust insulin glargine dosing to minimize the risk of hypoglycemia. The risk of causing temporary hypoglycemia is higher than that of causing temporary hyperglycemia. Thus, the pharmacist decides to reduce the insulin dose by 6 units. This is a 33% insulin reduction.

             

            Visit 3

            At Arya’s third visit, he reports feeling nauseous and vomiting after injecting the second dose of dulaglutide 3 mg weekly. He says he vomited after the first dose and thought it may have been related to a food choice at that time. The vomiting improved after a couple of days, but it recurred after the second dose of dulaglutide 3 mg. The patient shows his glucometer for SMBGs as noted in Table 3.

             

            Table 3. Arya Visit 3

            Date AcB      HS HS dose (insulin glargine) comment
            12 units
            134 12 units
            147 12 units
            136 12 units
            12 units
            124 149 12 units
            12 units Dulaglutide 3 mg (dose 1)
            12 units
            117 146 12 units
            12 units
            137 12 units
            120 12 units
            131 12 units
            116 12 units Dulaglutide 3 mg (dose 2)
            127 12 units
            Visit 3   12 units
            Average 125 140

             

            The SMBGs indicate improved glycemic control. The pharmacist suggested that Arya’s ADRs seem intolerable. Arya agrees. He was amenable to stopping the dulaglutide 3 mg weekly and resuming the lower 1.5 mg weekly dose when his symptoms abate (at least a week after the last dose). Now the discussion turned to what insulin dose the patient should take with the lower dose of dulaglutide.

             

            The patient’s prior glycemic control is a blueprint for patient specific response to insulin dose adjustments. Since Arya is returning to the 1.5 mg of dulaglutide weekly, and he has taken that dose before, the glycemic control information presented during visit 2 is helpful. The general takeaway is that his glycemic control was close to goal while on dulaglutide 1.5 mg weekly and insulin glargine 18 units daily. The pharmacist and the patient make a shared decision to adjust the insulin glargine to 20 units daily to move the patient’s glycemic control closer to goal.

             

            They agree to re-try dulaglutide 3 mg weekly in the future if he tolerates the 1.5 mg weekly dose better over time. They also discuss the possibility of using a different GLP-1 RA or a GIP/GLP-1 RA, as tolerance between medications can vary.

             

            CASE 2: Alex Devi–pronouns: they/them/theirs

            Visit 1

            Alex presented to their first pharmacist visit and reports that their insurance now covers tirzepatide for diabetes at a reasonable cost, so they would like to minimize MDI insulin regimen. The patient denies any contraindications to GIP/GLP-1 RA. The pharmacist tells Alex that they can adjust their insulin doses based on tolerance to tirzepatide, but there is no guarantee that insulin can be stopped.

             

            Based on the current optimized glycemic control (Table 4), starting and titrating tirzepatide will necessitate insulin dose adjustments. They are currently injecting insulin degludec 36 units daily and insulin lispro 8 units with breakfast, 10 units with lunch, and 14 units with dinner. To limit the risk of hypoglycemia, the pharmacist and Alex planned to decrease doses and assess this specific patient’s response. As tirzepatide will primarily impact post-prandial glycemic control, and the patient is on a medication (insulin lispro) that can cause post-prandial hypoglycemia, the goal was to focus on bolus insulin reduction. In this case, glycemic control appears steady throughout the day. The pharmacist planned to reduce all prandial doses equally to allow blood sugars to rise throughout the day and let the full effect of tirzepatide occur while limiting hypoglycemia due to insulin. Due to tirzepatide’s potency as a dual GIP/GLP-1 RA and Alex’s current glycemic control, they will reduce the insulin lispro dose by 4 units per meal. Thus, the patient’s total daily insulin dose was reduced by 12 units per day, an 18% reduction in TDD of insulin.

             

            Table 4. Alex Visit 1

            Date acB      acB dose (insulin lispro) acL          acL dose (insulin lispro) acD         acD dose (insulin lispro) HS HS dose (insulin degludec U100) Notes
            117 8 109 10 137 14 171 36 units
            93 8 129 10 128 14 161 36 units
            107 8 91 10 145 14 127 36 units
            126 8 79 10 141 14 152 36 units
            93 8 133 10 147 14 131 36 units
            82 8 121 10 124 14 170 36 units
            107 8 132 10 128 14 160 36 units
            112 8 125 10 111 14 165 36 units
            105 8 89 10 147 14 170 36 units
            77 8 96 10 133 14 130 36 units
            108 8 111 10 91 14 146 36 units
            92 8 103 10 113 14 164 36 units
            97 8 110 10 118 14 151 36 units
            101 8 89 10 97 14 132 36 units
            122 8 131 10 121 14 130 36 units
            Visit 1 104 8 125 10 36 units Start tirzepatide 2.5 mg
            Average 103 111 125 151

             

            Visit 2

            Table 5 summarizes Alex’s glycemic control when they returned for their second appointment. The pharmacist looks for trends and sees that the blood sugar averages appear to be lowest pre-dinner and then highest at bedtime. A potential concern is that Alex may overeat at dinnertime as a response to rapidly decreasing blood sugars between lunch and dinner. Alex denies any hypoglycemia symptoms or adverse effects from tirzepatide. They just finished the fourth dose of tirzepatide 2.5 mg and are interested in increasing the dose. To increase tirzepatide, the pharmacist used the information gathered to minimize the patient’s insulin intake. Based on the response and current SMBGs, roughly 4 units is an appropriate dose reduction per meal. Logistically, this would eliminate the breakfast insulin, reduce the lunchtime dose to 2 units, and reduce the dinnertime insulin dose to 6 units. The pharmacist needs to evaluate the lunchtime dose of 2 units further. For someone with T2D, 2 units is a minimal dose of insulin. The actual effect is questionable, especially in this individual, where another medication is being titrated up.

             

            Table 5. Alex Visit 2

            Date acB      acB dose (insulin lispro) acL          acL dose (insulin lispro) acD         acD dose (insulin lispro) HS HS dose (insulin degludec U-100) Notes
            113 4 95 6 79 10 150 36 units
            79 4 122 6 91 10 139 36 units
            107 4 107 6 113 10 162 36 units
            102 4 125 6 91 10 172 36 units
            104 4 118 6 99 10 164 36 units tirzepatide 2.5 mg (Dose 3)
            81 4 118 6 81 10 156 36 units
            120 4 102 6 101 10 158 36 units
            85 4 123 6 75 10 169 36 units
            77 4 127 6 79 10 168 36 units
            84 4 108 6 103 10 126 36 units
            111 4 89 6 79 10 139 36 units
            112 4 115 6 92 10 140 36 units tirzepatide 2.5 mg (Dose 4)
            87 4 87 6 101 10 174 36 units
            73 4 102 6 76 10 139 36 units
            85 4 127 6 98 10 163 36 units
            Visit 2 107 4 36 units
            Average 95 111 91 155

             

            Reviewing the pre-dinner glycemic values (the lowest throughout the day) and eliminating the lunchtime insulin dose would help reduce the risk of hypoglycemia. Thus, the consensus was to eliminate the breakfast and lunchtime insulin doses while reducing the dinner time dose to 6 units. Therefore, they decided to reduce the patient’s total daily insulin dose by 14 units, a 25% reduction in TDD of insulin. The pharmacist advised the patient that he can skip testing his SMBG before lunch as he is not injecting a bolus insulin at that time.

             

            Visit 3

            Alex presented for their third appointment and denies any adverse effects with tirzepatide 5 mg weekly. Alex was happy with reducing injection burden from four times a day to twice a day! They reported they have lost some weight. They have also increased activity slightly and are planning to make that a priority in the upcoming month. They would like to continue titrating tirzepatide when able. Looking at current glycemic values (Table 6), the adjustments made at the last visit stabilized control again.

             

            Table 6. Alex Visit 3

            Date acB      acB dose (insulin lispro) acD         acD dose (insulin lispro) HS HS dose (insulin degludec U100) Notes
            110 0 111 6 115 36 units
            119 0 106 6 132 36 units
            133 0 129 6 96 36 units
            126 0 100 6 99 36 units
            126 0 99 6 151 36 units tirzepatide  5 mg (Dose 2)
            118 0 111 6 97 36 units
            130 0 110 6 124 36 units
            112 0 131 6 149 36 units
            134 0 106 6 144 36 units
            99 0 105 6 103 36 units
            97 0 117 6 154 36 units
            98 0 111 6 153 36 units tirzepatide 5 mg (Dose 3)
            115 0 121 6 141 36 units
            119 0 96 6 129 36 units
            122 0 98 6 154 36 units
            Visit 3 102 0 36 units
            Average 116 110 129

             

            Based on this patient’s previous responses, it seems that the insulin dose should be reduced by about 12 to 14 units of insulin to accommodate the tirzepatide dose increase. Additionally, due to Alex’s anticipated activity change, they may need to reduce the total daily insulin dose further. The pharmacist can help reduce the injection burden by eliminating the dinnertime dose of insulin lispro. Next, the basal dose needs to be adjusted. There is room for discussion, based on the factors noted (current glycemic control, planned activity changes, and dose increase of tirzepatide). To limit the risk of hypoglycemia, they decide to reduce insulin degludec from 36 units to 26 units. This is a reduction of 16 units of insulin. They could have reduced the patient’s basal dose to accommodate everything except the activity change if it was unclear that they were planning to make a change soon.

             

            All plans must be patient-specific, and with this discussion, the patient is reliable and was waiting to change their activity once this discussion occurred. For other patients who are not as clear that they are planning a change, the pharmacist could advise reducing the basal insulin dose to approximately 30 units daily for now and then communicate with the clinic when they make the change for review of SMBGs to allow for additional adjustments.

             

            CASE 3: Zephyr Hernandez–pronouns: she/her/hers

            Visit 1

            Zephyr’s provider referred her to the pharmacist because her A1c was above goal and she was experiencing hypoglycemic episodes. From a complete assessment of the patient’s medication and lifestyle routine, it appeared that the patient’s mealtimes were inconsistent. Zephyr indicated her schedule dictates whether she can eat breakfast and/or lunch, but that she tries to eat dinner consistently. She injects insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart 70/30 mix, 24 units in the morning and 30 units in the evening. Based on Zephyr’s readings (Table 7), she has hypoglycemia before dinner when she skips lunch. She treats the hypoglycemia with soda or candy. The patient says she skips her breakfast mixed insulin dose when she skips breakfast but then ends up with hyperglycemia pre-dinner.

             

            Table 7. Zephyr Visit 1

            Date acB      acB dose (insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart 70/30 mix) acL          acD         acD dose (insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart 70/30 mix) HS Notes
            123 24 122 113 30 137
            134 24 106 78 30 257 skipped lunch
            88 24 114 112 30 118
            159 24 109 76 30 188 skipped lunch
            76 24 121 111 30 123
            118 0 156 187 30 187 skipped breakfast
            123 0 164 190 30 128 skipped breakfast
            139 24 116 106 30 164
            95 24 96 68 30 196 skipped lunch
            113 24 107 102 30 141
            117 24 120 109 30 186
            159 0 145 189 30 145 skipped breakfast
            149 24 132 72 30 179 skipped lunch
            117 24 127 109 30 125
            107 24 114 79 30 212 skipped lunch
            Visit 1 96 0 163   skipped breakfast
            Average 120 126 113 166

             

            During the visit, the pharmacist and Zephyr reviewed the 15-15 Rule for identifying and treating hypoglycemia. They also discussed the fact that mixed insulin, unfortunately, does not allow mealtime flexibility due to the fixed ratio. The patient says she will try to maintain steady mealtimes and portions. She also asked to try a medication like semaglutide and has no contraindications.

             

            The pharmacist explained that the first dose of semaglutide is a tolerance dose and is not expected to have a significant clinical impact. Transitioning to an MDI insulin regimen would help stabilize blood sugars, minimize hypoglycemia, and provide insulin dosing flexibility. However, Zephyr preferred not to switch insulin to MDI insulin at this time. She stated she will focus on having consistent meals instead. Based on her preference, they adjusted the current insulin regimen to reduce the risk of hypoglycemia. The pharmacist advised her to reduce the insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart 70/30 morning dose to 20 units, the evening dose to 26 units, and to start semaglutide 0.25 mg weekly.

             

            Visit 2

            At the second visit, Zephyr reported that she could not maintain steady meal times despite her efforts. She initially reduced her insulin doses as requested, but once she realized she couldn’t maintain steady mealtimes, she resumed her previous dosing. Therefore, her current SMBG values closely resemble her last visits' values (Table 7). The pharmacist advised Zephyr to communicate questions, concerns, and changes to the clinic in between appointments moving forward. As Zephyr was unable to maintain steady meal choices, she couldn’t safely remain on mixed insulin due to safety concerns.

             

            Consequently, the pharmacist talked with Zephyr about two options based on her goal to increase the semaglutide dose to 0.5 mg weekly. One option would be to transition to basal/bolus insulin (administered TID or QID), but the patient previously rejected this option. An alternative option (dependent on the patient’s prandial insulin dose) would be to transition the patient to basal-only insulin and eliminate prandial insulin. This option creates a risk of hyperglycemia until the semaglutide doses can be titrated. Thus, periodic clinical assessment of hyperglycemia would be critical. DKA and HHS are a concern with significantly elevated blood sugars. Still, temporary elevations in the high 100s to low 200s may be acceptable if the patient is not safe or willing to take alternate recommended options.

             

            After this review, Zephyr stated she cannot tolerate more than two insulin injections a day. They decided to transition Zephyr to once daily basal insulin and then a bolus insulin with dinner, as that is her largest and most consistent meal of the day. Based on her current regimen, she was injecting 37.8 units of basal insulin and 16.2 units of prandial insulin per day. She could transition to a bolus insulin dose of 4 to 8 units and a basal dose of 34 to 38 units with a goal of a total insulin dose of 42 units per day (~22% reduction from the prior TDD). Eliminating the prandial insulin would be risky. Dependent on Zephyr’s motivation, ability to tolerate semaglutide, and attention to portion sizes and SMBGs, she may do well without any prandial insulin.

             

            Semaglutide does not require set mealtimes or portions for safety. The pharmacist believed that with time, the patient would do well on basal insulin + semaglutide at higher doses, if tolerated. Sometimes, this interim period is the toughest for clinical decision-making.

             

            CASE 4: Sahar Kim–pronouns: they/them/theirs

            Visit 1

            Sahar presented for their first visit, reporting that despite their FBGs being at goal, their A1c has been above goal. The insurance company did not cover their CGM so the pharmacist asked Sahar to test SMBGs more frequently. They sporadically checked, when possible, at the day's beginning or end (Table 8).

             

            They were currently prescribed insulin glargine-yfgn (Semglee), which is a biosimilar to insulin glargine (Lantus), and inject 52 units once daily. The SMBG chart indicates FBGs of 80 to 100 mg/dL, and bedtime values are in the high 100s to low 200s.

             

            Table 8. Sahar Visit 1

            Date acB      HS HS insulin (insulin glargine-yfgn)
            78 198 52
            89 52
            201 52
            123 188 52
            111 52
            52
            97 187 52
            79 52
            210 52
            83 218 52
            98 52
            189 52
            109 52
            186 52
            87 199 52
            Visit 1 98 52
            Average 96 197

             

            PAUSE AND PONDER: What would be the appropriate term for this situation regarding glycemic control/treatment?

             

            Sahar declined an oral medication, as they have trouble swallowing them. They were amenable to an alternate once daily injection, as they would prefer not to have more than one injection daily. Sahar and the pharmacist deemed that an FRC would be the preferred option due to overbasalization and the patient’s preference to minimize injections. After some investigation into insurance coverage and discussion, they determined that iGlarlixi would be reasonable.

             

            The pharmacist started Sahar on 30 units of iGlarlixi daily, which equates to 30 units of insulin glargine and 10 mcg of lixisenatide. Additionally, they were previously injecting at bedtime, but the FDA-approved labeling recommends morning dosing of iGlarlixi.21 Sahar reported that they will not be able to attend the next appointment (intended to be in approximately 2 weeks) or speak on the phone for the next 6 weeks. As they have been reliable and this was a transitional period in their treatment, the pharmacist developed a self-adjustment dosing plan. The pharmacist advised Sahar to increase iGlarlixi by 2 units once a week (up to 42 units daily) for each week that all their FBGS are greater than 130 mg/dL.

             

            Visit 2

            Sahar returned 6 weeks later and indicates that they increased iGlarlixi to 42 units over time based on the guidance the pharmacist provided at the last visit. They denied any ADRs (including hypoglycemia) associated with the FRC. A review of SMBGs shows stabilization between morning and bedtime values, indicating that the bedtime values have come down and the FBGs have increased. Although the FBG average is above 136, the trend shows decreasing FBGs over the last week or so. Through shared decision-making, Sahar and the pharmacist decided to maintain the current dose. The pharmacist expects to see an improvement in the A1c based on this improved PPG control. This is because although FBG and HS readings are being tested for ease, the improvement in HS readings indicates an improvement in PPGs.

             

            TAKEAWAYS

            We’ve reviewed many situations where insulin still plays a significant role in diabetes care. The advent of newer medications and greater coverage and affordability require a balance between new and old therapies to maximize the benefits and minimize the risks of both. Many medications for diabetes or coexisting obesity and diabetes (diabesity) are in the pipeline. This balance of optimal medication management will continue to change as the FDA approves new medications for diabetes.

             

            Patient safety, especially prevention of hypoglycemia, is paramount in insulin dose adjustments, but monitoring and education regarding side effects is a close second. The pharmacist will need to adjust the dose or medication if there is a safety risk. Especially with the positive benefits associated with GLP-1 RAs, some patients may want to tolerate the adverse effects or hope they improve.

             

            While these cases are extrapolated from the ambulatory care perspective, this knowledge can be helpful in a variety of settings. For example, pharmacists can use the principles discussed here for people obtaining their medications in the retail setting or those in the process of being titrated who are then hospitalized.

            Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

            The Art of Insulin Dose Adjustments in the Setting of GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs
            Pharmacist Post-test
            25-059 P

            After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to:
            1. Describe different types of insulin along with their appropriate use
            2. Recall newer non-insulin medications for diabetes, along with risks vs. benefits
            3. Analyze patient reported data pertaining to insulin + GLP-1 RA and GIP/GLP-1 RA medication adjustments
            4. Demonstrate medication adjustment recommendations while incorporating patient-specific data

            *

            1. Which of the following situations is most appropriate for using mixed insulin?
            A. A patient who intermittently fasts and eats around lunch and dinnertime.
            B. A patient who eats three meals a day and two snacks.
            C. A patient who eats snack size portions throughout the day.

            *

            2. Austin is a 46-year-old patient who is newly diagnosed with type 2 diabetes. Their initial A1c is 11% and they are working through the diabetes self-management education and support (DSMES) classes. They are open to starting insulin to help improve glycemic control in the interim until their lifestyle changes can be implemented. Their current weight is 64 kg or 141 lbs. What would be the best medication option to initiate?
            A. 10 units of insulin glargine daily
            B. 20 units of insulin glargine daily
            C. 10 units of insulin aspart three times daily

            *

            3. Which of the following medications is most likely to cause a yeast infection?
            A. Bexagliflozin
            B. Sitagliptin
            C. Liraglutide

            *

            4. Which of the following is an oral GLP-1 RA?
            A. Semaglutide (Ozempic)
            B. Semaglutide (Rybelsus)
            C. Dulaglutide (Trulicity)

            *

            5. Which combination of medication classes should not be used together?
            A. GLP-1 RA + SGLT-2 inhibitor
            B. GLP-1 RA + DPP-4 inhibitor
            C. Basal insulin + SGLT-2 inhibitor

            *

            6. Which of the following SMBG trends could be described as overbasalization?
            A. FBG: 120s, HS: 150s
            B. FBG: 160s, HS: 180s
            C. FBG: 80s, HS: 160s

            *

            7. Autumn has been taking metformin 1000 mg BID for years and recently her A1c has increased to 8.7%. Her FBGs average 162 and her bedtime values average 210s. She has never used a GLP-1 RA or insulin. Of the options listed which would be the simplest and safest next step for the patient?
            A. IDeglira 10 units daily
            B. Glipizide 10 mg BID
            C. Insulin lispro 10 units TID with meals

            *

            8. August is a 36-year-old patient. He reports he is tolerating the side effects he is experiencing with dulaglutide 3 mg weekly but is not comfortable increasing the dose just yet. He is also taking insulin glargine 32 units daily and his FBGs average 170. Which of the following is the next best step?
            A. Increase the insulin dose
            B. Stop the insulin
            C. Reduce the insulin dose

            *

            9. April is a 59-year-old, 66 kg patient who has had more energy for the day since starting injectable semaglutide. She is currently injecting semaglutide 1 mg weekly and is excited to increase to 2 mg weekly as she has not experienced side effects. She reports that she has enough energy to begin participating in dance class twice a week. She is currently injecting insulin degludec 8 units daily and her FBGs are between 80-100. Which of the following is the next best step?
            A. Increase the insulin dose
            B. Stop the insulin
            C. Reduce the insulin dose

            *

            10. Andrew is a 42-year-old patient who is currently taking insulin glargine 50 units daily and is excited to begin tirzepatide 2.5 mg weekly. His FBGs are in the 140s. The patient will continue the current insulin dose while starting tirzepatide. A few weeks later the patient communicates that his blood sugars have decreased to the 70s and 80s, and he is feeling shaky consistently with these values. What would be the next step be?
            A. Increase the insulin dose
            B. Stop insulin
            C. Reduce the insulin dose

            Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

            The Art of Insulin Dose Adjustments in the Setting of GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs
            Pharmacy Technician Post-test
            25-059 T

            After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to
            1. Describe different types of insulin along with their appropriate use
            2. Recognize over the counter treatment options for hypoglycemia
            3. Recall newer non-insulin medications for diabetes, along with risks and benefits
            4. Identify when to refer patients with questions about their diabetes medications to the pharmacist

            *

            1. Which of the following is a bolus insulin?
            A. Insulin aspart
            B. Insulin glargine
            C. Insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart

            *

            2. Which of the following is a mixed insulin?
            A. Insulin lispro
            B. Insulin lispro protamine/insulin lispro
            C. Insulin degludec

            *

            3. Which of the following insulins works at steady levels throughout the day?
            A. Insulin degludec U200
            B. Insulin lispro
            C. Insulin regular U500

            *

            4. Which of the following is an oral GLP-1 RA?
            A. Semaglutide (Ozempic)
            B. Semaglutide (Rybelsus)
            C. Dulaglutide (Trulicity)

            *

            5. How are oral glucose tablets and oral glucose gel categorized as medications?
            A. Prescription
            B. Behind the counter
            C. Over the counter

            *

            6. August comes to the pharmacy to pick up his medications regularly. As a retail pharmacy technician, you’ve noticed that he is purchasing glucose tablets more frequently than before, and he has also had medication changes recently . What would be the next best step?
            A. Mind your own business, it’s their choice to purchase what they would like.
            B. Make the pharmacist aware and ask the patient if they would be open to having a consultation with the pharmacist.
            C. Advise the patient that their medication is causing low blood sugars, and they should stop taking it.

            *

            7. You’re a medication reconciliation technician in a primary care clinic. While reviewing the patient’s medications you see they are taking antibiotics again as they were a couple months prior. With further discussion you learn that they have had multiple urinary tract infections in the last year. Which of the following medications is most likely to cause urinary tract infections?
            A. Bexagliflozin
            B. Sitagliptin
            C. Liraglutide

            *

            8. While working as a retail pharmacy technician and checking out a patient, you notice that they look nauseous. With discussion you learn that the last time they ate was yesterday morning. You see that their tirzepatide dose was increased. What would be the next best step?
            A. Advise the patient to try this new ginger supplement you’ve found to help with the nausea and then check the patient out.
            B. Assume they’ll talk about the medication with their provider, wish them well, provide them with their new prescription, and take the next patient
            C. Ask the pharmacist to complete further assessment because you have concern that the higher dose of tirzepatide warrants review.

            *

            9. You’re a medicine reconciliation technician in the emergency room, and the patient is being evaluated for significant nausea and vomiting. Which of the following medications is associated with these adverse effects?
            A. Ertugliflozin
            B. Semaglutide
            C. Insulin glargine

            *

            10. You’re a retail pharmacy technician, and a patient is picking up a new prescription for dulaglutide 3 mg weekly along with their insulin degludec 56 units daily. They were previously prescribed dulaglutide 1.5 mg weekly and insulin degludec 68 units daily. The patient tells you that they plan on continuing the insulin degludec 68 units daily despite increasing the dulaglutide dose.
            A. Advise the patient that the choice is between them and their doctor.
            B. Check the patient out.
            C. Seek consultation from the pharmacist.

            References

            Full List of References

            1. Van Dril E, Allison M, Schumacher C. Deprescribing in type 2 diabetes and cardiovascular disease: Recommendations for safe and effective initiation of glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists in patients on insulin therapy. Am Heart J Plus. 2022;17:100163. doi:10.1016/j.ahjo.2022.100163
            2. ElSayed NA, McCoy RG, Aleppo G, et al. 2. Diagnosis and Classification of diabetes: Standards of Care in Diabetes—2025. Diabetes Care. 2024;48(Supplement_1):S27-S49. doi:10.2337/dc25-s002
            3. ElSayed NA, McCoy RG, Aleppo G, et al. 6. Glycemic Goals and Hypoglycemia: Standards of Care in Diabetes—2025. Diabetes Care. 2024;48(Supplement_1):S128-S145. doi:10.2337/dc25-s006
            4. ElSayed NA, McCoy RG, Aleppo G, et al. 9. Pharmacologic Approaches to Glycemic Treatment: Standards of Care in Diabetes—2025. Diabetes Care. 2024;48(Supplement_1):S181-S206. doi:10.2337/dc25-s009
            5. Chun J, Strong J, Urquhart S. Insulin Initiation and Titration in Patients With Type 2 Diabetes. Diabetes Spectr. 2019;32(2):104-111. doi:10.2337/ds18-0005
            6. Blonde L, Umpierrez GE, Reddy SS, et al. American Association of Clinical Endocrinology Clinical Practice Guideline: Developing a Diabetes Mellitus Comprehensive Care Plan-2022 Update [published correction appears in Endocr Pract. 2023 Jan;29(1):80-81. doi: 10.1016/j.eprac.2022.12.005.]. Endocr Pract. 2022;28(10):923-1049. doi:10.1016/j.eprac.2022.08.002
            7. Champion M, Wills Avila G, Garcia AE, Álvarez Delgado FM, Valdez CA. Impact of Initiating a GLP1 Agonist and/or SGLT2 Inhibitor Therapy on De-Escalation and Discontinuation of Insulin and Diabetes Control When Managed by an Interprofessional Collaborative Team. J Prim Care Community Health. 2024;15:21501319241231398. doi:10.1177/21501319241231398
            8. Lane W, Weinrib S, Rappaport J, Hale C. The effect of addition of liraglutide to high-dose intensive insulin therapy: a randomized prospective trial. Diabetes Obes Metab. 2014;16(9):827-832. doi:10.1111/dom.12286
            9. Lind M, Hirsch IB, Tuomilehto J, et al. Liraglutide in people treated for type 2 diabetes with multiple daily insulin injections: randomised clinical trial (MDI Liraglutide trial). BMJ. 2015;351:h5364. doi:10.1136/bmj.h5364
            10. Vanderheiden A, Harrison L, Warshauer J, Li X, Adams-Huet B, Lingvay I. Effect of Adding Liraglutide vs Placebo to a High-Dose Insulin Regimen in Patients With Type 2 Diabetes: A Randomized Clinical Trial. JAMA Intern Med. 2016;176(7):939-947. doi:10.1001/jamainternmed.2016.1540
            11. Rodriguez P, Breslaw N, Xiao H, et al. De-intensification of basal-bolus therapy by replacing prandial insulin with once-weekly subcutaneous semaglutide in individuals with well-controlled type 2 diabetes: A single-centre, open-label randomised trial (TRANSITION-T2D). Diabetes Obes Metab. 2025;27(2):642-651. doi:10.1111/dom.16057
            12.Online Xultophy. Novo Nordisk Inc. Accessed June 1, 2025. https://www.novo-pi.com/xultophy10036.pdf
            13. Treatment of low blood sugar (Hypoglycemia). Diabetes. Published May 15, 2024. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/treatment/treatment-low-blood-sugar-hypoglycemia.html
            14. Vallon V, Verma S. Effects of SGLT2 Inhibitors on Kidney and Cardiovascular Function. Annu Rev Physiol. 2021;83:503-528. doi:10.1146/annurev-physiol-031620-095920
            15. Latif W, Lambrinos KJ, Patel P, Rodriguez R. Compare and Contrast the Glucagon-Like Peptide-1 Receptor Agonists (GLP1RAs). In: StatPearls. Treasure Island (FL): StatPearls Publishing; February 25, 2024.
            16. Yao H, Zhang A, Li D, et al. Comparative effectiveness of GLP-1 receptor agonists on glycaemic control, body weight, and lipid profile for type 2 diabetes: systematic review and network meta-analysis. BMJ. 2024;384:e076410. doi:10.1136/bmj-2023-076410
            17. Nauck MA, Müller TD. Incretin hormones and type 2 diabetes. Diabetologia. 2023;66(10):1780-1795. doi:10.1007/s00125-023-05956-x
            18. McGill JB, Hirsch IB, Parkin CG, Aleppo G, Levy CJ, Gavin JR 3rd. The Current and Future Role of Insulin Therapy in the Management of Type 2 Diabetes: A Narrative Review. Diabetes Ther. 2024;15(5):1085-1098. doi:10.1007/s13300-024-01569-8
            19. Tramunt B, Disse E, Chevalier N, et al. Initiation of the Fixed Combination IDegLira in Patients with Type 2 Diabetes on Prior Injectable Therapy: Insights from the EASY French Real-World Study. Diabetes Ther. 2022;13(11-12):1947-1963. doi:10.1007/s13300-022-01327-8
            20. Taybani Z, Bótyik B, Katkó M, Gyimesi A, Várkonyi T. Simplifying Complex Insulin Regimens While Preserving Good Glycemic Control in Type 2 Diabetes. Diabetes Ther. 2019;10(5):1869-1878. doi:10.1007/s13300-019-0673-8
            22. Candido R, Nicolucci A, Larosa M, Rossi MC, Napoli R; RESTORE-G (Retrospective analysis on the therapeutic approaches after GLP-1 RA treatment in type 2 diabetes patients) Study Group. Treatment intensification following glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonist in type 2 diabetes: Comparative effectiveness analyses between free vs. fixed combination of GLP-1 RA and basal insulin. RESTORE-G real-world study. Nutr Metab Cardiovasc Dis. 2024;34(8):1846-1853. doi:10.1016/j.numecd.2024.03.023
            21. Online Soliqua. Prescribing Information. Sanofi-Aventis U.S. LLC. Accessed June 1, 2025. https://www.accessdata.fda.gov/drugsatfda_docs/label/2016/208673s000lbl.pdf

            Henry A. Palmer CE Finale, LIVE December 19, 2025

            Henry A. Palmer CE Finale, named for beloved professor and mentor, Dr. Henry A. Palmer, is a continuing education program offered at the end of each calendar year. Held during December, the program helps pharmacists fulfill their last-minute CE requirements. The program is an ala carte program offering a variety of presentations covering contemporary issues in pharmacy practice/therapeutics. Pharmacists may enroll in one or more [up to 8] hours of continuing education.

            Doppelgangers, Imposters, and New Kids on the Block

            A LIVE (both virtual and in-person) application and knowledge-based continuing education activity for practicing pharmacists in all settings

            LIVE Event Date: December 19, 2025

            7:30 AM - 5:00 PM Eastern Time
            Sheraton Hartford South, Rocky Hill, CT

            LIVE Encore Webinar Dates: December 22-30, 2025

            Webex Webinars, links in confirmation emails

            REGISTRATION LINK

            Activity Support:  There is no funding for this program.

             

            Activities on December 19th cost $60 for the first hour.

            Each additional activity costs $20.

            ACPE UANs

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-062-L03-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-063-L99-P

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-064-L01-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-065-L01-P

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-066-L05-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-067-L01-P

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-068-L01-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-069-L06-P

            Accreditation Hours

            Each CE is 1 hour of credit (.10 CEUs)

            Registering for the entire day is 8 hours of CEs (.80 CEUs)

            Accreditation Statements

            The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.

            Statements of credit for the online activities:

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-062-L03-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-063-L99-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-064-L01-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-065-L01-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-066-L05-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-067-L01-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-068-L01-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-069-L06-P

            - will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

             

            Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

            The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

            Faculty 

            Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Jennifer Luciano, PharmD, Director of Office of Experiential Education, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            William L. Baker, PharmD, FCCP, FACC, FHFSA, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Devra Dang, PharmD, CDCES, FNAP, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT  

            Michael White, PharmD, FCP, FCCP, FASHP, Distinguished Professor and Chair, Pharmacy Practice, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Kelsey Giara, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Kristin Waters, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Assistant Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Jeff Aeschlimann, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Faculty Disclosure

            In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

            All the speakers have no relationships with ineligible companies.

             

            Handouts

            HANDOUTS for Presentations

            8:10 - 9:10 a.m. – LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain

            2 Slides per page

            6 Slides per page

            9:15 - 10:15 a.m. – Step by Step: Tackling Imposter Syndrome in Every Transition

            2 Slides per page

            6 Slides per page

            10:20-11:20 a.m. – NKOTB: 2025 Updates on Management of Hypertension in Adults

            2 Slides per page

            6 Slides per page 

            11:25-12:25 p.m.  - NKOTB: New and Emerging Roles for GLP-1-Based Medications

            2 Slides per page color graphs

            2 Slides per page black and white

            6 Slides per page color graphs

            6 Slides per page black and white

            12:45-1:45 p.m. – PATIENT SAFETY: Biosimilar Doppelgangers

            2 Slides per page

            6 Slides per page

            1:50-2:50 p.m.  – Hormone Therapy’s Twin Faces: Sorting Science from Misconception

            2 Slides per page

            6 Slides per page

            2:55-3:55 p.m.  – Breaking the Mold: Novel Mechanisms in Psychiatry’s New Kids on the Block

            2 Slides per page

            6 Slides per page

            4:00-5:00 p.m. – IMMUNIZATION: Mountebanks, Grifters, and Frauds (Oh My!): An Update on the Management of Vaccine-Preventable Illnesses in 2025

            2 Slides per page

            6 Slides per page

            SCHEDULE/TOPICS/LEARNING OBJECTIVES

            7:30-8:00 a.m. - Registration and Check-In/Sign-In

            8:00-8:05 a.m. - Opening Remarks- Philip M. Hritcko, Dean and Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy

            8:05-8:10 a.m.Operational Instructions- Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of   Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

             

            8:10 - 9:10 a.m. – LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain

            Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            0009-0000-25-062-L03-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
            • Define the terms “counterfeit” and "spurious" drugs
            • Discuss the prevalence of counterfeiting globally and in the United States
            • List factors that contribute to drug counterfeiting
            • Discuss the Drug Supply Chain Security Act (DSCSA) and its implications for the drug supply distribution chain’s integrity
            • Identify steps that reduce the risk of suspect product being delivered to the pharmacy and to patients

             

             

            9:15 - 10:15 a.m. – Step by Step: Tackling Imposter Syndrome in Every Transition

            Jennifer Luciano, PharmD, Director of Office of Experiential Education, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            0009-0000-25-063-L99-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
            • Recognize the signs and symptoms of imposter syndrome as they commonly present in pharmacy practice and education, including during career transitions such as rotations, residency, and new professional roles
            • Examine the personal, academic, and systemic factors that contribute to imposter syndrome among pharmacists and pharmacy students, with emphasis on high-performance expectations and professional identity formation
            • Identify practical, evidence-based strategies to manage and overcome imposter syndrome, fostering resilience, confidence, and professional growth within pharmacy practice and education

             

             

            10:20-11:20 a.m. – NKOTB: 2025 Updates on Management of Hypertension in Adults

            William L. Baker, PharmD, FCCP, FACC, FHFSA, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            0009-0000-25-064-L01-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
            • Review the 2025 hypertension guidelines
            • Compare the updated recommendations to the prior guidelines
            • Review the evidence supporting the guideline changes

             

             

            11:25-12:25 p.m.  - NKOTB: New and Emerging Roles for GLP-1-Based Medications

            Devra Dang, PharmD, CDCES, FNAP, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT  

            0009-0000-25-065-L01-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Knowledge-based)

            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
            • List recent FDA-approved indications for GLP-1-based medications
            • Recognize proposed mechanisms by which GLP-1-based medications may impact conditions beyond type 2 diabetes and adiposity-based chronic disease
            • Describe key findings from major clinical trials evaluating new therapeutic potential of GLP-1-based medications

             

             

            12:25-12:45 p.m. – BREAK. Light snacks will be served.

             

            12:45-1:45 p.m. – PATIENT SAFETY: Biosimilar Doppelgangers

            Michael White, PharmD, FCP, FCCP, FASHP, Distinguished Professor and Chair, Pharmacy Practice, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            0009-0000-25-066-L05-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
            • Compare and contrast a small molecule drug from a biological drug
            • Compare and contrast how a reference biologic drug compares with its biosimilar
            • Describe where a pharmacist would identify a biosimilar product and the legal implications of a biosimilar achieving interchangeable status with a reference product
            • Describe the nocebo effect and how to prevent it from occurring
            • Apply the knowledge from the objectives above to specific patient care scenarios in the self-assessment questions

             

             

            1:50-2:50 p.m.  – Hormone Therapy’s Twin Faces: Sorting Science from Misconception

            Kelsey Giara, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            0009-0000-25-067-L01-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour (Application-based)

            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
            • Discuss the clinical evidence on safety, efficacy, and patient outcomes for hormone replacement therapy (HRT), highlighting areas of misconception or confusion
            • Compare HRT options and bioidenticals, including mechanisms of action, formulations, and regulatory pathways
            • Apply guidelines and evidence-based recommendations to individualize patient counseling and therapeutic decision-making when managing HRT

             

             

            2:55-3:55 p.m.  – Breaking the Mold: Novel Mechanisms in Psychiatry’s New Kids on the Block

            Kristin Waters, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Assistant Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            0009-0000-25-068-L01-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
            • Describe the unique mechanisms of action of xanomeline-trospium in the management of schizophrenia and dextromethorphan-containing medications in the management of major depressive disorder
            • Distinguish between adverse effect profiles of new psychiatric medications compared to traditional antipsychotics and antidepressants
            • Identify appropriate candidates for new psychiatric medications based on knowledge of efficacy, safety, and patient-specific factors

             

             

            4:00-5:00 p.m. – IMMUNIZATION: Mountebanks, Grifters, and Frauds (Oh My!): An Update on the Management of Vaccine-Preventable Illnesses in 2025

            Jeff Aeschlimann, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            0009-0000-25-069-L06-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
            • Describe at least one important change (or proposed change) in childhood and adult vaccination recommendations put forth by the CDC and/or ACIP
            • Given a patient who asks about receiving respiratory virus or bacteria vaccinations (e.g., Influenza, COVID-19, respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), pneumococcal), outline important differences between multiple products when they exist
            • Identify evidence-based pharmacotherapeutic treatments for common vaccine-preventable illnesses

             

            CE FINALE LIVE ENCORE WEBINARS AVAILABLE

            If you find you cannot make it to our LIVE EVENT on Friday, December 19th, you can participate in our ENCORE LIVE WEBINARS that will be streamed on the following dates:

            • Monday, December 22, 12:00 (Noon) - 1:00 pm – NKOTB: New and Emerging Roles for GLP-1-Based Medications
            • Monday, December 22, 7:00 pm-8:00 pm – Hormone Therapy’s Twin Faces: Sorting Science from Misconception
            • Monday, December 22, 8:10 – 9:10 pm – LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain
            • Tuesday, December 23, 12:00 pm-1:00 pm – PATIENT SAFETY: Biosimilar Doppelgangers
            • Tuesday, December 23, 7 pm – 8 pm – IMMUNIZATION: Mountebanks, Grifters, and Frauds (Oh My!): An Update on the Management of Vaccine-Preventable Illnesses in 2025
            • Monday, December 29, 12:00 (Noon) – 1:00 pm - Breaking the Mold: Novel Mechanisms in Psychiatry’s New Kids on the Block
            • Monday, December 29, 7 pm – 8 pm – LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain
            • Tuesday, December 30, 12:00 (Noon) – 1:00 pm - NKOTB: 2025 Updates on Management of Hypertension in Adults
            • Tuesday, December 30, 7 pm – 8 pm - Step by Step: Tackling Imposter Syndrome in Every Transition

            A continuous class schedule format will be used.  This format does not include breaks but does include a 20-minute lunch period. Activities on December 19th cost $60 for the first hour. Each additional activity costs $20. Early bird pricing ends December 15, 2025. Starting December 16, $25 is added to the total.

            Refunds and Cancellations: The registration fee, less a $75 processing fee, is refundable for those who cancel their registration three (3) days prior to the program (by December 16) After that time, no refund is available.

            Location: The Henry A. Palmer C.E. Finale will be held both virtually and in-person. You must sign in to the Webex link at the designated time using the link in your confirmation email if you decide to participate virtually.

            Continuing Education Units

            The University of Connecticut, School of Pharmacy, is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education. Statements of Credit will be awarded at CE Finale based on full sessions attended and completed online evaluations. Pharmacists can earn up to 8 contact hours (0.80 CEU) one of which is a law credit, one is an Immunization Credit, and one is a Patient Safety Credit.

            Please Note: Pharmacists who wish to receive credit for the presentations MUST ACCURATELY complete the registration and online evaluations within 45 days of the live program (before February 1, 2026).  Participants are accountable for their own continuing education requirements for license renewal and are required to follow up with Heather.Kleven@uconn.edu to resolve a discrepancy in a timely manner. PLEASE CHECK YOUR CPE MONITOR PROFILE within 3 days of submission to ensure that your credits have been properly uploaded.  Requests for exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis and may result in denial of credit.

            Our paper check processing system is quite slow. Please contact Heather.Kleven@uconn.edu if you must pay by check.

            Registration Fees: 50% discount for UConn faculty/preceptors

            Download Event Brochure

            REGISTRATION LINK

            Doppelgangers, Imposters, and New Kids on the Block LIVE ENCORE WEBINARS December 22 – 30, 2025

            Henry A. Palmer CE Finale 2025

            Henry A. Palmer CE Finale, named for beloved professor and mentor, Dr. Henry A. Palmer, is a continuing education program offered at the end of each calendar year. Held during December, the program helps pharmacists fulfill their last-minute CE requirements. The program is an ala carte program offering a variety of presentations covering contemporary issues in pharmacy practice/therapeutics. Pharmacists may enroll in one or more [up to 8] hours of continuing education.

            REGISTRATION LINK

            Activity Support:  There is no funding for this program.

             

            LIVE Encore Webinars cost $30 each.

            ACPE UANs

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-062-L03-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-063-L99-P

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-064-L01-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-065-L01-P

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-066-L05-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-067-L01-P

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-068-L01-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-069-L06-P

            Accreditation Hours

            Each CE is 1 contact hour

            (.10 CEU's)

            Accreditation Statements

            The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.

            Statements of credit for the online activities:

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-062-L03-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-063-L99-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-064-L01-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-065-L01-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-066-L05-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-067-L01-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-068-L01-P

            ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-069-L06-P

            - will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

             

            Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

            The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

            Faculty 

            Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Jennifer Luciano, PharmD, Director of Office of Experiential Education, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            William L. Baker, PharmD, FCCP, FACC, FHFSA, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Devra Dang, PharmD, CDCES, FNAP, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT  

            Michael White, PharmD, FCP, FCCP, FASHP, Distinguished Professor and Chair, Pharmacy Practice, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Kelsey Giara, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Kristin Waters, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Assistant Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Jeff Aeschlimann, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

            Faculty Disclosure

            In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

            All the speakers have no relationships with ineligible companies.

             

            HANDOUTS

            Henry A. Palmer CE FINALE 2025 LIVE ENCORE WEBINARS - streaming on Webex in Eastern Standard Time

             

            Monday, December 22, 12:00 (Noon) - 1:00 pm EST

            NKOTB: New and Emerging Roles for GLP-1-Based Medications

            Devra Dang, PharmD, CDCES, FNAP, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT  

            0009-0000-25-065-L01-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Knowledge-based)

            2 slides per page, color

            2 slides per page, black and white

            6 slides per page color

            6 slides per page black and white

                    *

                    Monday, December 22, 7:00 -8:00 pm EST

                    Hormone Therapy’s Twin Faces: Sorting Science from Misconception

                    Kelsey Giara, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                    0009-0000-25-067-L01-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour (Application-based)

                    2 slides per page

                    6 slides per page

                    *

                    Monday, December 22, 8:10 – 9:10 pm EST

                    LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain

                    Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                    0009-0000-25-062-L03-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                      2 slides per page

                      6 slides per page

                      *

                      Tuesday, December 23, 12:00 (noon) -1:00 pm EST

                      PATIENT SAFETY: Biosimilar Doppelgangers

                      Michael White, PharmD, FCP, FCCP, FASHP, Distinguished Professor and Chair, Pharmacy Practice, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                      0009-0000-25-066-L05-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                        2 slides per page

                        6 slides per page

                        *

                        Tuesday, December 23, 7 pm – 8 pm EST

                        IMMUNIZATION: Mountebanks, Grifters, and Frauds (Oh My!): An Update on the Management of Vaccine-Preventable Illnesses in 2025

                        Jeff Aeschlimann, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                        0009-0000-25-069-L06-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                        2 slides per page

                        6 slides per page

                        *

                        Monday, December 29, 12:00 (Noon) – 1:00 pm EST

                        Breaking the Mold: Novel Mechanisms in Psychiatry’s New Kids on the Block

                        Kristin Waters, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Assistant Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                        0009-0000-25-068-L01-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                          2 slides per page

                          6 slides per page

                          *

                          Monday, December 29, 7 – 8 pm EST

                          LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain

                          Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                          0009-0000-25-062-L03-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                            2 slides per page

                            6 slides per page

                            *

                            Tuesday, December 30, 12:00 (Noon) – 1:00 pm EST

                            NKOTB: 2025 Updates on Management of Hypertension in Adults

                            William L. Baker, PharmD, FCCP, FACC, FHFSA, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                            0009-0000-25-064-L01-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                              2 slides per page

                              6 slides per page

                              *

                              Tuesday, December 30, 7 – 8 pm EST

                              Step by Step: Tackling Imposter Syndrome in Every Transition

                              Jennifer Luciano, PharmD, Director of Office of Experiential Education, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                              0009-0000-25-063-L99-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                              2 slides per page

                              6 slides per page

                               

                              Refunds and Cancellations: The registration fee, less a $10 processing fee, is refundable for those who email Heather.Kleven@uconn.edu to cancel their registration prior to the program. After that time, no refund is available.

                              Location: The Henry A. Palmer C.E. Finale ENCORE WEBINARS are virtual only. You must sign in to the Webex link at the designated time using the link in your confirmation email.

                              Continuing Education Units

                              The University of Connecticut, School of Pharmacy, is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education. Statements of Credit will be awarded at CE Finale based on full sessions attended and completed online evaluations.

                              Please Note: Pharmacists who wish to receive credit for the presentations MUST ACCURATELY complete the registration and online evaluations within 45 days of the live program (before February 1, 2026).  Participants are accountable for their own continuing education requirements for license renewal and are required to follow up with Heather.Kleven@uconn.edu to resolve a discrepancy in a timely manner. PLEASE CHECK YOUR CPE MONITOR PROFILE within 3 days of submission to ensure that your credits have been properly uploaded.  Requests for exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis and may result in denial of credit.

                              Registration Fees: 50% discount for UConn faculty/preceptors

                              SCHEDULE/TOPICS/LEARNING OBJECTIVES

                              Henry A. Palmer CE FINALE 2025 LIVE ENCORE WEBINARS - streaming on Webex in Eastern Standard Time

                               

                              Monday, December 22, 12:00 (Noon) - 1:00 pm EST

                              NKOTB: New and Emerging Roles for GLP-1-Based Medications

                              Devra Dang, PharmD, CDCES, FNAP, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT  

                              0009-0000-25-065-L01-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Knowledge-based)

                              At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                              • List recent FDA-approved indications for GLP-1-based medications
                              • Recognize proposed mechanisms by which GLP-1-based medications may impact conditions beyond type 2 diabetes and adiposity-based chronic disease
                              • Describe key findings from major clinical trials evaluating new therapeutic potential of GLP-1-based medications

                                       

                                      *

                                      Monday, December 22, 7:00 -8:00 pm EST

                                      Hormone Therapy’s Twin Faces: Sorting Science from Misconception

                                      Kelsey Giara, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                                      0009-0000-25-067-L01-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour (Application-based)

                                      At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                                      • Discuss the clinical evidence on safety, efficacy, and patient outcomes for hormone replacement therapy (HRT), highlighting areas of misconception or confusion
                                      • Compare HRT options and bioidenticals, including mechanisms of action, formulations, and regulatory pathways
                                      • Apply guidelines and evidence-based recommendations to individualize patient counseling and therapeutic decision-making when managing HRT

                                         

                                        *

                                        Monday, December 22, 8:10 – 9:10 pm EST

                                        LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain

                                        Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                                        0009-0000-25-062-L03-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                                        At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                                        • Define the terms “counterfeit” and "spurious" drugs
                                        • Discuss the prevalence of counterfeiting globally and in the United States
                                        • List factors that contribute to drug counterfeiting
                                        • Discuss the Drug Supply Chain Security Act (DSCSA) and its implications for the drug supply distribution chain’s integrity
                                        • Identify steps that reduce the risk of suspect product being delivered to the pharmacy and to patients

                                           

                                          *

                                          Tuesday, December 23, 12:00 (noon) -1:00 pm EST

                                          PATIENT SAFETY: Biosimilar Doppelgangers

                                          Michael White, PharmD, FCP, FCCP, FASHP, Distinguished Professor and Chair, Pharmacy Practice, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                                          0009-0000-25-066-L05-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                                          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                                          • Compare and contrast a small molecule drug from a biological drug
                                          • Compare and contrast how a reference biologic drug compares with its biosimilar
                                          • Describe where a pharmacist would identify a biosimilar product and the legal implications of a biosimilar achieving interchangeable status with a reference product
                                          • Describe the nocebo effect and how to prevent it from occurring
                                          • Apply the knowledge from the objectives above to specific patient care scenarios in the self-assessment questions

                                             

                                            *

                                            Tuesday, December 23, 7 pm – 8 pm EST

                                            IMMUNIZATION: Mountebanks, Grifters, and Frauds (Oh My!): An Update on the Management of Vaccine-Preventable Illnesses in 2025

                                            Jeff Aeschlimann, PharmD, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                                            0009-0000-25-069-L06-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                                            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                                            • Describe at least one important change (or proposed change) in childhood and adult vaccination recommendations put forth by the CDC and/or ACIP
                                            • Given a patient who asks about receiving respiratory virus or bacteria vaccinations (e.g., Influenza, COVID-19, respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), pneumococcal), outline important differences between multiple products when they exist
                                            • Identify evidence-based pharmacotherapeutic treatments for common vaccine-preventable illnesses

                                             

                                            *

                                            Monday, December 29, 12:00 (Noon) – 1:00 pm EST

                                            Breaking the Mold: Novel Mechanisms in Psychiatry’s New Kids on the Block

                                            Kristin Waters, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Assistant Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                                            0009-0000-25-068-L01-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                                            At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                                            • Describe the unique mechanisms of action of xanomeline-trospium in the management of schizophrenia and dextromethorphan-containing medications in the management of major depressive disorder
                                            • Distinguish between adverse effect profiles of new psychiatric medications compared to traditional antipsychotics and antidepressants
                                            • Identify appropriate candidates for new psychiatric medications based on knowledge of efficacy, safety, and patient-specific factors

                                               

                                              *

                                              Monday, December 29, 7 – 8 pm EST

                                              LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain

                                              Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                                              0009-0000-25-062-L03-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                                              At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                                              • Define the terms “counterfeit” and "spurious" drugs
                                              • Discuss the prevalence of counterfeiting globally and in the United States
                                              • List factors that contribute to drug counterfeiting
                                              • Discuss the Drug Supply Chain Security Act (DSCSA) and its implications for the drug supply distribution chain’s integrity
                                              • Identify steps that reduce the risk of suspect product being delivered to the pharmacy and to patients

                                                 

                                                *

                                                Tuesday, December 30, 12:00 (Noon) – 1:00 pm EST

                                                NKOTB: 2025 Updates on Management of Hypertension in Adults

                                                William L. Baker, PharmD, FCCP, FACC, FHFSA, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                                                0009-0000-25-064-L01-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                                                At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                                                • Review the 2025 hypertension guidelines
                                                • Compare the updated recommendations to the prior guidelines
                                                • Review the evidence supporting the guideline changes

                                                   

                                                  *

                                                  Tuesday, December 30, 7 – 8 pm EST

                                                  Step by Step: Tackling Imposter Syndrome in Every Transition

                                                  Jennifer Luciano, PharmD, Director of Office of Experiential Education, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

                                                  0009-0000-25-063-L99-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

                                                  At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
                                                  • Recognize the signs and symptoms of imposter syndrome as they commonly present in pharmacy practice and education, including during career transitions such as rotations, residency, and new professional roles
                                                  • Examine the personal, academic, and systemic factors that contribute to imposter syndrome among pharmacists and pharmacy students, with emphasis on high-performance expectations and professional identity formation
                                                  • Identify practical, evidence-based strategies to manage and overcome imposter syndrome, fostering resilience, confidence, and professional growth within pharmacy practice and education

                                                   

                                                   

                                                  Refunds and Cancellations: The registration fee, less a $10 processing fee, is refundable for those who email Heather.Kleven@uconn.edu to cancel their registration prior to the program. After that time, no refund is available.

                                                  Location: The Henry A. Palmer C.E. Finale ENCORE WEBINARS are virtual only. You must sign in to the Webex link at the designated time using the link in your confirmation email.

                                                  Continuing Education Units

                                                  The University of Connecticut, School of Pharmacy, is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education. Statements of Credit will be awarded at CE Finale based on full sessions attended and completed online evaluations.

                                                  Please Note: Pharmacists who wish to receive credit for the presentations MUST ACCURATELY complete the registration and online evaluations within 45 days of the live program (before February 1, 2026).  Participants are accountable for their own continuing education requirements for license renewal and are required to follow up with Heather.Kleven@uconn.edu to resolve a discrepancy in a timely manner. PLEASE CHECK YOUR CPE MONITOR PROFILE within 3 days of submission to ensure that your credits have been properly uploaded.  Requests for exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis and may result in denial of credit.

                                                  Registration Fees: 50% discount for UConn faculty/preceptors

                                                  REGISTRATION LINK

                                                  SPOTTED: MEASLES CASES RISING IN THE U.S.

                                                  Learning Objectives

                                                   

                                                  After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

                                                  •        Identify the transmission of measles, its symptoms, and patients at higher risk for complications
                                                  •        Describe the steps healthcare providers should take if measles is suspected or confirmed
                                                  •        Determine appropriate patients for measles vaccination
                                                  •        Apply patient counseling techniques regarding vaccine education

                                                  After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

                                                  •        Identify the symptoms of measles, its transmission, and patients at higher risk for complications
                                                  •        Describe the steps healthcare providers should take if measles is suspected or confirmed
                                                  •        Determine which patients might need vaccine education from the pharmacist

                                                     

                                                    Release Date: October 20, 2025

                                                    Expiration Date: October 20, 2028

                                                    Course Fee

                                                    Pharmacists & Technicians:  FREE

                                                    There is no funding for this CE.

                                                    ACPE UANs

                                                    Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-060-H06-P

                                                    Pharmacy Technician:  0009-0000-25-060-H06-T

                                                    Session Codes

                                                    Pharmacist: 25YC60-BFG57

                                                    Pharmacy Technician: 25YC60-FBG75

                                                    Accreditation Hours

                                                    2.0 hours of CE

                                                    Accreditation Statements

                                                    The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-060-H06-P/T will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                                                     

                                                    Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                                                    The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                                                    Faculty

                                                    Monica Holmberg, PharmD, BCPS
                                                    Medical Writer
                                                    Phoenix, AZ

                                                     

                                                    Faculty Disclosure

                                                    In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                                                    Monica Holmberg has no relationships with ineligible companies.

                                                     

                                                    ABSTRACT

                                                    Measles is a vaccine preventable disease, and yet its prevalence is rising. Shortly after the United States declared measles “eliminated” in 2000, measles vaccination rates began to drop. Reasons for decreased vaccination include misinformation regarding an association between measles vaccine and autism and interruption in routine care during the COVID-19 pandemic. As a result, measles cases continue to rise in unvaccinated patients. Post-exposure prophylaxis with a measles-containing vaccine or immunoglobulin may benefit some patients. Treatment for acute measles is mainly limited to supportive care and supplementation with vitamin A. Prevention with appropriate vaccination is the best method for minimizing the spread of measles. Vaccine hesitancy occurs worldwide and creates a challenge for obtaining adequate community vaccination rates for measles control. The pharmacy team can address vaccine hesitancy with education and empathy.

                                                    CONTENT

                                                    Content

                                                    INTRODUCTION

                                                    Measles is an extremely contagious viral illness caused by an enveloped RNA virus of the genus Morbillivirus and family Paramyxoviridae.1,2 Once a routine childhood disease, the development and consistent administration of a measles vaccine effectually eliminated measles in the United States (U.S.). Recent falling vaccination rates have led to the reemergence of measles.3

                                                     

                                                    Consider the following case: a man, Mike, and a toddler in a stroller, whose name is Bella, approach the pharmacy counter. He was shopping for nacho cheese flavored tortilla chips and saw the sign offering immunizations, which reminded him of his daughter’s recent well care visit. The pediatrician recommended routine vaccination with the measles, mumps and rubella vaccine, but Mike declined. He asks the pharmacist, someone he knows well and trusts, if the vaccine is necessary. Mike was under the impression there were no active measles cases in the U.S. Are there?

                                                     

                                                    PREVALENCE

                                                    Prior to the availability of measles vaccine, almost everyone contracted measles during childhood. Approximately 90% of individuals obtained post-infection immunity by age 15.3,4

                                                     

                                                    The Vaccination Assistance Act provided federal funding to state and local agencies for childhood immunizations beginning in 1962.5 In 1963, two measles vaccines became available in the U.S.: a single dose of a live attenuated vaccine or three once-monthly doses of an inactivated vaccine.6 The inactivated vaccine was eventually discontinued in 1967 because it was less effective than the live vaccine.6,7 By mid-1967, the reported number of measles cases had decreased from 1000 to 200 weekly.5

                                                     

                                                    An increase in measles cases occurred from 1989 to 1991 due to decreased vaccination rates in young children and a rise in cases in individuals who had received only one dose of a measles vaccine. Increased vaccination awareness and rates in young children alongside the addition of a routine second dose of measles vaccine resulted in a major reduction in measles cases. The U.S. declared measles “eliminated” in 2000.1

                                                     

                                                    PAUSE AND PONDER: What factors influence vaccination rates?

                                                     

                                                    Since then, vaccine hesitancy due to misinformation regarding adverse effects and an incorrect association with autism has fueled decreasing vaccination rates. Other causes of declining measles vaccinations include missed routine vaccines during the COVID-19 pandemic and community complacency with measles’ severity and its complications. The resulting unvaccinated children are susceptible to the infection and its spread, thus propelling its resurgence.2,5

                                                     

                                                    As of August 2025 in the U.S., 41 states had reported 1,356 confirmed cases of measles since January of that year. Most cases occurred in unvaccinated patients8:

                                                    • 92% were unvaccinated individuals or in people with unknown vaccination status
                                                    • 4% had received only one dose of MMR
                                                    • 4% had received two doses MMR.

                                                    Among these cases, 13% were hospitalized, and three cases resulted in death.8

                                                     

                                                    A measles outbreak is defined as three or more related cases. From January to August 2025, the U.S. experienced 32 outbreaks, with 87% of confirmed cases related to these outbreaks. In 2024, 16 outbreaks were reported and 69% of measles cases were related to outbreaks.8

                                                     

                                                    Reflecting on our case, the pharmacist explains to Mike that domestic cases are rising due to declining vaccination rates worldwide, and that vaccination offers the best protection available.

                                                     

                                                    TRANSMISSION AND SYMPTOMS

                                                    Transmission of measles occurs by direct contact or airborne spread through respiratory droplets and aerosols, which can stay airborne for up to two hours in enclosed areas.1,5,7 About 90% of non-immune people who are exposed to the measles virus will become infected.7

                                                     

                                                    The physical manifestation of measles infection begins 11 to 12 days after exposure with a prodrome of malaise, cough, coryza (runny nose and nasal congestion), and conjunctivitis.3 Approximately 50% to 70% of patients also develop Koplik spots, which are small white or grey papules in the mouth, during the prodrome phase.5

                                                     

                                                    After two to four days, a red, macropapular rash (a flat, red area on the skin that is covered with small bumps that may merge together) occurs, usually on the face or hairline.3,9 The rash progresses to the trunk, and then to the lower extremities.3 Patients with uncomplicated measles usually improve by the third day after the rash began, and most cases resolve within seven to 10 days. Patients are contagious from four days before until four days after the onset of the rash.9

                                                     

                                                    COMPLICATIONS

                                                    Complications of measles include diarrhea, dehydration, pneumonia, encephalitis, and death.3 For every thousand cases of measles, one case may lead to encephalitis and two to three cases may lead to death. Measles-related deaths are typically due to respiratory and neurologic complications.1,3

                                                     

                                                    Rare complications of measles include measles inclusion body encephalitis (MIBE) and subacute sclerosing panencephalitis (SSPE). MIBE usually occurs in immunocompromised patients within one year of infection and is characterized by neurologic dysfunction, such as altered level of consciousness, seizures, loss of speech, one-sided paralysis, and lack of coordinated movements. MIBE has a mortality rate of 75%.1,10 SSPE is a degenerative central nervous system disease that results neurological decline and seizures. It usually develops seven to 11 years after infection, and it occurs most frequently in children infected with measles before age 2.1

                                                     

                                                    Patients at higher risk for measles infection are unvaccinated or incompletely vaccinated, have had exposure to measles, or have traveled to areas with active measles.8

                                                     

                                                    Severe cases of measles may require hospitalization.3 Patients who are younger than 5 or older than 20, pregnant, or immunocompromised are at the greatest risk for severe measles infections or complications.8

                                                     

                                                    Back to our case: Mike asks if there is medicine Bella can take to speed up her recovery if she catches measles, rather than prophylaxis with a vaccine.

                                                     

                                                    POST-EXPOSURE MANAGEMENT

                                                    Confirmation of Diagnosis

                                                    The diagnosis of measles is confirmed through laboratory findings. Positive serology for measles IgM antibodies, significant increase in IgG antibody levels, and cell culture of the measles virus can be assessed through blood assays. Evidence of measles RNA by reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction can be assessed through nasal, throat, or nasopharyngeal swab or a urine sample.5,11 Healthcare providers should obtain both a serum sample and a nasopharyngeal or throat swab or urine sample for all patients with clinical symptoms of measles.1,11 Just looking at the patient’s rash is not sufficient for diagnosis. Laboratory evidence is crucial because clinicians may incorrectly diagnose or report other febrile illnesses with rash as measles.5

                                                     

                                                    Reporting to Health Department

                                                    Because measles has a significant impact on public health, it is a nationally notifiable disease. The purpose of national notification is to assess the incidence and spread of measles, with the goal of controlling outbreaks. Healthcare providers, laboratories, and hospitals should report confirmed cases of measles to local health departments. Each state has its own guidelines and requirements for reporting. The states report suspected and confirmed measles cases to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) using the National Notifiable Diseases Surveillance System.12,13

                                                     

                                                    Post-Exposure Prophylaxis

                                                    Post-exposure prophylaxis (PEP) with measles, mumps and rubella vaccine (MMR) or immunoglobin in unvaccinated or partially vaccinated people may offer some protection against the disease, allowing for milder symptoms and a briefer course of illness.9 MMR should be administered within 72 hours of exposure.

                                                     

                                                    Patients who are ineligible for MMR (age less than 6 months, severely immunocompromised, or pregnant) and patients ages 6 to 11 months who did not receive MMR within the initial 72 hours can receive immunoglobulin within 6 days of exposure. Patients younger than 12 months of age can receive intramuscular immunoglobulin 0.5 mL/kg of body weight, with a maximum dose of 15 mL. Patients who are severely immunocompromised, pregnant, or weigh more than 30 kg can receive intravenous immunoglobulin 400 mg/kg.1

                                                     

                                                    Patients should not receive both immunoglobulin and MMR because the immunoglobulin will decrease the vaccine’s efficacy.14 Patients without immunity who receive immunoglobulin should be given MMR or MMRV (MMR with a varicella component) at least 6 months after intramuscular immunoglobulin and 8 months after intravenous immunoglobulin.

                                                     

                                                    Patients with documented immunity do not need PEP.1

                                                     

                                                    Treatment of Measles

                                                    Treatment of measles is mainly limited to supportive care. Caregivers can give acetaminophen, ibuprofen, or intravenous fluids if needed for symptom control.15 Additionally, patients should isolate for four days after the rash appears to minimize the transmission of measles.16

                                                     

                                                    No antivirals are currently approved by the Food and Drug Administration for the treatment of measles. Although the measles virus displays in vitro susceptibility to riboviran, this has not been studied in clinical trials and is not indicated for the treatment of measles.1

                                                     

                                                    Treatment with vitamin A is an option for pediatric patients with measles. Vitamin A deficiency during measles infection has been linked with increased disease severity, additional complications, and prolonged recovery.15 Administration of vitamin A in children with measles in low- and middle-income countries has been connected to decreased morbidity and mortality.1 Although vitamin A deficiency is not as prevalent in higher income countries, infection with measles can reduce vitamin A stores.15 Given the benefit of vitamin A supplementation, the World Health Organization (WHO) recommends treatment with vitamin A for all children (not adults) with severe measles that requires hospitalization.1,15

                                                     

                                                    Vitamin A is given once daily for two days, as described in Table 1. Additionally, a third dose of vitamin A should be given two to six weeks after the initial dose for children with signs and symptoms of vitamin A deficiency.1

                                                     

                                                    Table 1. Vitamin A Dosing1,15,17
                                                    Age of child Dose: International Units (IU) Dose: retinol activity equivalent (RAE)*
                                                    12 months or older 200,000 60,000
                                                    6 to 11 months 100,000 30,000
                                                    Under 6 months 50,000 15,000
                                                    *Research at the turn of the Century found that provitamin-A carotenoid absorption is only half as much as previously believed. Consequently, the U.S. Institute of Medicine recommended a new unit, the retinol activity equivalent (RAE) in 2001. Each mcg RAE corresponds to 1 mcg retinol, 2 mcg of β-carotene in oil, 12 mcg of "dietary" β-carotene, or 24 mcg of the three other dietary provitamin-A carotenoids.

                                                     

                                                    Revisiting our case: the pharmacist explains to Mike that although treatment with vitamin A is an option that may ease severity and promote recovery, it will not treat the infection. Mike now shares that Bella received a single dose of MMR five months ago (at age 10 months) before a trip to Europe for his sister’s wedding. He is wondering why she would need to be vaccinated again. Doesn’t that dose offer protection?

                                                     

                                                    VACCINE RECOMMENDATIONS

                                                    To be considered immune to measles, patients must have documented administration of an age-appropriate live measles containing vaccine, laboratory confirmation of either immunity or disease, or birth prior to 1957.3 Individuals born before 1957 are assumed to be immune to measles due to childhood exposure, as most people developed immunity through infection with the virus before the availability of the vaccine.5

                                                     

                                                    Vaccination is key to measles prevention and control. Both the CDC and the American Academy of Pediatrics recommend routine vaccination with either MMR or MMRV.1,3 Table 2 provides additional information regarding current vaccines options.

                                                     

                                                    Table 2. Measles Vaccines Available in the United States1,18-20
                                                    Brand name Manufacturer Active ingredients Age of administration Administration
                                                    M-M-R II Merck measles, mumps, and rubella vaccine, live

                                                    (MMR)

                                                    12 months and older* 0.5 ml subcutaneously or intramuscularly
                                                    Priorix GlaxoSmithKline measles, mumps, and rubella vaccine, live

                                                    (MMR)

                                                    12 months and older* 0.5 ml subcutaneously
                                                    ProQuad Merck measles, mumps, rubella, and varicella vaccine, live

                                                    (MMRV)

                                                    12 months to 12 years 0.5 ml subcutaneously or intramuscularly
                                                    *May be administered at ages 6 to 11 months for international travel, community outbreak, or post-exposure prophylaxis

                                                     

                                                    The first dose is usually given between 12 and 15 months of age, and the second dose is usually given between ages 4 and 6 years. The second dose may be given earlier, at least 28 days after the first dose for MMR and 90 days for MMRV, during a community outbreak of measles, before international travel, or to individuals who did not receive the vaccine during the recommended ages for administration. The MMRV vaccine should not be given to children younger than 1 year.1,21

                                                     

                                                    The CDC recommends that MMR and varicella vaccines are given separately when administered as the first dose for children aged 12 to 47 months, unless the parent or caregiver prefers MMRV. Clinicians usually prefer MMRV as the second dose in children age 15 months to 12 years and for both doses in unvaccinated children age 48 months and older. The SIDEBAR explains this further.

                                                     

                                                    At the time of this writing, the CDC Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) recommends that MMR and varicella vaccine be administrated separately until age 4. This is a change from the current recommendation to administer MMRV for the second dose in children 15 months and older. The ACIP recommendation is still pending approval from the CDC acting director and is not yet official.22

                                                     

                                                    SIDEBAR: How to choose MMR vs. MMRV23

                                                    Piper, age 4, and her brother Oliver, age 12 months, are both due for measles and varicella vaccines. Piper received separate MMR and varicella vaccines when she was 1 year old. Their mom, Barbara, would like to minimize injections for each child. She asks if they can each receive MMRV to limit their shots today.

                                                     

                                                    Although MMRV is indicated for children ages 12 months to 12 years, it has been associated with an increased risk of fever and febrile seizure when given as the first dose to children ages 12 to 47 months of age. Experts encourage healthcare providers to counsel parents and caregivers of children in this age group regarding the risks and benefits of MMRV vaccination. MMRV may be administered if the parent or caregiver prefers; however, the CDC recommends that MMR and varicella vaccines are given separately for the first dose in this age range.

                                                     

                                                    Approximately 15% of children aged 12 to 47 months who receive MMR and varicella vaccines separately will experience post-vaccination fever (102°F or higher up to 42 days after vaccination), compared with 22% who receive MMRV. Administering the vaccines separately in this age group also decreases the febrile seizure risk by half: four of 10,000 children experience febrile seizure five to 12 days after vaccination with MMR and varicella separately, as compared to eight of 10,000 with MMRV.

                                                     

                                                    For children aged 48 months and older, the risk of fever or febrile seizure with the first dose of MMRV declines and is similar to the risk when MMR and varicella vaccine are administered separately. The risk also decreases in all age groups when MMRV is administered as the second dose. Clinicians usually prefer MMRV for both doses in children aged 48 months and older and for the second dose in children ages 15 months to 12 years.

                                                     

                                                    MMR and varicella vaccine should be administered separately for children with a personal or family history of seizures because they are at increased risk of febrile seizure after MMRV vaccination.

                                                     

                                                    The pharmacist discusses the risks and benefits with Barbara, explaining that Piper received MMR and varicella vaccines separately at age 1 to reduce the risk of fever and febrile seizure. Because Piper is 4, she is an excellent candidate for MMRV. Barbara confirms that neither Oliver nor anyone in his family has a history of seizures. The pharmacist discusses the risks of MMRV at Oliver’s age (increased risk of fever and febrile seizures) and benefits (one injection rather than two). Barbara weighs the information presented to her and decides to follow the CDC recommendation of vaccinating Oliver with separate vaccines today, but will plan for MMRV for his second dose at age 4.

                                                     

                                                    Before Barbara leaves, she pauses at the pharmacy counter. She asks about her niece, Lucy, who is 4 and unvaccinated. She wonders if Lucy is eligible for MMRV vaccination, and if consolidating shots might encourage Lucy’s mom to consider vaccination.

                                                     

                                                    The pharmacist confirms that MMRV is appropriate for Lucy based on her age and vaccination status. Children aged 4 and older have not demonstrated an increased incidence of fever and febrile seizure when MMRV is administered as either the first or second dose. A decreased risk of adverse events and administration of a single injection rather than two with each dose may be preferable to Lucy and her parent. The pharmacist offers to contact Lucy’s mom and discuss vaccination options with her, explaining that Lucy could receive the first dose of MMRV now and the second dose in 90 days.

                                                     

                                                    The MMR vaccine may be given to children ages 6 to 11 months if a community outbreak occurs or if the child is traveling internationally. For optimal efficacy, clinicians should give the vaccine at least two weeks before travel. It is important to note that a dose given before age 1 does not count towards completing the immunization series; a total of two doses are required to be administered after age 1, and doses given at ages 12 to 15 months and 4 to 6 years are still recommended.1

                                                     

                                                    Reflecting back on our case: the pharmacist explains to Mike that Bella needs two doses after age 1 to ensure immunity to measles. Although Bella received a dose prior to international travel, she was younger than 12 months old, and it does not count towards completing the series.

                                                     

                                                    PAUSE AND PONDER: Who else would benefit from measles vaccinations?

                                                     

                                                    Although the guidelines are age based for routine administration, some patients may fall outside these parameters. Adults and older children, such as those in high school or college, who received a single dose after 12 months of age should receive a second dose, regardless of their current age.1

                                                     

                                                    Other populations that should receive two doses of MMR, at least 28 days apart, include

                                                    • Students without immunity at educational institutions after high school, such as college or university
                                                    • International travelers without immunity
                                                    • Healthcare workers without immunity
                                                    • Healthcare workers born prior to 1957 without laboratory confirmation of immunity
                                                    • Close contacts of immunocompromised individuals who do not have documented immunity
                                                    • Individuals older than 12 months of age with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection without immunosuppression and without immunity

                                                     

                                                    An additional one to two doses of MMR may be required for 21

                                                    • Recipients of the inactivated measles vaccine between 1963 and 1967
                                                    • Individuals at risk during an outbreak as determined by a health department

                                                     

                                                    People who should not receive MMR or MMRV are individuals with18-20

                                                    • Hypersensitivity to any component of a measles-containing vaccine
                                                    • Immunodeficiency or immunosuppression due to disease or medical therapy
                                                    • Pregnancy or those who plan to become pregnant within a month
                                                    • Active febrile illness with fever greater than 101.3°F (38.5°C) (M-M-R II and ProQuad)
                                                    • Active tuberculosis in those who are not receiving treatment (M-M-R II and ProQuad)

                                                       

                                                      Patients who may be at greater risk for a experiencing a serious adverse reaction or having a less robust immune response after vaccination are those with21

                                                      • Acute illness, with or without fever
                                                      • Use of blood product containing antibodies within the past 11 months
                                                      • Thrombocytopenia or thrombocytopenic purpura
                                                      • Indication for tuberculin skin testing or interferon gamma release assay testing
                                                      • Seizures, either personal or family history

                                                       

                                                      Back to the dad in our case: he’s still hesitant. He feels that his daughter has had so many vaccines already. And he’s read online that vaccines aren’t always safe. He wonders aloud if it is it really worth the risk?

                                                       

                                                      VACCINE HESITANCY

                                                      Vaccine hesitancy (VH) is complicated and multifactorial. It is formed by social, cultural, political, and personal elements.24,25 The WHO defines VH as a “delay in acceptance or refusal of vaccines despite availability of vaccination services.”26 Examples include delaying vaccines, limiting the number of vaccines administered at the same time, avoiding specific vaccines, and omitting all vaccines completely.27 Some VH individuals believe that natural immunity (immunity resulting from infection) is more beneficial to the immune system than vaccine-induced immunity. While both routes provide immunity, the risks of vaccination are usually lower than the potential complications or consequences of acquiring the infection.25,28 VH is not clear cut; VH is a spectrum that encompasses a range of beliefs, attitudes, and actions.

                                                       

                                                      PAUSE AND PONDER: How can pharmacy teams effectively address VH?

                                                       

                                                      The 3 C model describes vaccine hesitancy as a result of decreased confidence, increased complacency, and decreased convenience. Table 3 describes the components of the 3 C Model of vaccine hesitancy.29

                                                       

                                                      Table 3. The 3 C Model of Vaccine Hesitancy29,30
                                                      Confidence Patient trust regarding

                                                      •   The safety and effectiveness of vaccines

                                                      •   The healthcare system providing vaccines

                                                      •   The motivation of policymakers who determine vaccine guidelines

                                                      Complacency •   The risks of vaccine preventable diseases are believed to be low

                                                      •   May occur when the disease being prevented is no longer prevalent

                                                      Convenience Ease in obtaining vaccination, influenced by

                                                      •   Availability

                                                      •   Affordability

                                                      •   Accessibility

                                                      •   Literacy

                                                      •   Immunization services

                                                      •   Comfort

                                                       

                                                       

                                                      Healthcare providers might assume VH is a fairly new development, resulting from and driven by the Internet and social media. While it is true that social media often propagates vaccine misinformation, VH was first recognized more than 200 years ago with the administration of smallpox inoculation. VH evolved further in the late 1800s when smallpox vaccination requirements led to the adoption of personal belief exemption. Personal belief exemption, which is the practice of omitting a vaccination based on individual convictions, continued to gain popularity as more vaccines became available.24

                                                       

                                                      Sources for vaccine information abound, including healthcare providers, the Internet, social media, word of mouth, and traditional media.27 Pharmacists are strong resources to answer vaccine questions and concerns because people view pharmacists as trusted and accessible. This position of responsibiliy allows pharmacists to help patients navigate the abundance of information—and misinformation—available.31

                                                       

                                                      Traditionally, healthcare providers tackled individual VH through fact-based education to correct misinformation. However, a well-rounded approach focusing on individual beliefs in addition to evidence-based facts may be more effective in encouraging vaccine adoption.31

                                                       

                                                      An option for addressing VH is the ASPIRE framework. This method helps pharmacists interact with patients regarding vaccination beyond basic education. It encourages pharmacists to actively engage with patients to establish trust and address their specific concerns.31

                                                       

                                                      The ASPIRE framework consists of the following actions31:

                                                      • Assume that people want to be vaccinated and be prepared for questions
                                                      • Share key facts and information sources to counter misinformation
                                                      • Present strong recommendations to vaccinate and stories about vaccination experiences
                                                      • Initiate discussion or address questions about adverse effects proactively and share credible information sources
                                                      • Respond to questions and listen actively
                                                      • Empathize and understand concerns

                                                       

                                                      In our case, the pharmacist recognizes Mike’s concern but assures him that misinformation is rampant. The pharmacist explains with empathy that measles vaccine is both safe and effective, and that exposure to the disease often carries severe complications. The pharmacist offers to vaccinate today. Mike decides to think it over while he shops for snacks. The pharmacist will continue to offer the vaccination every time Mike and Bella visit the pharmacy.

                                                       

                                                      CONCLUSION

                                                      Measles is no longer a disease of the past. The recent uptick in cases is directly related to declining vaccination rates. Unvaccinated individuals are at risk for infection and complications, which may be severe. People without immunity may also transmit the disease to other unvaccinated individuals, perpetuating the cycle. Healthcare providers, laboratories, and hospitals should confirm suspected cases of measles with laboratory findings and report to the appropriate local health department. While supportive care may offer symptom control, prevention is key to measles control; both the MMR and MMRV vaccine are safe, effective, and available. Active and empathetic counseling techniques can help pharmacists build vaccine confidence and adoption.

                                                       

                                                       

                                                      Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

                                                      SPOTTED: MEASLES CASES RISING IN THE U.S.
                                                      25-060 P
                                                      Pharmacist post-test

                                                      Pharmacist Learning Objectives
                                                      After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to
                                                      • Identify the transmission of measles, its symptoms, and patients at higher risk for complications
                                                      • Describe the steps healthcare providers should take if measles is suspected or confirmed
                                                      • Determine appropriate patients for measles vaccination
                                                      • Apply patient counseling techniques regarding vaccine education

                                                      1. How long is a patient with measles contagious?
                                                      A. 2 days before until 2 days after rash appears
                                                      B. 4 days before until 4 days after rash appears
                                                      C. 6 days before until 6 days after rash appears

                                                      *

                                                      2. Which individual is at greatest risk for developing complications from measles?
                                                      A. A 2-year-old child
                                                      B. A 6-year-old child
                                                      C. A 15-year-old adolescent

                                                      *

                                                      3. A 48-year-old woman with unknown vaccination status is exposed to measles. She is not pregnant or severely immunocompromised. Which of the following may be administered within 72 hours to minimize symptoms and hasten recovery?
                                                      A. Immunoglobulin
                                                      B. Vitamin A
                                                      C. MMR

                                                      *

                                                      4. The patient from the previous question does not obtain the first line agent during the 72-hour window. What is her next option?
                                                      A. Immunoglobulin
                                                      B. Vitamin A
                                                      C. MMR

                                                      *

                                                      5. An 18-year-old college student approaches the pharmacy counter to ask about MMR vaccination. He is preparing to begin his freshman year in a dorm, but he can’t find his childhood immunization records. He does not have the financial resources to obtain laboratory confirmation of immunity. What should the pharmacist tell him?
                                                      A. Administration of MMR at age 18 is fine if his immunity status is unknown
                                                      B. Administration of MMR at age 18 is not appropriate because he is too old
                                                      C. The student should keep looking; his records must be somewhere

                                                      *

                                                      6. A man without measles immunity is preparing to travel outside the U.S. His flight departs in 12 weeks. The pharmacist administers MMR today. When should the second dose be administered?
                                                      A. Only 1 dose should be administered prior to travel
                                                      B. After 28 days
                                                      C. After 90 days

                                                      *

                                                      7. An 11-month-old child presents with her parent at the pharmacy for measles vaccination due to a community outbreak. The parent is willing to vaccinate and prefers MMRV so that the child is also protected from varicella. What should the pharmacist tell the parent?
                                                      A. No problem, MMRV can be administered today with no problem
                                                      B. MMRV should not be administered because measles vaccination due to an outbreak is not appropriate for a child less than 12 months old
                                                      C. MMRV should not be administered because the child is too young, however, MMR is appropriate for a community outbreak and may be administered today

                                                      *

                                                      8. A patient is overheard saying that exposure to infections is more beneficial than vaccinations. He says his grandchildren are unnecessarily exposed to “who knows what” in their vaccines and they would be better off just contracting the disease.
                                                      How could the pharmacist address his vaccine hesitancy?

                                                      A. Give him educational material regarding vaccine safety and effectiveness
                                                      B. Actively listen to his concerns and engage with empathy and education
                                                      C. Ignore him; he will never change his mind

                                                      Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

                                                      SPOTTED: MEASLES CASES RISING IN THE U.S.
                                                      25-060 T
                                                      Pharmacy technician post-test

                                                      Pharmacy Technician Learning Objectives
                                                      After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to
                                                      • Identify the symptoms of measles, its transmission, and patients at higher risk for complications
                                                      • Describe the steps healthcare providers should take if measles is suspected or confirmed
                                                      • Determine which patients might need vaccine education from the pharmacist

                                                      1. When was the first measles vaccine available in the U.S.?
                                                      A. 1962
                                                      B. 1963
                                                      C. 1967

                                                      *

                                                      2. Which individual is at greatest risk for developing complications from measles?
                                                      A. A 2-year-old child
                                                      B. A 6-year-old child
                                                      C. A 15-year-old adolescent

                                                      *

                                                      3. When does the rash from measles appear?
                                                      A. Immediately after exposure
                                                      B. 2 to 4 days after exposure
                                                      C. 11 to 12 days after exposure

                                                      *

                                                      4. How long should a patient isolate after the rash appears?
                                                      A. 2 days
                                                      B. 4 days
                                                      C. 6 days

                                                      *

                                                      5. Which organization collects and analyzes the measles data from local health departments?
                                                      A. The American Academy of Pediatrics
                                                      B. The World Health Organization
                                                      C. National Notifiable Diseases Surveillance System

                                                      *

                                                      6. A patient asks where he can find vitamin A supplements. He heard that it is good for measles and wants to take some just in case he is exposed. How should the technician address this?
                                                      A. Direct him towards the aisle of supplements; good news, vitamins are on sale this week
                                                      B. Refer him to the pharmacist for education regarding measles treatment and supportive care
                                                      C. Ask him if he’s had a fever or rash recently

                                                      *

                                                      7. Which individual would be most likely to benefit from MMR/MMRV education?
                                                      A. 80-year-old woman purchasing acetaminophen
                                                      B. 75-year-old man picking up his prescription for lisinopril
                                                      C. Parent picking up amoxicillin for a 4-year old’s ear infection

                                                      *

                                                      8. A patient at the pharmacy counter is complaining about routine vaccinations. He tells another patient that vaccines are a conspiracy, and he will never vaccinate his children. How could this be addressed?
                                                      A. Pharmacy staff should discretely attach educational vaccine information to his receipt
                                                      B. It should be ignored; there is no point in arguing
                                                      C. Engaging with empathy and education may be effective

                                                      References

                                                      Full List of References

                                                      References

                                                         
                                                        1. Kimberlin DW, Banerjee R, Barnett E, Lynfield R, Sawyer M. Measles in Red Book: 2024–2027 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. 33rd ed. American Academy of Pediatrics; 2024. Accessed August 29, 2025. https://doi.org/10.1542/9781610027373-S3_012_002

                                                        2. Moss WJ, Griffin DE. What's going on with measles?. J Virol. 2024;98(8):e0075824. doi:10.1128/jvi.00758-24

                                                        3. Manual for the Surveillance of Vaccine-Preventable Diseases. Chapter 7: Measles. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Accessed August 12, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/surv-manual/php/table-of-contents/chapter-7-measles.html

                                                        4. Measles Vaccine. American Academy of Pediatrics. Accessed August 17, 2025. https://www.aap.org/en/patient-care/measles/measles-vaccine/?_gl=1*uk5qr9*_ga*MzgyNDg1Njk2LjE3NTUwMjgxOTY.*_ga_FD9D3XZVQQ*czE3NTUwMjgxOTUkbzEkZzEkdDE3NTUwMjgyNjYkajU3JGwwJGgw

                                                        5. Parums DV. A Review of the Resurgence of Measles, a Vaccine-Preventable Disease, as Current Concerns Contrast with Past Hopes for Measles Elimination. Med Sci Monit. 2024;30:e944436. Published 2024 Mar 13. doi:10.12659/MSM.944436

                                                        6. Hendriks J, Blume S. Measles vaccination before the measles-mumps-rubella vaccine. Am J Public Health. 2013;103(8):1393-1401. doi:10.2105/AJPH.2012.301075

                                                        7. Gastanaduy P, Haber P, Rota P, Patel M. Chapter 13: Measles. Centers for Disease Control Epidemiology and Prevention of Vaccine-Preventable Diseases. Accessed August 19, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/pinkbook/hcp/table-of-contents/chapter-13-measles.html

                                                        8. Red Book Online Outbreaks: Measles. American Academy of Pediatrics. Accessed August 12, 2025. https://publications.aap.org/redbook/resources/15187/Red-Book-Online-Outbreaks-Measles?autologincheck=redirected

                                                        9. Measles vaccines: WHO position paper – April 2017. World Health Organization Weekly epidemiological record. 2017;(92):205–228. Accessed August 28, 2025. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/who-wer9217-205-227

                                                        10. Diwan MN, Samad S, Mushtaq R, et al. Measles Induced Encephalitis: Recent Interventions to Overcome the Obstacles Encountered in the Management Amidst the COVID-19 Pandemic. Diseases. 2022;10(4):104. Published 2022 Nov 17. doi:10.3390/diseases10040104

                                                        11. Laboratory Testing for Measles. Centers for Disease Control: Measles. Accessed September 16, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/measles/php/laboratories/index.html

                                                        12. Measles: for public health professionals. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Accessed August 15, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/measles/php/guidance/index.html

                                                        13. National Notifiable Diseases Surveillance System. Centers for Disease Control. Accessed September 7, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/nndss/docs/NNDSS-Overview-Fact-Sheet-508.pdf

                                                        14. Measles Vaccine Recommendations: Information for Healthcare Professionals. Centers for Disease Control. Accessed September 11, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/measles/hcp/vaccine-considerations/index.html#cdc_generic_section_5-post-exposure-prophylaxis-for-measles

                                                        15. Call to Action: Vitamin A for the Management of Measles in the United States. National Foundation for Infectious Diseases. Accessed August 15, 2025. https://www.nfid.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Call-to-Action-Vitamin-A-for-the-Management-of-Measles-in-the-US-FINAL.pdf

                                                        16. Clinical Overview of Measles. Centers for Disease Control. Accessed August 27, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/measles/hcp/clinical-overview/index.html

                                                        17. Institute of Medicine (US) Panel on Micronutrients. Dietary Reference Intakes for Vitamin A, Vitamin K, Arsenic, Boron, Chromium, Copper, Iodine, Iron, Manganese, Molybdenum, Nickel, Silicon, Vanadium, and Zinc. Washington (DC): National Academies Press (US); 2001. Accessed September 19, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK222310/ doi: 10.17226/10026

                                                        18. M-M-R II. Prescribing information. Merck & Co., Inc.; 1978-2024. Accessed August 15, 2025.https://www.merck.com/product/usa/pi_circulars/m/mmr_ii/mmr_ii_pi.pdf

                                                        19. Priorix. Prescribing information. GlaxoSmithKline; 2024. Accessed August 15, 2025. Available at https://gskpro.com/content/dam/global/hcpportal/en_US/Prescribing_Information/Priorix/pdf/PRIORIX.PDF

                                                        20. ProQuad. Prescribing information. Merck & Co., Inc.; 2005-2024. Accessed August 15, 2025. https://www.merck.com/product/usa/pi_circulars/p/proquad/proquad_pi.pdf

                                                        21. Routine Measles, Mumps, and Rubella Vaccination. Centers for Disease Control. Accessed August 12, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/vaccines/vpd/mmr/hcp/recommendations.html

                                                        22. ACIP Recommends Standalone Chickenpox Vaccination in Toddlers. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Accessed September 19, 2025. https://www.hhs.gov/press-room/acip-recommends-chickenpox-vaccine-for-toddlers.html
                                                        23. MMR & Varicella Vaccines or MMRV Vaccine: Discussing Options with Parents. Centers for Disease Control: Vaccines and Immunizations. Accessed September 9, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/vaccines/vpd/mmr/hcp/vacopt-factsheet-hcp.html

                                                        24. Galagali PM, Kinikar AA, Kumar VS. Vaccine Hesitancy: Obstacles and Challenges. Curr Pediatr Rep. 2022;10(4):241-248. doi:10.1007/s40124-022-00278-9

                                                        25. Dubé E, Laberge C, Guay M, Bramadat P, Roy R, Bettinger J. Vaccine hesitancy: an overview. Hum Vaccin Immunother. 2013;9(8):1763-1773. doi:10.4161/hv.24657

                                                        26. World Health Organization. Summary WHO SAGE conclusions and recommendations on vaccine hesitancy. 2015. Accessed August 18, 2025. https://cdn.who.int/media/docs/default-source/immunization/demand/summary-of-sage-vaccinehesitancy-en.pdf

                                                        27. Novilla MLB, Goates MC, Redelfs AH, et al. Why Parents Say No to Having Their Children Vaccinated against Measles: A Systematic Review of the Social Determinants of Parental Perceptions on MMR Vaccine Hesitancy. Vaccines (Basel). 2023;11(5):926. Published 2023 May 2. doi:10.3390/vaccines11050926

                                                        28. Biggs AT, Littlejohn LF. Vaccination and natural immunity: Advantages and risks as a matter of public health policy. Lancet Reg Health Am. 2022;8:100242. doi:10.1016/j.lana.2022.100242

                                                        29. Houle SKD, Andrew MK. RSV vaccination in older adults: Addressing vaccine hesitancy using the 3C model. Can Pharm J (Ott). 2023;157(1):39-44. Published 2023 Nov 24. doi:10.1177/17151635231210879

                                                        30. MacDonald NE, SAGE Working Group on Vaccine Hesitancy Vaccine hesitancy: definition, scope and determinants. Vaccine. 2015;33(34):4161–4164. doi: 10.1016/j.vaccine.2015.04.036

                                                        31. Shen AK, Tan ASL. Trust, influence, and community: Why pharmacists and pharmacies are central for addressing vaccine hesitancy. J Am Pharm Assoc (2003). 2022;62(1):305-308. doi:10.1016/j.japh.2021.10.

                                                        LAW: Orange, Purple, Green Books: Learning Generics’ True Colors

                                                        Learning Objectives

                                                         

                                                        After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to:

                                                        • Review the regulatory timeline of generic drugs in the United States
                                                        • Define the regulatory and scientific criteria for therapeutic equivalence, including bioequivalence and pharmaceutical equivalence, as established by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
                                                        • Differentiate between brand-name, generic, and authorized generic drug products, identifying key differences in composition, cost, and approval pathways
                                                        • Discuss the clinical implications of switching between drug products, especially those with a narrow therapeutic index (NTI)
                                                        • Apply state-specific laws and the FDA's "Orange Book" and “Purple Book” to make appropriate and legally sound generic substitutions

                                                         

                                                          Pharmacist, with a finger on their chin, in an aisle of medications holding two prescription bottles.

                                                           

                                                          Release Date: December 15, 2025

                                                          Expiration Date: December 15, 2028

                                                          Course Fee

                                                          Pharmacists   $7

                                                          Pharmacy Technicians   $4

                                                          There is no funding for this CE.

                                                          ACPE UANs

                                                          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-074-H03-P

                                                          Pharmacy Technician:  0009-0000-25-074-H03-T

                                                          Session Codes

                                                          Pharmacist: 25YC74-GPW21

                                                          Pharmacy Technician: 25YC74-WGP12

                                                          Accreditation Hours

                                                          2.0 hours of CE

                                                          Accreditation Statements

                                                          The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-074-H03-P/T will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                                                           

                                                          Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                                                          The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                                                          Faculty

                                                          Jack Vinciguerra, PharmD
                                                          Freelance Medical Writer
                                                          East Hartford, CT

                                                           

                                                          Faculty Disclosure

                                                          In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                                                          Jack Vinciguerra has no relationships with ineligible companies.

                                                           

                                                          ABSTRACT

                                                          Generic drug interchangeability is a key factor when verifying a prescription. Generic medications are essential in the modern American healthcare system, impacting patient care, medication access, and healthcare costs. However, this wasn’t always the case. Contributions over the past two centuries—including the publication of the first National Formulary in 1888, the development of early pharmaceutical standards by the pivotal 1938 Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act, and the transformative 1984 Hatch-Waxman Act—have shaped today's definition of generic drugs. Over time, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has worked to strengthen and clarify the criteria for therapeutic equivalence, ensuring that generic drugs perform exactly like their brand-name counterparts. Additionally, specific approval pathways are established for brand-name drugs, standard generics, and authorized generics to ensure safety and market considerations are properly evaluated. The clinical implications of drug switching are emphasized, especially for narrow therapeutic index medications, where subtle variations require strict oversight. The practical application of the FDA's "Orange Book" for small-molecule generics and the "Purple Book" for biosimilars can help pharmacists make informed and legally sound substitutions that balance affordability, quality, and safety.

                                                          CONTENT

                                                          Content

                                                          INTRODUCTION

                                                          In modern pharmacy practice, the concept of generic drug interchangeability is crucial for patient care, medication accessibility, and healthcare expenses. Since pharmacists fill approximately 90% of prescriptions with generic drugs and biosimilars, they are essential in handling substitution challenges and ensuring therapeutic equivalence.1 Cost savings remain a primary motivation for switching to generics, which are among the few ways the United States (U.S.) healthcare system reduces overall spending.1 Nevertheless, safety must never be sacrificed for savings. Pharmacy employees and healthcare providers must understand the regulations, bioequivalence criteria, and clinical considerations related to interchangeable drugs, particularly when managing medications with narrow therapeutic indices.

                                                           

                                                          THE GENERIC DRUG TIMELINE

                                                          The history of the generic drug industry is marked by challenges and controversies from its inception to the present day. Over the years, scrutiny and doubt have shaped what we recognize as generic drugs now.

                                                           

                                                          So, what is a generic drug?

                                                           

                                                          The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) defines a generic drug as a medication that is identical to a previously marketed brand-name drug in terms of dosage form, intended use, performance, quality, route of administration, safety, and strength. It functions exactly like the brand-name drug and offers the same clinical benefits, making it an equivalent substitute.2 However, brand-name and generic drugs have minor differences, discussed later.

                                                           

                                                          In 1888, the American Pharmaceutical Association (now called the American Pharmacists Association, or APhA) published the first National Formulary (NF) to support the U.S. Pharmacopoeia (USP). The NF sets official standards for commonly used pharmaceutical preparations to help prevent counterfeit branded products.3 While not initially a legally recognized official document, it laid the foundation for the Roosevelt administration's passage of the Federal Pure Food and Drugs Act in 1906.4 This law banned adulterated or misbranded food and drugs for humans or animals, and allowed the government to hold companies accountable if a product caused serious harm. It also required drugs to meet standards of purity, quality, and potency established by the USP or NF—standards maintained by the FDA, formerly known as the Bureau of Chemistry.5

                                                           

                                                          By the 1930s, the significant flaws in the Pure Food and Drug Act had become increasingly evident. Ingredient lists on products were optional, drug factory inspections lacked standardization, and there were no laws preventing unsafe products from reaching consumers. At that point, manufacturers could market and advertise drugs without substantial evidence of safety or effectiveness.5 Desperate to inform the public, the FDA compiled a collection of dangerous products legally available at the time. This exhibit, later called “The Chamber of Horrors,” debuted at the 1933 World’s Fair in Chicago and featured5,6

                                                          • Lash Lure, a popular cosmetic eyelash and eyebrow enhancer for women sold in many beauty salons, resulting in permanent blindness and disfigurement
                                                          • X-rays of children’s esophagi after ingesting candy with embedded trinkets, including coins, rings, or small lead toys*
                                                          • The Diana Ideal Womb Supporter, which could puncture the uterus if inserted incorrectly

                                                          *Table 1 describes the FDA’s stance on popular global treats.

                                                           

                                                          Table 1. Surprise! FDA Cracks Down on Popular Treats7

                                                          Kinder Surprise Cracker Jack
                                                          FDA STATUS Banned in U.S. Legal in U.S.
                                                          Why it’s banned/legal Toy inside the chocolate egg violates FDCA, prohibits non-nutritive objects from being embedded in food.** Toy packaged separately from food in the original box. FDA considers this “commingling,” not embedding, therefore is not a violation of the FDCA.
                                                          Safety Concern The toy being directly inside the chocolate is considered a significant choking hazard for young children. The FDA deems this to be safe because the toy is distinctly separate from the food itself.
                                                          ABBREVIATIONS: FDA, Food and Drug Administration; U.S., United States; FDCA, Food, Drug, and Cosmetics Act

                                                          **In 2017, the U.S. version of Kinder Surprise, Kinder Joy, hit the market, consisting of an egg-shaped package that splits into two halves–one with chocolate, one with a small toy.

                                                           

                                                          The critical watershed event occurred in October 1937.8 Earlier that year, scientists at the Pasteur Institute in France recognized sulfanilamide as a miracle drug for the treatment of streptococcal infections. Since the antibiotic was originally synthesized in 1908 and was no longer under patent (the legal right to be the sole producer or seller of a product), multiple pharmaceutical companies rushed to market it. One such company was S.E. Massengill. Their sales team noticed that sore throats, especially in children, were a common symptom of streptococcal infections. Seeing an opportunity, the company developed the first liquid form of the antibiotic, Elixir Sulfanilamide. They distributed 240 gallons of this mixture, containing 10% sulfanilamide, 16% water, and 72% diethylene glycol, across the U.S. without conducting toxicity tests. Of the 353 patients who used it, 105 died from acute kidney failure caused by diethylene glycol-induced proximal tubular necrosis.8 The FDA initiated a nationwide recall of any remaining Elixir Sulfanilamide. The government charged S.E. Massengill with selling a misbranded drug in interstate commerce. The elixir, not because of its toxic constituents, but because it lacked the required alcohol vehicle, was classified as illegal under current laws.5

                                                           

                                                          Following arguably the most impactful mass poisonings of the 20th Century, Congress enacted the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (FDCA) in June 1938. This law was a significant step forward in consumer protection and laid the groundwork for many of the public health improvements we see today. Under the FDCA, the FDA is tasked with several responsibilities9:

                                                          • Mandating drug manufacturers to submit safety data before marketing
                                                          • Setting quality standards for food, drugs, medical devices, and cosmetics
                                                          • Inspecting manufacturing and storage facilities
                                                          • Regulating labeling and claims for foods and dietary supplements
                                                          • Approving new drugs, medical devices, food, or color additives

                                                           

                                                          While the FDCA significantly strengthened drug regulation in the U.S., it also created a new issue. Once a patent on a pioneering or brand-name drug expired, other companies could produce identical versions without needing to undergo the FDA’s strict safety and efficacy testing. These derivative (or generic) products, which vary in quality, then entered the market.4

                                                           

                                                          Table 2 describes two significant amendments to the FDCA. Both continued the push towards stricter manufacturing expectations and categorical designations to achieve safe and effective administration of pharmaceuticals.10,11

                                                           

                                                          Table 2. Amendments to the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act4,10,11

                                                          Name of Amendment Accomplishments Downfalls
                                                          Durham-Humphrey Amendment of 1951 ·       Created distinction of legend vs OTC pharmaceuticals

                                                          ·       Developed procedures for written, oral, and refilled prescriptions

                                                          ·       Anti-substitution legislation often required pharmacists to dispense either the branded drug or a generic drug from a specific manufacturer, decreasing substitution of low-quality generics

                                                          ·       Adequate manufacturers of generic products had limited opportunity due to anti-substitution laws and the public’s increased skepticism of generic drug quality

                                                          ·       Legend drugs now requiring a prescription from a licensed provider drastically cut the pharmacist’s role in selecting the most appropriate therapeutic option

                                                          Kefauver-Harris Amendments (1962) ·       FDA now granted authority to require proof of efficacy in addition to safety before approval of a new drug

                                                          ·       A retrospective review of all drugs approved between 1938 and 1962 that let to nearly 600 ineffective medicines pulled off the market

                                                          ·       New burden of evidence increased the cost and length of drug development, leading to a significant drug lag

                                                          ·       Indirectly led to the extension of drug patents in the Hatch-Waxman Act of 1984

                                                          ABBREVIATIONS: OTC = over-the-counter; FDA = Food and Drug Administration

                                                           

                                                          Under the Kefauver-Harris Amendments, the requirements for new drug applications (NDA) diminished incentives to develop new generics. Generic manufacturers became frustrated because they had to invest considerable time and money in safety and efficacy studies that had already been completed for the brand-name drugs they sought to replicate. By 1983, only 35% of the top-selling branded medications with expired patents faced generic competition. Furthermore, pharmacists could only dispense a generic drug if it was explicitly prescribed.11

                                                           

                                                          The Generic Drug Boom

                                                          The Drug Price Competition and Patent Term Restoration Act of 1984, known as the Hatch-Waxman Act (H-WA), transformed the generic drug industry.12 It sped up the approval process for generic drugs, establishing an Abbreviated NDA (ANDA) based solely on bioequivalence to the reference listed drug (brand-name). Once the FDA recognizes these generics as therapeutically equivalent, healthcare providers can regularly substitute them for prescriptions. It also allowed manufacturers to start testing before the brand’s patent expired, and the first successful ANDA filing would receive 180 days of market exclusivity after patent expiration. The H-WA also benefited and continues to help brand manufacturers by restoring patent time lost due to FDA testing, with a maximum extension of five years. Additionally, brand-name firms received three years of exclusivity for improvements resulting from clinical trials, such as new dosage forms, drug release methods, or dosage regimens. For example, Ambien CR (zolpidem tartrate extended-release tablets), was a widely used medication for insomnia. Its manufacturer updated Ambien’s immediate release mechanism by designing a dual-layered tablet where 50% of the drug releases immediately to help induce sleep, and the other 50% releases slowly to help maintain sleep.12

                                                           

                                                          The H-WA immediately led to high financial risks, intense competition, and, unfortunately, widespread fraud.12 On the day the H-WA took effect, regulatory affairs members from Bolar Pharmaceuticals drove to the FDA headquarters and hand-delivered 40 ANDAs in an effort to secure the 180-day market exclusivity granted to the first successful generic drug applicant. Upon reviewing the submissions, the FDA discovered that all of Bolar’s submissions were fraudulent, having been fabricated solely to be the first company to file.12

                                                           

                                                          The five years following the enactment of the H-WA became known as the "Generic Drug Scandal." An investigation by a government subcommittee revealed widespread bribery and numerous instances of fraudulent data submissions to the FDA. Only about six of 39 generic drug companies investigated avoided criminal or regulatory penalties.12 Public confidence in generic drugs dropped sharply, with a 1989 Gallup poll showing 51% of Americans doubted that generics met the same manufacturing standards as brand-name drugs. Recognizing the need for decisive action, the FDA responded with a series of reforms, including12

                                                          • Enactment of the Generic Drug Enforcement Act, allowing the FDA to take legal action against individuals or companies that violate FDA regulations
                                                          • Release of a comprehensive product analysis report reviewing 2500 samples from the 30 most prescribed generic drugs; less than 1% failed to meet standards
                                                          • Development of a strong application queue system within the Office of Generic Drugs, which included a pre-approval inspection process to verify the accuracy of data submitted with applications
                                                          • Requirement for all ANDAs to be complete upon submission. Drug manufacturers can no longer modify incomplete applications with additional data after they are filed

                                                           

                                                          In the 21st Century, generic medications have remained a key part of the U.S. healthcare system. Congress has enacted several acts and amendments over the past 25 years to support and sustain the generic drug pathway (see Table 3). The FDA continues to promote the development of generic drugs by releasing a biannual list of drugs that have been off-patent for more than a year and have no generic competitors, and by establishing an expedited pathway for drugs designated as competitive generic therapies. This list can be found on the FDA’s website under “List of Off-Patent, Off-Exclusivity Drugs without an Approved Generic.”13

                                                           

                                                          Table 3. Notable Updates to Generic Drug Regulations in the 21st Century13,14,15

                                                          YEAR NAME OF LEGISLATION PURPOSE
                                                          2003 Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act Addressed loopholes used by brand-name companies to delay generic approval during patent litigation.
                                                          2009 Biologics Price Competition and Innovation Act Developed the approval pathway for biosimilars (generic versions of complex biologic drugs) and appropriate “highly similar” standards because biologics cannot be perfectly replicated.
                                                          2012 Generic Drug User Fee Amendments Requires generic drug companies to pay annual fees to expedite the FDAs review of generic applications.

                                                           

                                                          PAUSE AND PONDER: Given the historical context of drug regulation, how do you think public perception and trust in generic drugs today are influenced by past events like the Elixir Sulfanilamide tragedy or the Generic Drug Scandal, even with robust current regulations?

                                                           

                                                          Approval Pathway of Drugs

                                                          Transforming a molecular compound into a well-known drug involves an extensive, expensive, and risky process. Usually, it takes 10 to 15 years and costs about $1 to $2 billion to approve a new drug, depending on the therapeutic area. Between 2010 and 2017, clinical trial data indicated a 90% failure rate among drug candidates that progressed to phase 1 testing. Including failed candidates in preclinical stages, the failure rate would be even higher.16

                                                           

                                                          The initial stage of drug development is the preclinical phase. During this stage, a pharmaceutical company or research institution must demonstrate to the FDA that the drug candidate is reasonably safe for human trials.17 This involves a combination of in vitro (within a test tube or glass) and in vivo (within a living organism) studies that must establish six essential components18:

                                                          1. Creation of drug substance/active pharmaceutical ingredient
                                                          2. Dosage design (formulation)
                                                          3. Analytical and bioanalytical method development and validation
                                                          4. Metabolism and pharmacokinetics (PK)
                                                          5. Toxicology and pharmacologic safety
                                                          6. Current Good Manufacturing Practice (cGMP) and documentation of the drug candidate for use in clinical trials

                                                           

                                                          At this point, a drug developer can submit an Investigational New Drug (IND) application to the FDA, which includes data from preclinical animal tests and the plan for human trials. The FDA and a local institutional review board (IRB)—comprising scientists and healthcare professionals from different institutions and hospitals involved in clinical research—review the application.17 An IRB must also approve a clinical trial protocol that includes17

                                                          • The study’s objectives and length
                                                          • Description of eligible trial participants
                                                          • Schedule of tests and procedures
                                                          • Medications and dosages used
                                                          • Participant consent

                                                           

                                                          The clinical studies portion of drug development consists of four phases.19

                                                           

                                                          Phase 1 focuses on the pharmacology and toxicity of the drug candidate. Absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion data help determine a safe and tolerable dose range for later trials. These trials typically involve small groups of subjects, often fewer than 20 healthy volunteers. Phase 1 is usually the shortest, lasting between nine and 18 months.19

                                                           

                                                          Phase 2 evaluates the safety and effectiveness of the investigational drug. The clinical trials aim to determine how well the drug treats the target condition, helping to establish dosing regimens or parameters for future research. During this phase, the participant pool expands to hundreds of individuals with the condition under study, enabling the identification of other target populations and potential drug interactions. Typical studies at this stage are often blinded, randomized, controlled trials with specific inclusion and exclusion criteria. These studies usually last from one to three years.19

                                                           

                                                          Phase 3 studies aim to confirm the drug’s therapeutic efficacy and benefit. Common questions considered in Phase 3 studies include19

                                                          • Can a dose-response relationship be established?
                                                          • Can the target population be increased?
                                                          • Can the drug be used at different stages of the disease?
                                                          • Can common side effects and food or drug interactions be identified?

                                                          Phase 3 also includes developing a product label with clear administration instructions. The study sample increases to about 1,000 subjects with the relevant condition, with minimal inclusion or exclusion criteria. This phase can last up to five years.19 Once finished, the drug company can formally submit its NDA to the FDA for approval. The FDA then has 60 days to either file the application for review or mark it incomplete if required data is missing. The Center for Drug Evaluation and Research (CDER) conducts the final NDA review. Under the Prescription Drug User Fee Act, CDER is expected to review and decide on at least 90% of NDAs for standard drugs within 10 months.17 The patent term of the brand drug is 20 years from the date the FDA files the NDA.20

                                                           

                                                          Phase 4 trials are a post-marketing requirement of the FDA.17 These studies often highlight the difference between efficacy (which is a clinical trial’s construct) and effectiveness (which is how the drug performs in the real world). An investigational drug may be efficacious in the controlled environment of a Phase 2 trial, where strict inclusion criteria, constant monitoring, and perfect adherence are maintained. An effective drug performs without all of those guarantees.21 Real-world data collection for a newly approved drug often focuses on19

                                                          • Monitoring the drug safety profile, especially in populations not previously studied
                                                          • Identifying long-term adverse events
                                                          • Optimizing the application of the drug
                                                          • Determining potential contraindications in combination with other drugs or diseases

                                                          Post-approval trials may last up to three years or longer, as determined by the FDA.

                                                           

                                                          After the brand-name patent expires and before a generic drug reaches pharmacy shelves, the FDA must conduct a comprehensive review of the product. Generic manufacturers must adhere to the same cGMP regulations as brand-name drug manufacturers, ensuring consistency, purity, and quality comparable to those of brand-name products across batches. These cGMP guidelines also enforce strict oversight of all manufacturing facilities.22 According to H-WA, approval of generics depends on demonstrating bioequivalence and pharmaceutical equivalence to the brand-name drug. Since generic developers do not need to repeat safety and effectiveness studies already conducted for the original drug, the ANDA was introduced.12 This simplified process means manufacturers only need to scientifically show that their drug performs similarly to the brand-name, without submitting new preclinical and clinical data.23 Table 4  provides a list of the data submission requirements for brand-name and generic drugs.

                                                           

                                                          Table 4. Brand-Name Versus Generic Drug Data Submission Requirements23

                                                          Brand-Name Requirements Generic Requirements
                                                          Chemistry Chemistry
                                                          Manufacturing Manufacturing
                                                          Testing Testing
                                                          Labeling Labeling
                                                          Inspections Inspections
                                                          Animal Studies Bioequivalence
                                                          Clinical Studies
                                                          Bioavailability

                                                           

                                                           

                                                          SIDEBAR: “Can you tell me where my medication is from?”

                                                          If you've ever worked in a community pharmacy, chances are a customer asked about the source of their medication at least once. Although it might seem like a minor or unnecessary question, important reasons may prompt such inquiries.

                                                           

                                                          Katherine Eban’s “Bottle of Lies: The Inside Story of the Generic Drug Boom,” a 2019 New York Times bestseller, reveals the dark side of some overseas generic medication manufacturing practices.

                                                           

                                                          The story follows the journey of an ex-Ranbaxy (a generic drug company in India) employee turned whistleblower as he helps the FDA expose the poor operating standards of his former company. The protagonist witnessed multiple levels of deception and fraud, including24

                                                          • Intentional data falsification and manipulation
                                                          • Using a brand-name product to perform bioequivalence testing and publishing the results as data for the generic drug
                                                          • Unreported variations in generic drug effectiveness between batches
                                                          • Shipping drugs that did not meet the standards of one country to another country with less strict market standards.

                                                           

                                                          Ranbaxy was not the only culprit; this was just the tip of the iceberg. Because the manufacturing sites of these generic drug companies were located on the opposite side of the world, the FDA couldn't investigate and monitor practices as frequently as it would for a company in the U.S. Additionally, the FDA would notify these companies weeks or even months in advance of a visit, giving the companies ample time to conceal their fabricated data and prepare their workers to provide the right lies to the FDA.24

                                                           

                                                          Over time, evidence began to accumulate in the U.S.24 Many pharmacologists, doctors, and healthcare providers began noticing patterns in their patients’ reactions to certain generic drugs. Adverse reactions to generic narrow therapeutic index (NTI) drugs like levothyroxine and phenytoin started to rise. Doctors would try to switch patients to the generic version of their maintenance medication needed for managing chronic conditions, only to see those patients develop hyperthyroidism or experience an immediate uptick in seizures. Drugs with specially designed release profiles also came under scrutiny. Several patient complaints led Ted Cooperman, president of the independent laboratory ConsumerLab, to test Teva’s generic Budeprion XL against GSK’s brand-name Wellbutrin XL. The results were shocking – the generic drug released four times as much active ingredient in the first two hours as the brand-name did.24

                                                           

                                                          Although some justice was achieved when Ranbaxy agreed to pay a $500 million settlement, the largest settlement to date with a generic drug manufacturer, the broader issue was fully revealed.24 When produced properly and in compliance with regulations, generic drugs positively impact medicine worldwide. Unfortunately, a certain level of vigilance is necessary, and pharmacy teams need to consider and report patient concerns when relevant. To stay informed, sign up on the FDA website to receive alerts about recalls, market withdrawals, and safety notices.

                                                           

                                                           

                                                          For a generic drug to be recognized as an adequate and appropriate substitution for a brand-name drug, the FDA formulated a simple equation25:

                                                          Pharmaceutical Equivalence (PE) + Bioequivalence (BE) = Therapeutic Equivalence (TE)

                                                           

                                                          PE is demonstrated between two drug products if all of the following characteristics are identical25

                                                          • Dosage form
                                                          • Route(s) of administration
                                                          • Amount of active drug ingredient
                                                          • Amount of active drug ingredient delivered over a dosing period
                                                          • USP standard of drug identity, strength, quality, and purity

                                                           

                                                          BE is entirely determined by what happens to a drug after it enters the body.26 There is a common misconception that a generic drug must contain 80% to 125% of the active ingredient present in the branded product to be considered bioequivalent. Equal doses of the active ingredient in both the generic and reference drugs must become available at the site of drug action at rates and extents that are not significantly different. The entire 90% confidence interval of PK measures, including area under the curve and peak concentration, must be between 0.80 and 1.25 to achieve BE. Determining BE through PK performance explains why differences in excipient content, color, or shape can occur between the generic and the reference listed drug.26

                                                           

                                                          Only after demonstrating both PE and BE can a generic drug attain TE. As a TE product, the generic drug can then be included in the FDA’s Approved Drug Products with Therapeutic Equivalence Evaluations list, commonly known as the "Orange Book." The generic drug now enjoys complete interchangeability with its brand-name counterpart.25, 27

                                                           

                                                          Fun Fact: The FDA chose an orange cover for the first annual edition of the Approved Drug Products with Therapeutic Equivalence Evaluations List because it was published on Halloween in 1980. This festive choice led to the colloquial name, the "Orange Book," which has remained ever since.28

                                                           

                                                          Authorized Generics

                                                          Imagine this situation: You are the CEO of PharmaZen Labs, a successful (fictitious) pharmaceutical company. Your flagship drug, ZenoLog, a fast-acting insulin, is about to lose its patent. Veta Pharmaceuticals, a generic drug producer, is eagerly waiting for the new year because the FDA has approved its ANDA for insulin-fastpart, the first generic version of ZenoLog. Veta plans to sell insulin-fastpart at a price 10 times lower than ZenoLog during the 180-day exclusivity period. The expected losses for ZenoLog in the upcoming year, due to competition from insulin-fastpart and other anticipated generics entering the market later, are considerable. You call for an urgent all-hands meeting to brainstorm ways to counter the bleak projections from the finance team. The room falls silent, tense and expectant. You glance around, hoping someone will have a solution. Suddenly, a tentative hand rises from a woman in the legal department. She quietly suggests, “What if we made our own generic?”

                                                           

                                                          Congress was unprepared for a loophole in the H-WA: Authorized Generic (AG) drugs. In 1984, the idea that a brand-name company would produce a generic drug to compete with its own brand and first-market generic was unlikely.29 AGs refer to generic medications made by the same manufacturer as the brand-name product. They are identical in composition, shape, and size to the brand-name drug. Oftentimes, AGs and brand-name products are manufactured in the same facility.

                                                           

                                                          In some cases, the AG may have a different marking or color. Standard generic drugs, however, often differ from the brand version in terms of shape, color, size, and inactive ingredients. AGs are a separate category of generics, and the FDA does not require their manufacturers to seek approval through the ANDA pathway because they are marketed under the brand-name NDA.30 Two significant distinctions evolved from this categorical differentiation of generic medicines29,30:

                                                          1. AGs are excluded from the "Orange Book" because they fall under the proprietary NDA.
                                                          2. An AG can directly compete with a standard generic during the 180-day exclusivity period because the law only prohibits other ANDA submissions. There is no restriction on launching identical versions of branded products through NDA supplementation.

                                                           

                                                          In a community pharmacy setting, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians may dispense AGs frequently without realizing it. For example, Pfizer, a leading name in the pharmaceutical industry, developed Viagra in 1998. In 2003, Pfizer acquired Greenstone LLC, making it its generic subsidiary. The Viagra patent expired on December 11, 2017. On that day, Pfizer announced that Greenstone’s AG sildenafil was available alongside generic sildenafil from Teva Pharmaceuticals.31,32

                                                           

                                                          AGs have recently ignited significant debate. In 2013, the Supreme Court recognized the financial significance of the 180-day exclusivity period for generic drug manufacturers, valuing it at hundreds of millions of dollars.33 From a consumer standpoint, the faster a drug's price drops substantially, the better, regardless of the manufacturer. A recent notable example of an AG is Mylan’s epinephrine auto-injector, the first generic of any kind for the EpiPen.33 Public and political outrage over Mylan’s 400% price hike for EpiPen accelerated the company’s decision to bring an affordable alternative to market. Other generic versions soon followed, helping to reduce costs and address supply chain issues often associated with the EpiPen.34

                                                           

                                                          PAUSE AND PONDER: Considering the strategic move by brand-name companies to launch AGs to compete with their own products, what are the potential long-term implications for both generic manufacturers (especially smaller ones) and for overall drug pricing and patient access?

                                                           

                                                          Narrow Therapeutic Index Drugs

                                                          Effective generic drugs have undoubtedly enhanced global healthcare by reducing costs, boosting competition, and increasing access to affordable medicines, thereby improving health outcomes.35 In most cases, TE products achieve their intended clinical effect even with minor variations in PK parameters compared to the brand-name versions. The FDA’s recommended BE range of 80% to 125% is suitable for most drugs, as the gap between the minimum therapeutic concentration and toxic levels is sufficiently large. This ensures the drug remains safe and clinically effective.36

                                                           

                                                          The FDA defines NTIs as drugs with slight differences in dose or measured blood level that may result in therapeutic failure and/or potentially fatal adverse reactions. While the FDA does not maintain a formal list of NTIs, as of January 2024, it has updated the product-specific considerations for 14 active ingredients for prospective generic drug manufacturers (see Table 5).37

                                                           

                                                          Table 5. Examples of Drugs with Narrow Therapeutic Indexes37,38

                                                          DRUG CATEGORY EXAMPLES
                                                          Anticoagulants Warfarin*, Heparin
                                                          Antiepileptics Valproic Acid*, Phenobarbital*, Phenytoin*, Carbamazepine*
                                                          Aminoglycosides Streptomycin, Kanamycin, Netilmicin, Tobramycin, Neomycin
                                                          Immunosuppressants Cyclosporine*, Sirolimus*, Everolimus*, Tacrolimus*, Mycophenolic Acid
                                                          Glycosides Digoxin*
                                                          Mood-stabilizers Lithium carbonate*
                                                          Thyroid Agents Levothyroxine*, Liothyronine*
                                                          Bronchodilator Theophylline*

                                                          *FDA indicated the product as NTI in product-specific consideration provided to generic drug manufacturers

                                                           

                                                          PAUSE AND PONDER: For NTIs, where subtle variations can have significant clinical consequences, how might pharmacists and healthcare providers best navigate the balance between cost savings through generic substitution and ensuring optimal patient safety and efficacy?

                                                           

                                                          BE studies in healthy individuals often show similar average exposure between generic and brand-name drugs, but this does not ensure TE for every patient, especially with sensitive drug classes like antiepileptics or cardiovascular medications. This is crucial because average BE studies, which measure mean differences, may not account for individual patient variability in PK, risking underdosing or overdosing in some cases.39 PK variability within the same patient, rather than the quality of generics themselves, has been identified as a key factor in adverse drug reactions after switching medications.40

                                                           

                                                          Although two generics may be bioequivalent to the brand-name drug, the FDA does not explicitly approve them as interchangeable. For example, variations in excipients—often considered inert—can significantly impact drug bioavailability and cause substantial differences in BE, as seen with alendronate, where certain excipients of a generic product increased bioavailability by 5-fold compared to Fosamax.41 The American Academy of Neurology has also expressed concern about generic substitution in antiepileptic therapy. The organization has recommended prioritizing brand-name treatments and opposing a generic switch without prescriber approval.42 A recent study also pointed out that the nocebo effect (adverse effects that occur just because the patient believes they may occur) can reduce patient adherence when a generic is substituted for a brand-name medication. Patients may feel that the medication is less effective or experience more adverse effects, even if there is no actual pharmacologic difference induced.43,44

                                                           

                                                          The FDA continues to work on mitigating the adverse effects of NTIs. In 2015, they formed the NTI Drug Working Group to develop a consistent approach for NTI classification and transparently address and resolve current issues.37 The Working Group also aims to standardize methodologies for assessing BE, including shrinking the conventional 80% to 125% limits or implementing a scaled average BE approach that adjusts limits based on the reference-listed drug's within-subject variability.45 For example, the BE of levothyroxine has been tightened to 90% to 110% to account and critical dose-response. The FDA has implemented strict updates to cGMP, increasing oversight of excipient selection, formulation stability, and dissolution profiles. This proactive approach helps safeguard patient safety by ensuring that every stage of drug manufacturing—from sourcing raw materials to releasing the final product—adheres to the highest quality control and process validation standards.46 Post-market surveillance and risk management programs designed explicitly for NTIs continuously monitor safety events. Adverse event reporting systems, combined with pharmacoepidemiologic studies and real-world data analysis, track emerging safety concerns or subtherapeutic performance.47 The FDA also often requires a Risk Evaluation and Mitigation Strategies (REMS) program for NTIs, which includes clear and comprehensive product labeling, specialized medication guides, and proactive communication plans for medical emergencies.48

                                                           

                                                          The Orange Book

                                                          The "Orange Book" serves as a comprehensive guide for identifying drug products that the FDA considers therapeutically equivalent. It facilitates the substitution of brand-name medications with their generic counterparts.49 The FDA’s division of Orange Book Publication and Regulatory Assessment within the Office of Generic Drugs updates the text monthly to ensure accurate and up-to-date information.50 This equivalence is confirmed when generic drugs contain the same active ingredients, dosage form, strength, route of administration, and labeling as their brand-name equivalents, eliminating the need for repeated phase 1, 2, and 3 clinical trials. 51 The Orange Book thus supports state laws on generic substitution, allowing pharmacists to dispense therapeutically equivalent generic options, which greatly contributes to cost savings for both consumers and state healthcare systems.52 This approach aligns with public health goals by increasing access to affordable medications while ensuring safety and efficacy.53,54

                                                          Despite its usefulness, relying solely on the Orange Book for interchangeability has limitations, especially in assessing BE for complex drug products and accounting for the diversity of state regulations that may influence substitution practices.55 For example, some states permit therapeutic substitution, where a pharmacist can replace a prescribed drug with a chemically different but therapeutically similar alternative without prior approval. This differs from generic substitution, which requires that the drug be bioequivalent and pharmaceutically equivalent, ensuring the generic performs identically to the brand-name drug in the body.50 The TE ratings listed in the book further illustrate the differences among approved products. The two-letter code associated with the drug product differentiates between TE and PE products. The coding system also indicates if a product has corrected previously identified BE issues. Table 6 provides an in-depth description of the coding system.56

                                                           

                                                          Table 6. TE Coding System56

                                                          RATING DESCRIPTION
                                                          AA Therapeutically equivalent to other therapeutically equivalent products with no history of BE issues
                                                          AB Previous BE issue resolved with adequate in vivo/in vitro data, product is BE to Reference Listed Drug
                                                          AA/AN/AO/AP/AT No in vivo BE issue identified, second letter indicates dosage form (i.e., O = injectable, N = aerosolized solutions/powders)
                                                          B Not therapeutically equivalent to other pharmaceutically equivalent products
                                                          BC/BD/BE/BN/BP/BR/BS/BT/BX/B* Drug products of specific formulation that have unresolved BE issues (i.e., BR: suppositories or enemas for systemic use, B*: drug products requiring further investigation and review)
                                                          NR Not rated (i.e., authorized generics)
                                                          NA Products not reviewed by FDA (i.e., vitamins, supplements)
                                                          Off-market Off-market – includes TE code when product went off the market
                                                          ABBREVIATIONS: BE = bioequivalence; FDA = Food and Drug Administration; TE = therapeutic equivalence

                                                           

                                                          State regulations vary from mandatory substitution laws—where pharmacists must replace a drug with a less expensive generic unless the prescriber specifies otherwise—to permissive laws that allow but do not mandate substitution.57 Some states also include therapeutic substitution policies, broadening the scope beyond bioequivalent generics to incorporate chemically different but clinically similar alternatives when approved by a physician. These diverse legal frameworks highlight the complex landscape of pharmaceutical dispensing, which is often shaped by state-specific views on safety, effectiveness, and cost control.50

                                                           

                                                          The Purple Book

                                                          The Purple Book, officially known as "Lists of Licensed Biological Products with Reference Product Exclusivity and Biosimilarity or Interchangeability Evaluations," operates similarly to the Orange Book but is specific to biologics. It provides guidance on substituting original biologics with their biosimilar and interchangeable biosimilar versions. This is crucial because biologic products, due to their complex manufacturing processes and natural variability, cannot be classified as standard generics like small-molecule drugs.54 Unlike chemically-made small-molecule drugs, biologics come from living organisms, making exact replication impossible and necessitating a different regulatory approach for approval and interchangeability.58 Consequently, the FDA has implemented strict criteria for biosimilarity, requiring comprehensive analytical, animal, and clinical data to demonstrate that a biosimilar is highly similar to the reference product, with no meaningful differences in safety, purity, and potency.59 The Purple Book plays an essential role in promoting the development and accessibility of more affordable biologic products by identifying those that meet these high standards for biosimilarity and interchangeability.60 This extensive resource supports healthcare providers and patients in making informed choices about biologic substitutions, intending to foster market competition and reduce healthcare costs for expensive biological therapies, which have historically lacked generic alternatives.

                                                           

                                                          CONCLUSION

                                                          The journey of generic drugs, from initial regulatory challenges to their current indispensable role, underscores a continuous effort to balance medication accessibility, cost-effectiveness, and patient safety in healthcare.1,4 We've seen how pivotal events, such as the Elixir Sulfanilamide tragedy and the subsequent FDCA of 1938, laid the foundation for robust drug regulation, which was further refined by amendments like the Durham-Humphrey and Kefauver-Harris Acts.5,10,11

                                                           

                                                          The landscape of generic drug approval was dramatically reshaped by the H-WA of 1984, which streamlined the ANDA process and significantly boosted generic competition.12 While this led to an initial "generic drug boom," it also highlighted the need for stringent oversight, prompting reforms like the Generic Drug Enforcement Act following the Generic Drug Scandal.12

                                                           

                                                          Crucially, the concept of TE, established through PE and BE, ensures that generic drugs perform identically to their brand-name counterparts, providing the same clinical benefits.2, 25 Resources like the Orange Book for small-molecule drugs and the Purple Book for biologics are essential guides for identifying therapeutically equivalent products, facilitating safe and effective substitutions.49, 60 However, the complexities associated with NTI drugs and the emergence of AGs demonstrate that vigilance and continuous regulatory adaptation are paramount to maintaining public trust and optimizing patient outcomes.29,36

                                                           

                                                          As approximately 90% of prescriptions are filled with generics and biosimilars, pharmacists, pharmacy technicians, and healthcare providers play a critical role in navigating these complexities.1 The ongoing evolution of regulations, particularly around NTIs and biosimilars, reflects the commitment to ensuring that cost savings do not compromise the safety and efficacy of essential medications. Ultimately, the robust regulatory framework surrounding generic drugs aims to provide patients with access to affordable, high-quality treatments, reinforcing their status as a cornerstone of modern healthcare.

                                                           

                                                          Finally, readers may be wondering about the Green Book, referenced in the title. The Green Book is the FDA’s List of Approved Animal Drug Products!

                                                          Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

                                                          LAW: Orange, Purple, Green Books: Learning Generics' True Colors
                                                          25-074 Pharmacist Post-test

                                                          After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to
                                                          • Review the regulatory timeline of generic drugs in the United States.
                                                          • Define the regulatory and scientific criteria for therapeutic equivalence, including bioequivalence and pharmaceutical equivalence, as established by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).
                                                          • Differentiate between brand-name, generic, and authorized generic drug products, identifying key differences in composition, cost, and approval pathways.
                                                          • Discuss the clinical implications of switching between drug products, especially those with a narrow therapeutic index (NTI).
                                                          • Apply state-specific laws and the FDA's "Orange Book" and “Purple Book” to make appropriate and legally sound generic substitutions.

                                                          1. Pharmacists are discussing the historical context of drug regulation with a new intern. They mention a pivotal event in 1937 that led to the enactment of the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act in 1938. What was this event, and what was its primary impact on drug regulation?
                                                          A. The publication of the first National Formulary, which banned manufacturers from selling adulterated products.
                                                          B. The Elixir Sulfanilamide tragedy, which mandated drug manufacturers to submit safety data before marketing.
                                                          C. The "Chamber of Horrors" exhibit, which led to the creation of over-the-counter drug classifications.

                                                          *

                                                          2. Following the Generic Drug Scandal in the late 1980s, public confidence in generic drugs significantly declined. To address this, the FDA implemented several reforms. Which of the following was a key reform aimed at restoring trust and ensuring drug quality?
                                                          A. Creating the "Orange Book" to assess therapeutic equivalence and guide recommended substitutions.
                                                          B. Enacting the Generic Drug Enforcement Act, allowing legal action against companies violating regulations.
                                                          C. Requiring all new drugs to undergo extensive clinical trials in three phases, including generics.

                                                          *

                                                          3. A pharmacist is evaluating two drug products that both contain 10 mg of atorvastatin calcium, are in tablet form, and are administered orally. To determine if these two products are pharmaceutically equivalent, what additional characteristic must be identical?
                                                          A. The bioavailability of the active ingredient.
                                                          B. The rate and extent to which the active ingredient is absorbed into the bloodstream.
                                                          C. The compendial standard of drug identity, strength, quality, and purity.

                                                          *

                                                          4. The FDA has just approved a new generic version of a commonly prescribed antidepressant. For this generic to be considered bioequivalent to the brand-name product, what are the primary measures that must fall within the 80% to 125% range relative to the reference drug?
                                                          A. Physical measures like the size and the color of the tablet.
                                                          B. Maximal drug potency and receptor occupancy.
                                                          C. AUC and peak concentration of active drug in the body.

                                                          *

                                                          5. A brand-name pharmaceutical company's patent for its blockbuster drug has expired. To maintain market share, the company decides to release an "Authorized Generic" version of its own drug. How does this AG differ from a standard generic in terms of its approval pathway?
                                                          A. The AG must undergo a complete Abbreviated New Drug Application process like a standard generic.
                                                          B. The AG is marketed under the brand-name drug's existing New Drug Application and does not require a separate ANDA.
                                                          C. The AG completes the AG-Mini Application and is directly listed in the "Orange Book" with an 'AB' rating.

                                                          *

                                                          6. During a pharmacy consultation, a patient is excited to learn that the expensive brand-name medication she has taken for years now has a standard generic option available. The patient is concerned that if the pill looks different, it cannot be the same medication. How should a pharmacist explain the difference between brand-name and standard generic medications in terms of appearance and inactive ingredients?
                                                          A. Tell the patient not to worry; standard generics must be identical in shape, color, and inactive ingredients to the brand-name drug for bioequivalence.
                                                          B. Explain to the patient that standard generics often vary in shape, color, and inactive ingredients from the brand but still maintain therapeutic equivalence.
                                                          C. Let the patient know that even if the color and shape might be a little different, you are pretty sure all the ingredients should be the same.

                                                          *

                                                          7. A new generic drug has received 180 days of market exclusivity after being the first successful ANDA filing post-patent expiration. However, a few weeks later, the brand-name company launches its own Authorized Generic. What is the implication of the Authorized Generic's entry during this exclusivity period?
                                                          A. The Authorized Generic can directly compete with the standard generic because the law only prohibits other ANDA submissions.
                                                          B. The Authorized Generic is prohibited from competing during the 180-day exclusivity period while the manufacturer submits an ANDA.
                                                          C. The FDA will immediately revoke the 180-day exclusivity period for the standard generic due to the AG's launch.

                                                          *

                                                          8. A patient with epilepsy who has been stable on Dilantin is switched to a generic phenytoin by their insurance company to reduce costs. Phenytoin is known to be a Narrow Therapeutic Index drug. What is a key clinical consideration for the pharmacist and prescriber in this situation?
                                                          A. The patient may experience a nocebo effect, or even actual therapeutic failure or toxicity due to subtle pharmacokinetic variations.
                                                          B. Minor variations in excipients are always insignificant for NTI drugs, and this patient’s response will eventually even out.
                                                          C. Generic substitution is always safe for NTI drugs because the FDA ensures identical performance of ALL generic drugs.

                                                          *

                                                          9. A pharmacist is trying to find an interchangeable biologic for a patient's prescribed biologic. Which FDA publication should the pharmacist consult for guidance on biosimilars and interchangeable biosimilars?
                                                          A. The Orange Book
                                                          B. The Purple Book
                                                          C. The National Formulary

                                                          *

                                                          10. A pharmacist in a state with "mandatory substitution laws" receives a prescription for a brand-name drug for which therapeutically equivalent generics are available. Unless specifically indicated by the prescriber, what action is the pharmacist legally required to take?
                                                          A. Replace the brand-name drug with a less expensive therapeutically equivalent generic.
                                                          B. Substitute the brand-name drug with a chemically different but therapeutically similar alternative.
                                                          C. Dispense the prescribed brand-name medication because that is what the physician ordered.

                                                          Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

                                                          LAW: Orange, Purple, Green Books: Learning Generics' True Colors
                                                          25-074 Technician Post-test

                                                          After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to
                                                          • Review the regulatory timeline of generic drugs in the United States.
                                                          • Define the regulatory and scientific criteria for therapeutic equivalence, including bioequivalence and pharmaceutical equivalence, as established by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).
                                                          • Differentiate between brand-name, generic, and authorized generic drug products, identifying key differences in composition, cost, and approval pathways.
                                                          • Discuss the clinical implications of switching between drug products, especially those with a narrow therapeutic index (NTI).
                                                          • Apply state-specific laws and the FDA's "Orange Book" and “Purple Book” to make appropriate and legally sound generic substitutions.

                                                          1. Pharmacists are discussing the historical context of drug regulation with a new intern. They mention a pivotal event in 1937 that led to the enactment of the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act in 1938. What was this event, and what was its primary impact on drug regulation?
                                                          A. The publication of the first National Formulary, which banned manufacturers from selling adulterated products.
                                                          B. The Elixir Sulfanilamide tragedy, which mandated drug manufacturers to submit safety data before marketing.
                                                          C. The "Chamber of Horrors" exhibit, which led to the creation of over-the-counter drug classifications.

                                                          *

                                                          2. Following the Generic Drug Scandal in the late 1980s, public confidence in generic drugs significantly declined. To address this, the FDA implemented several reforms. Which of the following was a key reform aimed at restoring trust and ensuring drug quality?
                                                          A. Creating the "Orange Book" to assess therapeutic equivalence and guide recommended substitutions.
                                                          B. Enacting the Generic Drug Enforcement Act, allowing legal action against companies violating regulations.
                                                          C. Requiring all new drugs to undergo extensive clinical trials in three phases, including generics.

                                                          *

                                                          3. A pharmacist is evaluating two drug products that both contain 10 mg of atorvastatin calcium, are in tablet form, and are administered orally. To determine if these two products are pharmaceutically equivalent, what additional characteristic must be identical?
                                                          A. The bioavailability of the active ingredient.
                                                          B. The rate and extent to which the active ingredient is absorbed into the bloodstream.
                                                          C. The compendial standard of drug identity, strength, quality, and purity.

                                                          *

                                                          4. A patient picks up a prescription and notices his generic medication looks identical in shape, size, and color to the brand-name drug he used to take, even though the manufacturer’s name is different. The patient asks the pharmacy technician why this is. What is the most accurate explanation?
                                                          A. This generic is likely an Authorized Generic and is manufactured by the same company as the brand-name drug, often making it identical in appearance.
                                                          B. All generic drugs are required to look exactly like their brand-name counterparts, so this is normal and expected.
                                                          C. The pharmacy received and dispensed a mislabeled product; the patient should return the prescription and report it as required by state law.

                                                          *

                                                          5. A brand-name pharmaceutical company's patent for its blockbuster drug has expired. To maintain market share, the company decides to release an "Authorized Generic" version of its own drug. How does this AG differ from a standard generic in terms of its approval pathway?
                                                          A. The AG must undergo a complete Abbreviated New Drug Application process like a standard generic.
                                                          B. The AG is marketed under the brand-name drug's existing New Drug Application and does not require a separate ANDA.
                                                          C. The AG completes the AG-Mini Application and is directly listed in the "Orange Book" with an 'AB' rating.

                                                          *

                                                          6. During a pharmacy consultation, a patient is excited to learn that the expensive brand-name medication she has taken for years now has a standard generic option available. The patient is concerned that if the pill looks different, it cannot be the same medication. How should a pharmacist explain the difference between brand-name and standard generic medications in terms of appearance and inactive ingredients?
                                                          A. Tell the patient not to worry; standard generics must be identical in shape, color, and inactive ingredients to the brand-name drug for bioequivalence.
                                                          B. Explain to the patient that standard generics often vary in shape, color, and inactive ingredients from the brand but still maintain therapeutic equivalence.
                                                          C. Let the patient know that even if the color and shape might be a little different, you are pretty sure all the ingredients should be the same.

                                                          *

                                                          7. A new generic drug has received 180 days of market exclusivity after being the first successful ANDA filing post-patent expiration. However, a few weeks later, the brand-name company launches its own Authorized Generic. What is the implication of the Authorized Generic's entry during this exclusivity period?
                                                          A. The Authorized Generic can directly compete with the standard generic because the law only prohibits other ANDA submissions.
                                                          B. The Authorized Generic is prohibited from competing during the 180-day exclusivity period while the manufacturer submits an ANDA.
                                                          C. The FDA will immediately revoke the 180-day exclusivity period for the standard generic due to the AG's launch.

                                                          *

                                                          8. A patient with epilepsy who has been stable on Dilantin is switched to a generic phenytoin by their insurance company to reduce costs. Phenytoin is known to be a Narrow Therapeutic Index drug. What is a key clinical consideration for the pharmacist and prescriber in this situation?
                                                          A. The patient may experience a nocebo effect, or even actual therapeutic failure or toxicity due to subtle pharmacokinetic variations.
                                                          B. Minor variations in excipients are always insignificant for NTI drugs, and this patient’s response will eventually even out.
                                                          C. Generic substitution is always safe for NTI drugs because the FDA ensures identical performance of ALL generic drugs.

                                                          *

                                                          9. A pharmacist is trying to find an interchangeable biologic for a patient's prescribed biologic. Which FDA publication should the pharmacist consult for guidance on biosimilars and interchangeable biosimilars?
                                                          A. The Orange Book
                                                          B. The Purple Book
                                                          C. The National Formulary

                                                          *

                                                          10. A pharmacist in a state with "mandatory substitution laws" receives a prescription for a brand-name drug for which therapeutically equivalent generics are available. Unless specifically indicated by the prescriber, what action is the pharmacist legally required to take?
                                                          A. Replace the brand-name drug with a less expensive therapeutically equivalent generic.
                                                          B. Substitute the brand-name drug with a chemically different but therapeutically similar alternative.
                                                          C. Dispense the prescribed brand-name medication because that is what the physician ordered.

                                                          References

                                                          Full List of References

                                                          1. Murphy J. 2025 Generic and Biosimilar Medicines Savings Report Highlights Value and Vulnerability. Association for Accessible Medicines. Published September 5, 2025. Accessed September 19, 2025. https://accessiblemeds.org/resources/blog/2025-generic-and-biosimilar-medi
                                                          2. Generic Drugs: Questions & Answers. Food and Drug Administration; March 2021. Accessed September 20, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/drugs/frequently-asked-questions-popular-topics/generic-drugs-questions-answerscines-savings-report-highlights-value-and-vulnerability/
                                                          3. McCarthy R. EVOLUTION OF THE PHARMACOPOEIA. aihp.org. Spring 2016. Accessed September 20, 2025.
                                                          4. Hornecker JR. Generic Drugs: History, Approval Process, and Current Challenges. US Pharm. 2009;34(6)(Generic Drug Review suppl):26-30. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/generic-drugs-history-approval-process-and-current-challenges. Accessed September 19, 2025.
                                                          5. Swann JP. How Chemists Pushed for Consumer Protection: The Food and Drugs Act of 1906. Chem Herit. 2006;24(2):6-11. https://digital.sciencehistory.org/works/jdtfjzq/viewer/slnr4t2#q=1906. Accessed September 20, 2025.
                                                          6. Public Outreach Remains Powerful Agency Tool. Food and Drug Administration; March 2023. Accessed November 6, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/about-fda/regulatory-news-stories-and-features/public-outreach-remains-powerful-agency-tool
                                                          7. Johnson J. When Cracker Jack had to Throw out the Toy. FDA Storytime. Published October 6, 2017. Accessed November 16, 2025. https://fdastorytime.com/2017/10/06/when-cracker-jacks-had-to-throw-out-the-toy/
                                                          8. Paine MF. Therapeutic disasters that hastened safety testing of new drugs. Clin Pharmacol Ther. 2017;101(4):430-434. doi:10.1002/cpt.613
                                                          9. Lam C, Patel P. Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act. In: StatPearls. Treasure Island (FL): StatPearls Publishing; July 31, 2023. Accessed October 4, 2025.
                                                          10. Kleiman MA, Hawdon JE. Durham-Humphrey Act. Encyclopedia of Drug Policy. Vol. 2. Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE Publications, Inc.; 2011: 264-265. doi:10.4135/9781412976961.n112
                                                          11. Greene JA, Podolsky SH. Reform, regulation, and pharmaceuticals--the Kefauver-Harris Amendments at 50. N Engl J Med. 2012;367(16):1481-1483. doi:10.1056/NEJMp1210007
                                                          12. Boehm G, Yao L, Han L, Zheng Q. Development of the generic drug industry in the US after the Hatch-Waxman Act of 1984. Acta Pharmaceutica Sinica B. 2013;3(5):297-311. doi:10.1016/j.apsb.2013.07.004
                                                          13. Competitive Generic Therapies. Food and Drug Administration. October 2022. Accessed October 18, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/media/136063/download
                                                          14. Koyfman H. Biosimilarity and Interchangeability in the Biologics Price Competition and Innovation Act of 2009 and FDA's 2012 Draft Guidance for Industry. Biotechnol Law Rep. 2013;32(4):238-251. doi:10.1089/blr.2013.9884
                                                          15. Berndt ER, Conti RM, Murphy SJ. The generic drug user fee amendments: an economic perspective. J Law Biosci. 2018;5(1):103-141. Published 2018 Apr 11. doi:10.1093/jlb/lsy002
                                                          16. Sun D, Gao W, Hu H, Zhou S. Why 90% of clinical drug development fails and how to improve it? Acta Pharmaceutica Sinica B. 2022;12(7):3049-3062. doi:10.1016/j.apsb.2022.02.002
                                                          17. The FDA’s Drug Review Process: Ensuring Drugs Are Safe and Effective. Food and Drug Administration; November 2017. Accessed October 19, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/drugs/information-consumers-and-patients-drugs/fdas-drug-review-process-ensuring-drugs-are-safe-and-effective
                                                          18. Steinmetz KL, Spack EG. The basics of preclinical drug development for neurodegenerative disease indications. BMC Neurol. 2009;9(Suppl 1). doi:10.1186/1471-2377-9-s1-s2
                                                          19. The four phases of clinical trials. acrpnet.org. June 2016. Accessed October 20, 2025. https://acrpnet.org/wp-content/uploads/dlm_uploads/2016/10/The-Four-Phases-of-Clinical-Trials_June-2016-1.pdf
                                                          20. Frequently Asked Questions of Patents and Exclusivity. Food and Drug Administration; February 2020. Accessed October 20, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/drugs/development-approval-process-drugs/frequently-asked-questions-patents-and-exclusivity#howlongpatentterm
                                                          21. Suvarna V. Phase IV of Drug Development. Perspect Clin Res. 2010;1(2):57-60.
                                                          22. Terrie Y. A Review of First-Time Generic Drug Approvals. US Pharm. 2024;49(6):35-40. Accessed October 19, 2025. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/a-review-of-firsttime-generic-drug-approvals
                                                          23. Terrie Y. Parsing the Generic-Drug Approval Process. US Pharm. 2018;43(6):10-16. Accessed October 19, 2025. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/parsing-the-genericdrug-approval-process
                                                          24. Eban K. Bottle of Lies: The inside Story of the Generic Drug Boom. Ecco, an imprint of HarperCollins Publishers; 2020.
                                                          25. Myung J. Introduction of Bioequivalence for Generic Drug Products. Lecture presented at Regulatory Best Practices for Global Access to Medicines, Including Anti-TB Medicines Conference. August 18, 2022; Virtual Presentation.
                                                          26. Andrade C. Bioequivalence of generic drugs: A simple explanation for a US Food and Drug Administration Requirement. J Clin Psychiatry. 2015;76(06):e742-e744. doi:10.4088/jcp.15f10094
                                                          27. Zhu H, Zhou H, Seitz K. Chapter 15 - Bioavailability and Bioequivalence. In: Developing Solid Oral Dosage Forms: Pharmaceutical Theory And Practice. Academic Press; 2009:341-364.
                                                          28. Canterbury C, Nguyen K, Coogan A. Freshly Squeezed: Orange Book History and Key Updates at 45. FDLI Update Magazine. Published online May 20, 2025. Accessed November 16, 2025. https://www.fdli.org/2025/05/freshly-squeezed-orange-book-history-and-key-updates-at-45/#_ednref27
                                                          29. Hamer M, Rose A. Authorized Generics: To Switch Rather than Fight. GEN Biotechnol. 2005;25(13). Accessed October 20, 2025. https://www.genengnews.com/news/authorized-generics-to-switch-rather-than-fight/
                                                          30. Alderfer J. Authorized Generics: What Pharmacists Should Know. US Pharm. 2020;45(6):23. Accessed October 20, 2025. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/authorized-generics-what-pharmacists-should-know
                                                          31. Johnson L. Drugmaker launches own generic Viagra. Times Union. https://www.timesunion.com/business/article/Drugmaker-launches-own-generic-Viagra-12418747.php. Published December 9, 2017. Accessed October 22, 2025.
                                                          32. Teva announces exclusive launch of generic Viagra® Tablets in the United States. tevapharm.com. December 11, 2017. Accessed October 22, 2025. https://www.tevapharm.com/news-and-media/latest-news/teva-announces-exclusive-launch-of-generic-viagra-tablets-in-the-united-states/
                                                          33. Fowler AC, Jacobo-Rubio R, Xu J. Authorized generics in the US: Prevalence, characteristics, and timing, 2010–19. Health Aff (Millwood). 2023;42(8):1071-1080. doi:10.1377/hlthaff.2022.01677
                                                          34. Brennan Z. Authorized generics: Why Mylan would compete with itself in the epipen market. Regulatory Affairs Professional Society. August 29, 2016. Accessed November 20, 2025. https://www.raps.org/News-and-Articles/News-Articles/2016/8/Authorized-Generics-Why-Mylan-Would-Compete-With
                                                          35. The U.S. Generic & Biosimilar Medicines Savings Report. accessiblemeds.org. 2018. Accessed October 23, 2025. https://accessiblemeds.org/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/AAM-2024-Generic-Biosimilar-Medicines-Savings-Report.pdf.
                                                          36. Tamargo J, Le Heuzey JY, Mabo P. Narrow therapeutic index drugs: a clinical pharmacological consideration to flecainide. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 2015;71(5):549-567. doi:10.1007/s00228-015-1832-0
                                                          37. Donnelly M, Fang L, Madabushi R, et al. Narrow Therapeutic Index Drugs: FDA Experience, Views, and Operations. Clin Pharmacol Ther. 2025;117(1):116-129. doi:10.1002/cpt.3460
                                                          38. Gozzo L, Caraci F, Drago F. Bioequivalence, Drugs with Narrow Therapeutic Index and The Phenomenon of Biocreep: A Critical Analysis of the System for Generic Substitution. Healthcare (Basel). 2022;10(8):1392. Published 2022 Jul 26. doi:10.3390/healthcare10081392
                                                          39. Glerum PJ, Neef C, Burger DM, Yu Y, Maliepaard M. Pharmacokinetics and Generic Drug Switching: A Regulator's View. Clin Pharmacokinet. 2020;59(9):1065-1069. doi:10.1007/s40262-020-00909-8
                                                          40. Chen M, Chow SC. Assessing bioequivalence and drug interchangeability. J Biopharm Stat. 2017;27(2):272-281. doi:10.1080/10543406.2016.1265537
                                                          41. Zarmpi P, Flanagan T, Meehan E, Mann J, Østergaard J, Fotaki N. Biopharmaceutical implications of excipient variability on drug dissolution from immediate release products. Eur J Pharm Biopharm. 2020;154:195-209. doi:10.1016/j.ejpb.2020.07.014
                                                          42. Rahman MM, Alatawi Y, Cheng N, et al. Comparison of brand versus generic antiepileptic drug adverse event reporting rates in the U.S. Food and Drug Administration Adverse Event Reporting System (FAERS). Epilepsy Res. 2017;135:71-78. doi:10.1016/j.eplepsyres.2017.06.007
                                                          43. Kristensen LE, Alten R, Puig L, et al. Non-pharmacological Effects in Switching Medication: The Nocebo Effect in Switching from Originator to Biosimilar Agent. BioDrugs. 2018;32(5):397. doi:10.1007/s40259-018-0306-1
                                                          44. Giron NC, Oh H, Rehmet E, Shireman TI. Descriptive Trends in Medicaid Antipsychotic Prescription Claims and Expenditures, 2016 - 2021. J Behav Health Serv Res. 2024;51(4):516-528. doi:10.1007/s11414-024-09889-0
                                                          45. Jiang W, Makhlouf F, Schuirmann DJ, et al. A Bioequivalence Approach for Generic Narrow Therapeutic Index Drugs: Evaluation of the Reference-Scaled Approach and Variability Comparison Criterion. AAPS J. 2015;17(4):891-901. doi:10.1208/s12248-015-9753-5
                                                          46. Concordet D, Gandia P, Montastruc JL, et al. Why Were More Than 200 Subjects Required to Demonstrate the Bioequivalence of a New Formulation of Levothyroxine with an Old One?. Clin Pharmacokinet. 2020;59(1):1-5. doi:10.1007/s40262-019-00812-x
                                                          47. Diak IL, Swank K, McCartan K, et al. The Food and Drug Administration’s (FDA’s) Drug Safety Surveillance During the COVID-19 Pandemic. Drug Saf. 2023;46(2):145. doi:10.1007/s40264-022-01256-2
                                                          48. Dąbrowska A. FDA Risk Evaluation and Mitigation Strategies (REMS): Description and Effect on Generic Drug Development. Published online April 11, 2017. Accessed November 16, 2025. https://sgp.fas.org/crs/misc/R44810.pdf
                                                          49. Song Y, Barthold D. The effects of state‐level pharmacist regulations on generic substitution of prescription drugs. Health Econ. 2018;27(11):1717. doi:10.1002/hec.3796
                                                          50. Socal MP, Cordeiro T, Anderson GF, Bai G. Estimating Savings Opportunities from Therapeutic Substitutions of High-Cost Generic Medications. JAMA Netw Open. 2022;5(11). doi:10.1001/jamanetworkopen.2022.39868
                                                          51. Kesselheim AS, Gagne JJ. Product-Specific Regulatory Pathways to Approve Generic Drugs: The Need for Follow-up Studies to Ensure Safety and Effectiveness. Drug Saf. 2015;38(10):849. doi:10.1007/s40264-015-0315-7
                                                          52. Mishuk AU, Fasina I, Qian J. Impact of U.S. federal and state generic drug policies on drug use, spending, and patient outcomes: A systematic review. Res Social Adm Pharm. 2020;16(6):736-745. doi:10.1016/j.sapharm.2019.08.031
                                                          53. Howard JN, Harris I, Frank G, Kiptanui Z, Qian J, Hansen R. Influencers of generic drug utilization: A systematic review. Res Social Adm Pharm. 2018;14(7):619-627. doi:10.1016/j.sapharm.2017.08.001
                                                          54. Dunne S, Shannon B, Dunne C, Cullen W. A review of the differences and similarities between generic drugs and their originator counterparts, including economic benefits associated with usage of generic medicines, using Ireland as a case study. BMC Pharmacol Toxicol. 2013;14:1. Published 2013 Jan 5. doi:10.1186/2050-6511-14-1
                                                          55. Tam A, Garcia-Arieta A, Abalos I, et al. A Survey of the Criteria Used for the Selection of Alternative Comparator Products by Participating Regulators and Organizations of the International Pharmaceutical Regulators Programme. J Pharm Pharm Sci. 2022;25:323-339. doi:10.18433/jpps33081
                                                          56. Manigault K, Marcheva G, Peasah S. Insights into Effective Generic Substitution. US Pharm. Published online June 16, 2016. Accessed October 20, 2025. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/insights-into-effective-generic-substitution.
                                                          57. Nakipov Z, Musaev U, Smagylova I, et al. Validation of Kazakh and Russian Generic Drug Questionnaire. Med J Islam Repub Iran. 2025;39:101. Published 2025 Jul 30. doi:10.47176/mjiri.39.101
                                                          58. Walsh G, Walsh E. Biopharmaceutical benchmarks 2022. Nat Biotechnol. 2022;40(12):1722-1760. doi:10.1038/s41587-022-01582-x
                                                          59. Evans C, Gibofsky A, Strand V. Biosimilars for immune-mediated inflammatory diseases: a managed care perspective. Am J Manag Care. 2022;28(12 Suppl):S234-S239. doi:10.37765/ajmc.2022.89298
                                                          60. Dusetzina SB, Keating NL, Huskamp HA, Mello MM. Medicare’s Plan for Drug-Price Negotiation — The Importance of Defining Generic Entry. N Engl J Med. 2023;389(2):97. doi:10.1056/nejmp2304289

                                                          The Mediterranean Diet’s Effect on Health

                                                          Learning Objectives

                                                           

                                                          After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to

                                                          ·       Review the Mediterranean diet’s history and essential components
                                                          ·       Discuss the relationship between culture, associated foods, and proven health benefits
                                                          ·       Describe the relationship between the Mediterranean diet and the human microbiome
                                                          ·       Discuss the pharmacist’s role as a resource for disseminating accurate, concise information to patients about the Mediterranean diet

                                                          Release Date:

                                                          Release Date: October 17, 2025

                                                          Expiration Date: October 17, 2028

                                                          Course Fee

                                                          FREE

                                                          There is no grant funding for this CE activity

                                                          ACPE UANs

                                                          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-070-H99-P

                                                          Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-070-H99-T

                                                          Session Codes

                                                          Pharmacist:  19YC53-HKX42

                                                          Pharmacy Technician:  19YC53-PWK93

                                                          Accreditation Hours

                                                          1.5 hours of CE

                                                          Accreditation Statements

                                                          The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-070-H99-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                                                           

                                                          Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                                                          The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                                                          Faculty

                                                           Jill Fitzgerald, PharmD

                                                          Former Director (retired) of Pharmacy Professional Development,

                                                          University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy,

                                                          Storrs, CT

                                                           

                                                          Sonya Kremenchugsky, PharmD

                                                          Pharmacist, The Valley Hospital,

                                                          Ridgewood, NJ

                                                           

                                                          Zachary McPherson, PharmD,

                                                          Pharmacist, Walgreens, CT

                                                           

                                                          Morgan Miller, PharmD

                                                          Dispensary Pharmacist

                                                          Bluepoint Wellness

                                                          Branford, CT       

                                                          Faculty Disclosure

                                                          In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                                                          Drs. Fitzgerald, Kremenchugsky, McPherson, and Miller do not have any relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                                                           

                                                          ABSTRACT

                                                          Pharmacists are the most accessible health care professionals, and have several opportunities to promote healthy lifestyles with all of their patients. Diet can be described as empiric (what people actually eat) or normative (what they should eat). The Mediterranean Diet is a normative concept. Its unique food pyramid has been proven to contribute to improved overall health and cardio- vascular health in particular. It influences the human microbiome positively.
                                                          Many healthcare programs and providers recommend this diet for patients with chronic disease. A good understanding of its principles can help pharmacists shape their discussions with patients to guide them on a path to overall better health.

                                                          CONTENT

                                                          Content

                                                          INTRODUCTION

                                                          Humans’ overall health is derived in part from our diets and physical activity. Diet plays a significant role in cardiovascular disease, gastrointestinal diseases, hypertension, and obesity.1,2 In November 2018, The University of Connecticut hosted a conference in Florence, Italy, called “The Mediterranean Diet from an Italian Perspective.” Historians, scientists, and nutrition experts with diverse backgrounds who were primarily from Italy presented comprehensive information about the Mediterranean diet to U.S. pharmacists and dietitians. This continuing education activity reviews information covered in that conference and provides pharmacy teams with a better understanding of the term, “Mediterranean diet.” Educated and accessible health professionals can potentially minimize the incidence of diet-related diseases.

                                                          The human diet has changed with time. Humans started as hunter-gatherers (also called foragers by proponents of the currently popular Paleo diet), which entailed considerable physical activity coupled with a high protein, low carbohydrate diet.

                                                          Some subsets of the human population shifted to an agricultural lifestyle about 11,000 years ago; this is a relatively recent change if one considers that humans have roamed the earth for roughly 2 million years. The change tended to localize groups of people, galvanize population growth, and eventually, allow the development of urban centers. In the last two centuries, these changes supported and encouraged global industrialization and urbanization.3,4

                                                          Many researchers have blamed the current epidemic of certain diseases on the change from whole foods to a high carbohydrate, processed diet associated with industrialization. They also cite relationship between the industrial revolution and the availability of (and perception that we “need”) processed foods, artificial sweeteners, and preservatives. Most people’s diets are completely different from either the hunter-gatherer or agricultural diet consumed by people who farmed. The combination of today’s diet coupled with sedentary lifestyle has led to unforeseeable, clearly preventable health consequences.3,4 Anthropologists have always looked for links between food and diet, human biological and cultural evolution, and population health. In the last 50 years, medical researchers have joined them.

                                                          Hippocrates once said, “Let food be thy medicine and medicine be thy food.” Today, the Western diet is generally high in saturated fat and sucrose, and contains insufficient fiber. This diet increases the risk of obesity, asthma, diabetes, and inflammatory bowel disease.5 Our society has evolved from older and seemingly healthier diets to less healthy diets replete with processed foods.

                                                          This continuing education activity focuses on the Mediterranean diet and its potential to impact health. Researcher Ancel Keys coined the phrase “The Mediterranean diet” to describe a diet he observed near Naples, Italy in the 1950s. The term does not actually describe how people of the Mediterranean currently eat, and its definition is imprecise and somewhat fluid today. The Mediterranean diet is based on a different food pyramid (discussed below) than the traditional pyramid seen in Westernized countries. The activity will cover Ancel Keys and his discoveries from the Seven Country Study alongside his cholesterol hypothesis. The diet, which is rich in fiber and fermented food and drinks, like wines and cheeses, can improve health by nourishing our gut microbiome (the microorganisms that comprise our gut ecosystem and are necessary to digest food, synthesize vitamins, metabolize drugs, and detoxify carcinogens; see SIDEBAR, page 3).

                                                           

                                                          SIDEBAR

                                                          What is the Human Microbiome?

                                                          The human microbiome is the composition of microbes in the human gastrointestinal tract, their genes, and the environment they occupy. In other words, the microbiome is a freestanding ecosystem in each individual’s gut. Of the trillions of microbes that live in or on our bodies, about 90% live within the gastrointestinal tract. The microbiota genome vastly outnumbers the human genome.

                                                          Humans are born with a set of DNA and are germ-free. But over time, different organisms from the outside environment or from foods we consume begin to change our intestinal composition. These elements tend to shape the microbiota all over the body, and the microbes on the skin vary widely from the microbes in the gut. Microbial diversity helps our body function correctly and no two areas on our bodies host the same bacterial composition.

                                                          Recently, researchers have discovered that the microbiome plays a much larger role in health than originally believed. From infancy to death, humans feed their gut microbiome continuously. Each body adapts constantly based on diet. Disruption of the microbiome through poor eating habits and antibiotic use can contribute to the progression of diseases like irritable bowel syndrome, obesity, and cardiovascular disorders. The typical American diet—a diet that often depends on processed or ultra- processed foods—has deteriorated the typical individual’s microbiome.

                                                          The Mediterranean diet contains fermented foods, such as wines and cheeses and an ample portion of fiber, that maintain and nourish the microbiome and promote overall health. The Mediterranean diet contributes to a diverse group of gastrointestinal microbes.12 It provides prebiotics and probiotics. Patients may ask about prebiotics and probiotics, which are available as over-the- counter supplements. It’s important to know the difference, and to know that a good diet can provide both naturally.

                                                          A strong microbiome aids in vitamin synthesis, immune system function, and xenobiotic (chemical compounds [drugs, pesticides, or carcinogens] that are foreign to a living organism) metabolism. It also fortifies the intestine’s impermeability. Some xenobiotics affect health negatively, but others, like supplements and antibiotics, have health benefits. Other functions include biosynthesis of neuro-active metabolites and neurotransmitters like GABA, dopamine, and acetylcholine.

                                                          Nourishing the gut microbiome helps strengthen our body’s anti-tumor response. However, the microbiome is unable to take part in these functions without microbial diversity. More than 20% of our microbiome variability is associated with diet, drugs or supplements consumed, and overall body composition.

                                                           

                                                          Prebiotics Probiotics
                                                          What’s the difference?

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                          Substances that

                                                          come mainly from

                                                          fiber to feed the

                                                          beneficial

                                                          gastrointestinal

                                                          bacteria

                                                          Live bacteria found

                                                          in food and/or

                                                          supplements

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                          Why do we use them?

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                          To bolster beneficial

                                                          bacteria that can be

                                                          converted into

                                                          products with anti-

                                                          inflammatory

                                                          properties

                                                          To increase the

                                                          amount of

                                                          beneficial bacteria

                                                          in the gut

                                                           

                                                           

                                                          What are some examples?

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                           

                                                          Legumes, beans,

                                                          peas, oats, bananas,

                                                          berries, asparagus,

                                                          garlic

                                                           

                                                           

                                                          Sauerkraut, kimchi,

                                                          fermented cheeses,

                                                          fermented

                                                          vegetables,

                                                          Lactobacillus and

                                                          Bifidobacterium

                                                           

                                                          Ancel Keys: Linking Health to Blood Cholesterol Ancel Keys (1904-2004) was an American scientist who spent much of his postgraduate career at the University of Minnesota. He studied diet’s influence on health with a particular interest in cholesterol and coronary heart disease. His contributions to understanding diet’s effects on cardiovascular disease made him an icon in cardiovascular nutrition.14 Keys’ interest in cholesterol peaked after World War II (WWII) when he noticed a significant increase in heart disease mortality with the evolution of the American diet.15 Diets are often based on beliefs or perceptions, and at that time, the American people believed that protein from animal sources was the key to a strong nation.

                                                          Dinner always included meat.16 Following WWII, the American diet increasingly included convenience foods—casseroles, Spam, and meatloaf, among other high-calorie or highly processed meals—that allowed men and women to work and still have the family-style dinner they desired with little effort.16

                                                          In the early 1950s, Keys traveled to Europe and observed

                                                          • Italy and Spain had remarkably low rates of heart disease
                                                          • In both Italy and Spain, the wealthy had high rates of cardiovascular disease, but the working class poor had almost no cardiovascular disease
                                                          • People in Mediterranean countries consumed a diet starkly different than that consumed in the United

                                                          Keys commented on the diet of working class families in the Naples, Italy area, writing “Homemade minestrone or vegetable soup, pasta of endless variety, freshly cooked, with tomato sauce, and a sprinkle of cheese, only occasionally enriched with some bits of meat, or served with a little local seafood, a hearty dish of beans (...) red wine and fresh fruit always.”17 He appropriately described the basis of the Mediterranean diet. After noting how American and Mediterranean diets diverged, Keys gathered anecdotal evidence and speculated that dietary habits explained the differences in cardiovascular disease rates be- tween countries. Keys presented his ideas at the 1955 World Health Organization (WHO) meeting, only to be laughed at by senior scientists in attendance.18

                                                           

                                                          Seven Countries Study & Cholesterol Hypothesis Motivated to dig for answers, Keys began the first multi-country epidemiological study to look for a causal relationship between low-density lipoprotein (LDL) cholesterol and coronary heart disease in 1958. This five-year study enrolled nearly 12,000 men aged 40 to 59 in Finland, Greece, Italy, Japan, the Netherlands, the United States, and Yugoslavia.19

                                                          Keys’ findings, translated into his cholesterol hypothesis, were controversial. The original hypothesis of simply “good fats vs. bad fats” consumption in relation to serum cholesterol unexpectedly needed to include other factors. These factors included the influences of the food and drug industries; level of sugar consumption; and the varying lifestyles of different cultures around the world. This posed a further question: “Is there a diet that is universally healthy for all?” It should be noted that the studies Keys performed were observational, and lacked randomization and control groups. Therefore causation cannot be confirmed. Keys’ critics tended to point out that he “cherry picked” his data to produce the results he desired.

                                                          By 1975, Keys—eager to disseminate his findings—published cookbooks and coined the term “Mediterranean diet.” (Copies of his original cookbook, How to Eat Well and Stay Well the Mediterranean Way, are still available at a price of about $500.00.) With the newly popular Mediterranean diet notion came two different concepts of diet: empiric and normative.

                                                          • The empiric concept of diet is objective, simple, and factual (i.e. what people eat is considered their diet).
                                                          • The normative concept of diet is subjective and “what ought to be” (i.e. people should or should not eat certain ways.”

                                                          Keys’ dietary recommendations, according to his research, are based on the normative concept, and he wanted to make dietary change attractive.14 Keys hoped that adults who adopted a Mediterranean diet lifestyle could reduce their chronic disease burden. Some of the disease states Keys anticipated would be improved by the Mediterranean diet included cardiovascular disease, diabetes, hypertension, and kidney disease.20

                                                          The Mediterranean diet, as Key’s described, mainly consists of fresh fruits and vegetables, beans and legumes, whole grains, bread, and pasta, with small amounts of animal-based proteins consumed less frequently.

                                                          Food marks people’s cultural, religious, personal, and social class identity. Food production not only shapes landscapes and environments, but it also shapes our health. Consuming food is traditionally considered to be a social act, as it brings people together. In many cultures, food is symbolic. So, what do we learn from our food culture? It begins with a socialization process, starting at birth—first with family and friends, then in school and at work. Socialization influences what is “normal” to eat, the acquisition of food itself, and what is available, based on region.

                                                          The Mediterranean Diet pyramid (Figure 1) varies significantly from most food pyramids. Starting at the figure’s base and working upward, conviviality (eating while enjoying good company) and physical activity are essential elements. Thus, the Mediterranean Diet is not only a diet, but a lifestyle. The diet is high in grains, legumes, and fresh produce consumed daily. Bread is served at most meals (see Sidebar on page 4), while meat is consumed less frequently. Olive oil, beans, nuts, legumes, seeds, herbs, and spices provide essential flavor to most meals. Fish or seafood is consumed at least twice weekly and wine is allowed in moderation (no more than five ounces of wine for women and ten ounces for men under the age of 65) daily.21

                                                          The Mediterranean diet is listed as a United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) Intangible Cultural Heritage of Humanity. An Intangible Cultural Heritage encompasses the oral traditions, performing arts, social practices, rituals, festive events, knowledge and practices concerning nature and the universe, or the knowledge and skills to produce traditional crafts.24 As described by UNESCO25: “The Mediterranean diet involves a set of skills, knowledge, rituals, symbols and traditions concerning crops, harvesting, fishing, animal husbandry, conservation, processing, cooking and particularly the sharing and consumption of food. Eating together is the foundation of the cultural identity and continuity of communities throughout the Mediterranean basin. It is a moment of social exchange and communication, an affirmation and renewal of family, group or community identity."

                                                          The diet’s intangible and cultural aspects make it unique; adherence to the diet is based on more than intake of specific foods. The conviviality and social aspect of eating together is an essential part of Mediterranean culture and is included as part of the food pyramid. Investigators have conducted trials to review how the Mediterranean diet affects health outcomes. The PREDIMED study conducted recently compared those who follow the Mediterranean diet to those who do not and their cardiovascular outcomes.

                                                           

                                                          PAUSE AND PONDER: What does bread symbolize in your religion or culture?

                                                          Does it appear on the table at every meal?

                                                           

                                                          SIDEBAR

                                                          BREAD

                                                          In the Mediterranean Diet, carbohydrates account for 45% to 55% of daily calories. This is because bread (among other grains) is the most important food in the Mediterranean and many other cultures; it is a symbol of sustenance and livelihood. Bread requires few ingredients, is inexpensive and easy to make, and provides nourishment. Each region of the world has its own way of making bread, from differences in ingredients to the techniques involved in the bread-making process itself.

                                                          The history of bread dates to the Ancient Egyptians in 8000 BC when they invented the first grinding stone, called a quern. The earliest breads more closely resembled porridge or a flat cake. Between 5000 and 3700 BC, bread became a staple food in Egypt and was also used for trade and bartering. Trading bread introduced it to other regions and cultures, expanding its production around the world. Over time, different types of grains and bread-making techniques emerged.

                                                          Greeks, Mexicans, Persians, and many others jumped on the bread bandwagon in the next several centuries. Each population created something unique. By 1000 BC, yeasted breads had become popular in Rome. Bread has always been a form of sustenance; for many centuries the type of bread one ate also represented status. Bread quickly became a symbol of Roman status. White breads were more expensive, and exclusively for the wealthy, while common people generally consumed darker whole wheat breads. The British adopted this same societal structure during medieval times.23

                                                          In many cultures “breaking bread” means bringing family and friends together for just a small meal or even a big holiday celebration.

                                                          In the Italian culture bread is revered for its symbolization of love and nurturing. Bread is never discarded but rather turned into an additional dish or crumbled in soup (ribollita). Consider the Italian tradition of sweeping breadcrumbs from the table into your fist and kissing them; it’s a symbol of the bread’s cultural importance.

                                                          Source: Reference 23

                                                           

                                                          The PREDIMED Trial

                                                          Published by the New England Journal of Medicine in 2013 and again with corrections in 2018, the PREDIMED study assessed the Mediterranean diet in Spain from 2003 to 2011 and included 7447 men and women at high cardiovascular disease risk with a mean age of 67 years.26,27 The study was a multicenter, randomized, nutrition-intervention, primary prevention trial to test the efficacy of the Mediterranean Diet on the composite endpoint of death from cardiovascular cause, stroke and myocardial infarction. The researchers randomized subjects to one of three groups:

                                                          • Mediterranean diet supplemented with one liter per family per week of extra virgin olive oil
                                                          • Mediterranean diet supplemented with mixed nuts (1 oz/day) or
                                                          • A standard low fat control diet

                                                          While the intervention was originally intended to last six years, the researchers discontinued the trial early and advised all participants to follow a Mediterranean diet. The recommendation came after the study’s data and safety monitoring board realized that participants in either Mediterranean diet arm had significantly improved health statuses. After an average follow up of about 4.8 years, both Mediterranean Diet groups had a significant (30%) reduction in major cardiovascular events compared to the low fat control diet.27

                                                          However, after the 2013 publication, researchers raised questions about the study’s randomization and data analysis, indicating that errors in randomization introduced unintentional bias that made the results/data unreliable. The New England Journal of Medicine retracted the trial.26,28 The specific issue related to randomization was this: Randomization was not conducted consistently and correctly across all sites. For example, at some sites, if more than one participant per house enrolled, investigators would assign both individuals to the same diet. At other sites the research staff randomized entire clinics to a single treatment group instead of each participant.26,28

                                                          The authors reanalyzed and statistically corrected for correlations within families or clinics. The authors also reanalyzed the data and omitted 1588 participants whose trial group assignments were known or suspected to have deviated from the randomization protocol. After reanalysis of he remaining 5859 subjects, the authors found no significant changes from the original study. Reanalysis confirmed a 30% relative difference in major cardiovascular events in those randomized to the Mediterranean diet groups.26

                                                          Despite the controversy over the PREDIMED study, many studies have confirmed the Mediterranean diet’s benefits.29-31 The best time to internalize the elements of good diet is early in life, and in Italy, school systems follow and reinforce the Mediterranean diet’s general principles in their school lunch programs.

                                                          The program used in Florence, Italy is a good example.

                                                           

                                                          PAUSE AND PONDER: How does the Mediterranean diet differ from what is perceived to be a healthy diet in the US? What factors other than food may play a role in its supposed health benefits?

                                                          School Lunch Program in Florence, Italy

                                                          While many children may learn the practices of the Mediterranean diet at home, the ideals of the normative Mediterranean diet are further ingrained in school through Italian school lunch programs. In the city of Florence, Italy, school staff prepares 24,000 lunches daily in 16 different kitchens. They deliver the meals to different primary schools. Menus rotate every four weeks and the menu changes three times annually to provide seasonally fresh foods. Pediatricians and dietitians develop the menu. Dietitians calculate protein, carbohydrates, fat, and calories for each meal to ensure that they are at national average. However, parents, chefs, and children have significant input as well. Parents are welcome to eat lunch with their children to try a school lunch. Dietary staff rarely serves canned or frozen food with the exception of peas and spinach in the winter. Menus indicate whether the food is organic, local, or both and about 90% of the food falls into these categories.32

                                                          Food from home is generally not allowed, and the school has no vending machines so all food originates from the kitchen. Fresh fruit is provided at around 10 AM in the classroom as a snack. Teachers eat with students during lunch. The lunch room accommodates about 20 students; children set tables, serve, or clear plates. At the end of each month, parents pay for their child’s lunch. The cost is income-based. The highest income level pays 4.90 Euros ($5.60 as of December 2018) per meal, and the lowest income level pays 1.00 Euro ($1.14 as of December 2018) per meal. Certain low-income groups do not pay.32 The main point is that Italy makes a healthy diet affordable for everyone, not just the wealthy.

                                                          Special meals are available to accommodate people who have a variety of food allergies. (Approximately 6% to 8% of the Italian population has allergies, yet roughly 20% of American children suffer from allergies.33 ) There are also Kosher, Halal, and vegetarian options. While chefs prepare these meals differently, they appear visually similar so students do not feel uncomfortable if they receive a different meal.32

                                                          Once children leave primary school, they no longer receive meals in school and it is up to the students and their parents to select foods they eat. The Mediterranean diet is instilled in the everyday lives of children who live in Florence through the school lunch program and these ideals many times continue into adulthood.32 If children continue these habits, evidence suggests health outcomes of interest to pharmacists and other healthcare providers (better cardiovascular health and less chronic illness).

                                                          Aging, Adherence to the Mediterranean Diet, and the Microbiome

                                                          Recently, researchers conducted a study to understand how adherence to the Mediterranean diet in an aging population can be a simple way for people to reduce cardiovascular risk.34 In a study of 476 adults aged 50 to 89 living in Italy, these researchers looked for a link between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet, cardiometabolic disorders and polypharmacy (defined as five or more medications). Using patient self-report, they found that patients who had medium-low adherence to the Mediterranean diet over the years took an average of five medications. Participants in the medium-low adherence group also had a higher body mass index, and a higher prevalence of arterial hypertension, previous coronary and cerebrovascular events, diabetes, and dyslipidemia on average compared to those in the high adherence group.

                                                          Those whose diet most closely resembled the ideal Mediterranean diet, however, took an average of three medications.

                                                          Their conclusion was that adherence to the Mediterranean Diet may decrease polypharmacy and cardiometabolic disorders in elderly, and have a positive preventive effects on health deterioration.34 Using the results of this study, pharmacists can explain to patients how diet changes can potentially affect their pill burden. Polypharmacy can lead to issues such as side effects and drug interactions that can be avoided with simple dietary changes. Dietary changes can also eventually lead to beneficial changes to the human microbiome.

                                                          The industrial revolution changed the American diet. Greater accessibility to a wide variety of foods and mass produced, convenient meals lead to microbiome degradation and dysfunction.35 Most of the food in American grocery stores does not nourish the microbiota, lacking the component key to feeding the microbiome: fiber. Studies have shown an increase in beneficial bacteria, like Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus, in groups with high fiber diets compared to groups with placebo or low fiber diets.36 Fiber promotes a higher microbial diversity and microbiome resilience. Fruits and vegetables provide a variety of external microbes and probiotics. The combination of fiber and microbes contribute to a healthy gut microbiome. The shift from a non-Western diet to a Western diet has had drastic effects, including a loss of native bacteria strains and a fiber deficit. A Western lifestyle lacks essential components that contribute to a diverse microbiome that leads to long- and short- term health effects.37

                                                          The Relationship with the Mediterranean Diet

                                                          The Mediterranean diet is not a high carbohydrate diet that contains simply breads and pasta. The diet is composed of fresh fruit, vegetables, fish, whole meal cereals, beans and pulses (edible seeds of plants in the legume family), unsalted nuts and seeds, small amounts of lean meat and low fat dairy, olive oil, fresh herbs and wine.7 Food is not the only component of the diet. Conviviality, or the social aspect of eating, is an essential part alongside physical activity and a relaxed lifestyle. The Mediterranean diet contributes to improved metabolic health through the reduction of circulating bacterial endotoxins and diversity of the microbiota. Increasing levels of bacterial endotoxins have been proposed as a cause of inflammation during metabolic dysfunction.37

                                                          Numerous studies have confirmed the Mediterranean diet diversifies the gut microbiome. One study concluded that the diet increases the probiotic bacteria, Lactobacillus, when compared to the control group that was on a Western diet.13 Researchers replicated these findings in a study of Spanish men who ate a traditional Mediterranean-style diet. Study subjects had increased populations of Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus. These bacterial species also had the ability to stimulate the growth of other beneficial bacterial species involved in methane and butyrate production.38

                                                          Feeding the human microbiota effectively requires microbiota- accessible carbohydrates (MACs). MACs are a primary source of energy for the microbiome and come from a fiber-rich diet. A MAC-rich diet has few simple sugars, unlike the typical Western diet, and its main contributor to the host metabolism is through small chain fatty acid fermentation of end products of the microbiota. The Western diet is low in MACs which results in a low microbiota diversity and metabolic output.12 Increases in mucus-utilizing microbes, slow gut motility, and increased calories from fat and sugars all contribute to cardiovascular diseases, obesity, and the deterioration of health.12

                                                          Dysbiosis, or microbial imbalance, contributes to the pathogenesis of intestinal and extra-intestinal disease. Inflammatory bowel disease can manifest within our intestinal tract due to dysbiosis.8 Allergies, asthma, metabolic syndrome, cardiovascular disease, and obesity occur outside of our intestines partly due to microbial imbalance.7 Avoiding dysbiosis can help to prevent some of these ailments. Hunter-gatherer diets promote a diverse microbiome since the diet is primarily based on fruits, vegetables, and high fiber content. The microbiome can ferment soluble fibers into short-chain fatty acids that are health- promoting and can help with metabolic syndrome.7

                                                          IMPLICATIONS FOR PHARMACY STAFF

                                                          Today, many healthcare providers steer patients toward a Mediterranean diet to improve cardio-metabolic issues. The American Heart Association devotes a page to the Mediterranean diet, noting that “Mediterranean diet” is a generic term for the typical eating habits in the countries that border the Mediterranean Sea.39 Healthcare organizations and advocacy groups use many different definitions, but often explain that this diet is based on whole or minimally processed foods. It includes many health-protective foods (fruits, vegetables, legumes, whole grains, fish and olive oil) and encourages patients to avoid adverse dietary factors (fast food, sugar-sweetened beverages, refined grain products, and processed or energy-dense foods). It also guides patients to limit red meat and alcohol intake, indulging moderately if at all.39,40

                                                          Pharmacy staff can be a resource for information about the diet, referring patients to local cooking classes or lectures that are given by health clinics. Most healthcare systems offer such classes to their patients and the community, and adult education programs often do, too. They can also target patients who have cardiovascular disease, diabetes, or renal failure for counseling, and steer them to discuss the Mediterranean diet with their health care professionals.

                                                          Table 1. Resources for the Mediterranean Diet
                                                          Oldways Cultural Food Traditions

                                                          https://oldwayspt.org/traditional-diets/mediterranean-diet

                                                          ●   Describes the Mediterranean diet, and also covers the principles and components of African, Asian, Latin, veg- an, and vegetarian diets

                                                          ●   Includes numerous recipes

                                                          ●   Provides links to advocacy groups and related programs

                                                          Mediterranean Diet 101: A Meal Plan and Beginner's Guide

                                                          https://pharmacy.media.uconn.edu/wp-content/uploads/sites/2740/2025/10/MediterraneanDiet-PDF-link-in-the-doc.pdf

                                                          ●   Provides lists of foods, sample menus, and shopping lists

                                                          ●   Offers useful tips on eating out

                                                          What is the Mediterranean Diet?

                                                          https://www.cookinglight.com/eating-smart/nutrition- 101/what-is-the-Mediterranean-diet

                                                          ●   Includes sample meal plans, recipe ideas, shopping lists

                                                          ●   Offers suggestions to add variety to meals

                                                          22 Mediterranean Diet Recipes

                                                          https://www.eatingwell.com/easy-mediterranean-diet-dinnerrecipes-for-weight-loss-11748517https://www.health.com/health/gallery/0,,20718485,00.html

                                                          ●   A slideshow of recipes that incorporate the elements of an Italian or Greek diet

                                                          Pharmacists and technicians should understand the diet and be able to answer questions about its health benefits. Hamilton Family Health Team offers a Mediterranean Diet Scorecard for free that emphasizes important points (https://hamiltonfht.ca/wp-content/uploads/Medi-Diet-Scoring-Tool.pdf) and is a handy tool for pharmacy staff.  Pharmacies can also promote this diet annually in May, which is National Mediterranean Diet Month, with poster campaigns and information sheets.41 Table 1 provides additional resources.

                                                          CONCLUSION

                                                          It’s clear that diet has serious health implications. Astute readers probably noticed several things as they read. First, the Mediterranean diet emanates from food that the poor, working class people ate traditionally. It is based on healthy foods. Second, it’s highly probable that if researchers look at similar diets from other regions of the world, they would find similar health implications. (The authors assume you saw sauerkraut and kimchi listed in the fermented foods list in the Probiotics Sidebar, and reference to other old world diets in the Resources table.) Third, many readers may examine their own eating habits and see room for improvement.

                                                           

                                                          Especially in occupations where long days, missed lunches, and consuming fast food quickly are the norm (do these things sound familiar?), convenience and processed foods may wiggle their way into many meals. Making good choices from foods included in the Mediterranean diet can improve overall health for patients and for pharmacists and technicians, too.

                                                          Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)


                                                          The Mediterranean Diet's Effect on Health
                                                          Pharmacist Post-Test
                                                          25-070

                                                          Learning Objectives:
                                                          After participating in this activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to
                                                          Review the Mediterranean diet’s history and essential components
                                                          Discuss the relationship between culture, associated foods, and proven health benefits
                                                          Describe the relationship between the Mediterranean diet and the human microbiome
                                                          Discuss the pharmacist’s role as a resource for disseminating accurate, concise information to patients about the Mediterranean diet.

                                                          1. Ancel Keys was considered an icon in:
                                                          a. Coronary heart disease
                                                          b. Cardiovascular nutrition
                                                          c. Influencing diet

                                                          *

                                                          2. Why did Ancel Keys become interested in studying cholesterol?
                                                          a. He was a vegetarian, which is notoriously a low-cholesterol diet
                                                          b. He was Italian and thought everyone should eat like Italians do
                                                          c. He noticed a significant increase in heart disease mortality

                                                          *

                                                          3. What did Ancel Keys observe while traveling to Europe in the 1950s?
                                                          a. Individuals born and raised in France or Germany experienced almost no cardiovascular disease or dyslipidemia
                                                          b. There was a stark difference in the foods consumed and the health in Mediterranean countries compared to the United States
                                                          c. In both France and Germany, the wealthy had high rates of cardiovascular disease, but the working class poor people had almost no cardiovascular problems

                                                          *

                                                          4. At what meeting did Keys present his ideas?
                                                          a. World Health Organization
                                                          b. UNESCO
                                                          c. PREDIMED

                                                          *

                                                          5. What percentage of calories come from a carbohydrate source for the Mediterranean diet?
                                                          a. 20%-30%
                                                          b. 45%-55%
                                                          c. 60%-70%

                                                          *

                                                          6. What disease states can benefit from the Mediterranean diet?
                                                          a. Kidney disease, diabetes, asthma, Crohn’s, ulcerative colitis
                                                          b. Ulcerative colitis , cardiovascular disease, GERD, asthma
                                                          c. Cardiovascular disease, diabetes, hypertension, kidney disease

                                                          *

                                                          7. What is the human microbiome?
                                                          a. The human microbiome is the complete population of all microbial organisms in and on our body
                                                          b. The human microbiome is the microbial composition in our gastrointestinal tract, their genes and the environment that they live in within our bodies
                                                          c. The human microbiome is the complete species list of all organisms that could pose a potential threat to our bodies

                                                          *

                                                          8. Which disease states are likely to benefit from the microbiome?
                                                          a. Kidney disease, diabetes, asthma, Crohn’s
                                                          b. Ulcerative colitis , cardiovascular disease, GERD, migraines
                                                          c. Cardiovascular disease, celiacs disease, obesity

                                                          *

                                                          9. Which of the following is NOT a function of the microbiome?
                                                          a. The microbiome strengthens the impermeability of the intestine
                                                          b. The microbiome helps produce sex hormones to provide optimal fertility
                                                          c. The microbiome contributes to immune system function

                                                          *

                                                          10. Which of the following food groups provides the most amount of microbes to our bodies?
                                                          a. Grains and cereals
                                                          b. Meats
                                                          c. Fruits and vegetables

                                                          *

                                                          11. What is the effect of Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus in the microbiome?
                                                          a. They create the perfect environment for bacteria to grow by enhancing the pH and water saturation throughout the GI tract
                                                          b. They defend the intestines against opportunistic pathogens
                                                          c. They stimulate the growth of other beneficial species

                                                          *

                                                          12. Which of the following is a major factor contributing to intestinal and extra intestinal diseases?
                                                          a. Inadequate fluid intake
                                                          b. Dysbiosis
                                                          c. High sugar intake

                                                          *

                                                          13. What is the effect of re-diversifying a dysbiotic microbiome?
                                                          a. New disease states will occur
                                                          b. Loss of function in the microbiome
                                                          c. Prevention of intestinal diseases

                                                          *

                                                          14. Which of the following best describes the Mediterranean Diet?
                                                          a. Low carbohydrate, low fat, high animal protein diet
                                                          b. High carbohydrate, high fat, low animal protein diet
                                                          c. Low carbohydrate, high fat, high animal protein diet

                                                          *

                                                          15. The Historic Centre of Florence is an example of a ____________________.
                                                          a. UNESCO Intangible Cultural Heritage
                                                          b. UNESCO Cultural Heritage
                                                          c. UNESCO Natural Heritage

                                                          *

                                                          16. What was the purpose of the PREDIMED trial?
                                                          a. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on decreasing all-cause mortality
                                                          b. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on cardiovascular health
                                                          c. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on the composite endpoint

                                                          *

                                                          17. What did the Aging and Adherence to the Mediterranean Diet find?
                                                          a. An association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet and adherence to medication
                                                          b. An inverse association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet and adherence to medication
                                                          c. An inverse association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet, polypharmacy and cardiometabolic disorders

                                                          *

                                                          18. Which of the following is an example of a typical meal based on the normative Mediterranean diet?
                                                          a. Bread with olive oil, charcuterie, cheese, a glass of wine
                                                          b. Bread with olive oil, lentil salad, a glass of wine
                                                          c. Bread with olive oil, grilled chicken, lentil salad

                                                          *

                                                          19. Which of the following can help pharmacists and pharmacy technicians analyze a patient’s diet?
                                                          a. The Cardiac Rehabilitation UK Mediterranean Diet Scorecard
                                                          b. The Oldways Diet online site
                                                          c. The Mayo Clinic’s webpage on eating

                                                          *

                                                          20. Select the statement that is TRUE:
                                                          a. The Mediterranean diet builds on inexpensive food that the poor, working class people ate traditionally.
                                                          b. If researchers look at other regions of the world, no similar diets or health implications exist.
                                                          c. Most pharmacists and techs instinctively follow a Mediterranean diet and can explain it to patients.

                                                          Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)


                                                          The Mediterranean Diet's Effect on Health
                                                          Pharmacist Post-Test
                                                          25-070

                                                          Learning Objectives:
                                                          After participating in this activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to
                                                          Review the Mediterranean diet’s history and essential components
                                                          Discuss the relationship between culture, associated foods, and proven health benefits
                                                          Describe the relationship between the Mediterranean diet and the human microbiome
                                                          Discuss the pharmacist’s role as a resource for disseminating accurate, concise information to patients about the Mediterranean diet.

                                                          1. Ancel Keys was considered an icon in:
                                                          a. Coronary heart disease
                                                          b. Cardiovascular nutrition
                                                          c. Influencing diet

                                                          *

                                                          2. Why did Ancel Keys become interested in studying cholesterol?
                                                          a. He was a vegetarian, which is notoriously a low-cholesterol diet
                                                          b. He was Italian and thought everyone should eat like Italians do
                                                          c. He noticed a significant increase in heart disease mortality

                                                          *

                                                          3. What did Ancel Keys observe while traveling to Europe in the 1950s?
                                                          a. Individuals born and raised in France or Germany experienced almost no cardiovascular disease or dyslipidemia
                                                          b. There was a stark difference in the foods consumed and the health in Mediterranean countries compared to the United States
                                                          c. In both France and Germany, the wealthy had high rates of cardiovascular disease, but the working class poor people had almost no cardiovascular problems

                                                          *

                                                          4. At what meeting did Keys present his ideas?
                                                          a. World Health Organization
                                                          b. UNESCO
                                                          c. PREDIMED

                                                          *

                                                          5. What percentage of calories come from a carbohydrate source for the Mediterranean diet?
                                                          a. 20%-30%
                                                          b. 45%-55%
                                                          c. 60%-70%

                                                          *

                                                          6. What disease states can benefit from the Mediterranean diet?
                                                          a. Kidney disease, diabetes, asthma, Crohn’s, ulcerative colitis
                                                          b. Ulcerative colitis , cardiovascular disease, GERD, asthma
                                                          c. Cardiovascular disease, diabetes, hypertension, kidney disease

                                                          *

                                                          7. What is the human microbiome?
                                                          a. The human microbiome is the complete population of all microbial organisms in and on our body
                                                          b. The human microbiome is the microbial composition in our gastrointestinal tract, their genes and the environment that they live in within our bodies
                                                          c. The human microbiome is the complete species list of all organisms that could pose a potential threat to our bodies

                                                          *

                                                          8. Which disease states are likely to benefit from the microbiome?
                                                          a. Kidney disease, diabetes, asthma, Crohn’s
                                                          b. Ulcerative colitis , cardiovascular disease, GERD, migraines
                                                          c. Cardiovascular disease, celiacs disease, obesity

                                                          *

                                                          9. Which of the following is NOT a function of the microbiome?
                                                          a. The microbiome strengthens the impermeability of the intestine
                                                          b. The microbiome helps produce sex hormones to provide optimal fertility
                                                          c. The microbiome contributes to immune system function

                                                          *

                                                          10. Which of the following food groups provides the most amount of microbes to our bodies?
                                                          a. Grains and cereals
                                                          b. Meats
                                                          c. Fruits and vegetables

                                                          *

                                                          11. What is the effect of Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus in the microbiome?
                                                          a. They create the perfect environment for bacteria to grow by enhancing the pH and water saturation throughout the GI tract
                                                          b. They defend the intestines against opportunistic pathogens
                                                          c. They stimulate the growth of other beneficial species

                                                          *

                                                          12. Which of the following is a major factor contributing to intestinal and extra intestinal diseases?
                                                          a. Inadequate fluid intake
                                                          b. Dysbiosis
                                                          c. High sugar intake

                                                          *

                                                          13. What is the effect of re-diversifying a dysbiotic microbiome?
                                                          a. New disease states will occur
                                                          b. Loss of function in the microbiome
                                                          c. Prevention of intestinal diseases

                                                          *

                                                          14. Which of the following best describes the Mediterranean Diet?
                                                          a. Low carbohydrate, low fat, high animal protein diet
                                                          b. High carbohydrate, high fat, low animal protein diet
                                                          c. Low carbohydrate, high fat, high animal protein diet

                                                          *

                                                          15. The Historic Centre of Florence is an example of a ____________________.
                                                          a. UNESCO Intangible Cultural Heritage
                                                          b. UNESCO Cultural Heritage
                                                          c. UNESCO Natural Heritage

                                                          *

                                                          16. What was the purpose of the PREDIMED trial?
                                                          a. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on decreasing all-cause mortality
                                                          b. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on cardiovascular health
                                                          c. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on the composite endpoint

                                                          *

                                                          17. What did the Aging and Adherence to the Mediterranean Diet find?
                                                          a. An association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet and adherence to medication
                                                          b. An inverse association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet and adherence to medication
                                                          c. An inverse association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet, polypharmacy and cardiometabolic disorders

                                                          *

                                                          18. Which of the following is an example of a typical meal based on the normative Mediterranean diet?
                                                          a. Bread with olive oil, charcuterie, cheese, a glass of wine
                                                          b. Bread with olive oil, lentil salad, a glass of wine
                                                          c. Bread with olive oil, grilled chicken, lentil salad

                                                          *

                                                          19. Which of the following can help pharmacists and pharmacy technicians analyze a patient’s diet?
                                                          a. The Cardiac Rehabilitation UK Mediterranean Diet Scorecard
                                                          b. The Oldways Diet online site
                                                          c. The Mayo Clinic’s webpage on eating

                                                          *

                                                          20. Select the statement that is TRUE:
                                                          a. The Mediterranean diet builds on inexpensive food that the poor, working class people ate traditionally.
                                                          b. If researchers look at other regions of the world, no similar diets or health implications exist.
                                                          c. Most pharmacists and techs instinctively follow a Mediterranean diet and can explain it to patients.

                                                          References

                                                          Full List of References

                                                          1. Statovci D, Aguilera M, MacSharry J, Melgar S. The impact of Western diet and nutrients on the microbiota and immune response at mucosal interfaces. Front Immunol. 2017;8:838.
                                                          2. Mozaffarian D, Hao T, Rimm EB, Willett WC, Hu FB. Changes in diet and lifestyle and long-term weight gain in men and women. N Engl J Med. 2011;364(25):2392-404.
                                                          3. Crittenden AN, Schnorr SL. Current views on hunter-gatherer nutrition and the evolution of the human diet. Am J Phys Anthropol. 2017;162(Suppl 63):84-109.
                                                          4. Veile A. Hunter-gatherer diets and human behavioral evolution. Physiol Behav. 2018;193(Pt B):190-195.
                                                          5. de Silva PS, Luben R, Shrestha SS, Khaw KT, Hart AR. Dietary arachidonic and oleic acid intake in ulcerative colitis etiology: a prospective cohort using 7-day food diaries. Eur J Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2014; 26(1):11-18.
                                                          6. Knight R, McDonald D. Our second genome. Imagine. 2013;1:26-29.
                                                          7. Piccini, F. (2018). Diet-Microbiota Interactions. November, 2018. Florence, Italy.
                                                          8. Menees S, Chey W. The gut microbiome and irritable bowel syndrome. F1000Res. 2018;7:F1000.
                                                          9. Tang WH, Hazen SL. The Gut Microbiome and Its Role in Cardiovascular Diseases. Circulation. 2017;135(11):1008–1010.
                                                          10. Lone JB, Koh WY, Parray HA, et al. Gut Microbiome: Microflora Association with obesity and obesity-related comorbidities. Microbial Pathogenesis. 2018;124:266-271.
                                                          11. Lewis S. Probiotics and Prebiotics: What’s the Difference? Healthline Newsletter. June 3, 2017. https://www.healthline.com/nutrition/probiotics-and-prebiotics. Accessed April 5, 2019.
                                                          12. Turroni, S. (2018). Our ever changing gut microbiota and our health. November, 2018. Florence, Italy.
                                                          13. Soucek P. (2011) Xenobiotics. In: Schwab M. (eds) Encyclopedia of Cancer. Springer, Berlin, Heidelberg.
                                                          14. National Lipid Association. Ancel Keys, PhD (1904-2004). Available at www.lipid.org/sites/default/files/images/mwall/Ancel_Keys.pdf. Accessed April 5, 2019.
                                                          15. Keys A, Taylor HL, Blackburn H, Brozek J, Anderson JT, Simonson E. Coronary heart disease among Minnesota business and professional men followed fifteen years. Circulation. 1963;28:381-395.
                                                          16. Larsen CS. Animal source foods and human health during evolution. J Nutr. 2003;133(11 Suppl 2):3893S-3897S. 17. Keys, Ancel, and Margaret Keys. 1975. How to eat well and stay well the Mediterranean way. Doubleday, Garden City, NY.p4
                                                          18. Yerushalmy J, Hilleboe H. Fat in the diet and mortality from heart disease; a methodologic note. N Y State J Med. 1957;57(14):2343-2354.
                                                          19. Keys A, Menotti A, Aravanis C, et al. The seven countries study: 2,289 deaths in 15 years. Prev Med. 1984;13(2):141-154.
                                                          20. Shreiner AB, Kao JY, Young VB. The gut microbiome in health and in disease. Curr Opin Gastroenterol. 2015;31(1):69-75. 21. Mayo Clinic. (2019). Mediterranean diet: A heart-healthy eating plan. [online] Available at: https://www.mayoclinic.org/healthy-lifestyle/nutrition-andhealthy-eating/in-depth/mediterranean-diet/art-20047801. Accessed April 2, 2019.
                                                          22. Mendelson, Scott D. “Diets for Weight Loss and Metabolic Syndrome.” ScienceDirect, Academic Press, 20 May 2008, www.sciencedirect.com/topics/medicine-anddentistry/mediterranean-diet. Accessed April 5, 2019.
                                                          23. [No author.] Bread. The Columbia Encyclopedia, 6th Ed, Encyclopedia.com, 2018, www.encyclopedia.com/sports-andeveryday-life/food-and-drink/food-and-cooking/bread. Accessed April 5, 2019.
                                                          24. United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization. What is Intangible Cultural Heritage? (n.d.). Available at https://ich.unesco.org/en/what-is-intangible-heritage-00003. Accessed April 2, 2019.
                                                          25. UNESCO - Mediterranean diet. (n.d.). Retrieved from https://ich.unesco.org/en/RL/mediterranean-diet-00884. Accessed April 2, 2019.
                                                          26. Estruch R, Ros E, Salas-Salvadó J, et al; PREDIMED Study Investigators. Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with a Mediterranean diet supplemented with extra-virgin olive oil or nuts. N Engl J Med. 2018;378(25):e34.
                                                          27. Estruch R, Ros E, Salas-Salvadó J, et al. Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with a Mediterranean diet. N Engl J Med. 2013;368:1279-1290.
                                                          28. Staff, A. (2018, June 22). PREDIMED Study Retraction and Republication. Retrieved from https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/2018/06/22/predimed-retraction-republication/. Accessed April 5, 2019.
                                                          29. Dernini S, Berry EM, Serra-Majem L, et al. Med Diet 4.0: the Mediterranean diet with four sustainable benefits. Public Health Nutr. 2017;20(7):1322-1330.
                                                          30. Esposito K, Maiorino MI, Bellastella G, Panagiotakos DB, Giugliano D. Mediterranean diet for type 2 diabetes: cardiometabolic benefits. Endocrine. 2017;56(1):27-32.
                                                          31. Tosti V, Bertozzi B, Fontana L. Health benefits of the Mediterranean Diet: metabolic and molecular mechanisms. J Gerontol A Biol Sci Med Sci. 2018;73(3):318-326.
                                                          32 Kerstetter, J., Pizzighelli,E., Serena, G. (2018). Florence School Lunch: A Unique and Delicious Lunch Experience for Children. November, 2018. Florence, Italy.
                                                          33. Allergy Statistics. http://barbfeick.com/vaccinations/allergy/403-statistics.htm#Italy. Accessed April 26, 2019.
                                                          34. Relationship with cardiometabolic disorders and polypharmacy. J Nutr Health Aging. 2018;22(1):73-81.
                                                          35. Zinöcker MK, Lindseth IA. The western diet-microbiomehost interaction and its role in metabolic disease. Nutrients. 2018;10(3):365.
                                                          36. So D, Whelan K, Rossi M, et al. Dietary fiber intervention on gut microbiota composition in healthy adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis, Am J Clin Nutr. 2018;107(6):965-983.
                                                          37. Bull MJ, Plummer NT. Part 1: The human gut microbiome in health and disease. Integr Med (Encinitas). 2014;13(6):17-22.
                                                          38. Haro C, Garcia-Carpintero S, Alcala-Diaz JF, et al. The gut microbial community in metabolic syndrome patients is modified by diet. J Nutr Biochem. 2016;27:27-31.
                                                          39. American Heart Association. What is the "Mediterranean" diet? Available at https://www.heart.org/en/healthyliving/healthy-eating/eat-smart/nutrition-basics/mediterraneandiet. Accessed July 23, 2019..
                                                          40. Cardiac Rehabilitation UK. Mediterranen diet score card. Available at http://www.cardiacrehabilitation.org.uk/docs/Mediterranean-Diet-Score.pdf. Accessed July 23, 2019.
                                                          41. Gleeson JR. Fish, fruit, healthy fats: What should heart disease patients eat? May 29, 2019. Available at https://healthblog.uofmhealth.org/heart-health/fish-fruithealthy-fats-what-should-heart-disease-patients-eat. Accessed July 23, 2019.

                                                          Sugar, You’re Going Down: Recognition and Management of Hyperglycemic Crises

                                                          Learning Objectives

                                                          After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

                                                          • REVIEW the definition and causes of hyperglycemic crises, including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)
                                                          • DISCUSS the pathophysiology and presentation of DKA and HHS
                                                          • OUTLINE treatment recommendations for DKA and HHS
                                                          • APPLY strategies for optimizing DKA and HHS management

                                                          After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

                                                          • REVIEW the definition and causes of hyperglycemic crises, including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)
                                                          • DISCUSS the pathophysiology and presentation of DKA and HHS
                                                          • OUTLINE treatment recommendations for DKA and HHS
                                                          • RECOGNIZE when patients require pharmacist intervention for DKA and HHS

                                                            Release Date:

                                                            Release Date: October 15, 2025

                                                            Expiration Date: October 15, 2028

                                                            Course Fee

                                                            Pharmacists: $7

                                                            Pharmacy Technicians: $4

                                                            ACPE UANs

                                                            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-061-H01-P

                                                            Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-061-H01-T

                                                            Session Codes

                                                            Pharmacist: 25YC61-TFG98

                                                            Pharmacy Technician: 25YC61-FGT89

                                                            Accreditation Hours

                                                            2.0 hours of CE

                                                            Accreditation Statements

                                                            The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-061-H01-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                                                             

                                                            Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                                                            The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                                                            Faculty

                                                            Amy Nieto, BS
                                                            PharmD Candidate 2026
                                                            University of Connecticut
                                                            Storrs, CT
                                                             
                                                            Jeannette Y. Wick RPh, FBA, FASCP
                                                            Director Office of Professional Pharmacy Development
                                                            UConn School of Pharmacy
                                                            Storrs, CT
                                                             

                                                            Faculty Disclosure

                                                            In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                                                            Amy Nieto BS, PharmD Candidate 2026 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                                                            Jeannette Y. Wick RPh, FBA, FASCP  has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                                                            ABSTRACT

                                                            Hyperglycemic crises—including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)—are becoming an increasingly common complication of diabetes mellitus. Over the last decade, admission rates for hyperglycemic crises have increased more than 55%. Knowledge of these crises is critical due to their high prevalence. DKA and HHS occur due to irregularities of glucose, ketones, the acid-base balance, and more. These abnormalities can result in typical signs of hyperglycemia (e.g., polydipsia, polyuria) or more aggressive symptoms or complications, such as a cognitive dysfunction or cerebral edema, respectively. Pharmacologic treatment options for DKA and HHS include fluid resuscitation, insulin infusion, and replacement of electrolytes. Managing DKA and HHS requires continuous monitoring. Clinicians adjust ongoing treatment based on the results of laboratory markers; these markers can also be used to determine resolution. Pharmacists are well-positioned to aid in recommending treatment options or adjustments and counselling patients during discharge. Pharmacy technicians can recognize medication-related issues and escalate concerns to the pharmacist, helping the team determine possible precipitating events.

                                                            CONTENT

                                                            Content

                                                            INTRODUCTION

                                                            It’s been a stressful week for Lance. Lance Sugarman, a 49-year-old male with a history of poorly-controlled type 2 diabetes (T2D), arrives at the emergency department (ED) with complaints of abdominal pain, pain and burning while urinating, and severe dehydration. Connie—his wife—shares with staff that he has become increasingly confused and disoriented over the last three days. In the ED, Lance discloses that he recently lost his health insurance coverage. As a result, he began to ration his insulin glargine by taking less than his prescribed amount (10 units once daily). His last dose was four days ago. Paramedics report that the patient has a peculiar, fruity smell. Point-of-care (POC) testing also notes several laboratory abnormalities (see Table 1). Based on these laboratory results and the patient’s presentation, Lance is admitted to the intensive care unit (ICU). Most importantly, the team has a diagnosis in mind and is prepared to initiate therapy.

                                                             

                                                            Table 1. Lance Sugarman’s (MR1234567) Laboratory Findings
                                                            Test Results (normal range)
                                                            Blood glucose 442 mg/dL (70-110 mg/dL)
                                                            Venous pH 6.72 (7.31-7.41)
                                                            Urine ketone strip 4+ (< 2+)*
                                                            β-hydroxybutyrate 5.2 mmol/L (< 0.5 mmol/L)
                                                            Serum bicarbonate 12 mmol/L (21-28 mmol/L)
                                                            Serum osmolality 282 mOsm/kg (275-295 mOsm/kg)
                                                            Serum potassium 3.1 mmol/L (3.5-5.0 mmol/L)
                                                            *A urine ketone of less than 2+ is consistent with the absence of ketosis or the presence of mild ketosis, which is considered normal.

                                                             

                                                            PAUSE AND PONDER: What laboratory markers are you concerned about? What would be a part of your differential diagnosis?

                                                             

                                                            Clearly, Lance’s blood glucose (BG) is dangerously elevated. Hyperglycemic crises—an umbrella term for diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)—are life-threatening medical emergencies associated with uncontrolled diabetes mellitus (DM).1 Since 2009, hospital admission rates in the United States (U.S.) for DKA and HHS have increased, and this trend is present globally as well.2,3 Increasing rates of DKA and HHS can be attributed to higher medication costs, particularly insulin, and the rise in DM incidence, which increased from 200 million cases in 1990 to 830 million cases in 2021.3,4

                                                             

                                                            Patients with DKA and HHS present with severe hyperglycemia (elevated BG).5 HHS has markedly higher BG levels than DKA; BG levels can reach 600 mg/dL in DKA compared to 1,000 mg/dL in HHS.5,6 Each diabetic emergency has specific defining criteria outside of hyperglycemia. DKA is characterized by an increased concentration of ketone bodies (metabolites of fatty acids) in the blood or urine and metabolic acidosis (a buildup of acid in the body).5,7 HHS, on the other hand, is defined by hyperosmolarity (a higher than normal concentration of dissolved substances in the blood or other bodily fluid) and the absence of ketoacidosis (a buildup of ketones in the body).6

                                                             

                                                            Many signs and symptoms of DKA and HHS overlap, such as dehydration in the setting of an elevated BG, making the clinical work-up and distinction difficult.6 To make matters more difficult, 27% of hospital admissions for hyperglycemic crises are for a mixed DKA-HHS presentation.5 Patients with a mixed DKA-HHS presentation have both ketoacidosis and hyperosmolarity.8 For the sake of simplicity, this continuing education will focus on DKA and HHS as separate entities. The interdisciplinary team should, however, be aware that mixed DKA-HHS exists. It is critical that the healthcare team—including pharmacists and pharmacy technicians—possesses the knowledge to differentiate between DKA and HHS to appropriately treat and manage patients.

                                                             

                                                            BACKGROUND

                                                            Prevalence and Risk Factors

                                                            DKA and HHS make up approximately 1% of all hospitalizations in people with DM; hospital admission rates have increased by 55% over the last decade. 5,9 DKA and HHS are complications of DM, but they do not occur at the same rate in both type 1 diabetes (T1D) and T2D. Prevalence of hyperglycemic crises in the U.S. is higher in patients with T1D (44.5 per 1,000 person-years) compared to patients with T2D (3.2 per 1,000 person-years).10 Moreover, DKA occurs most often in those aged 18 to 44 years with T1D compared to HHS, which commonly impacts an older subset of patients aged 45 to 64 years with T2D.5  Interestingly, DKA is the initial presentation—the clue that an undiagnosed patient has T1D—for around 6% to 21% of patients with T1D.5

                                                            Increasing technological advancements for monitoring BG and managing insulin regimens may be associated with decreased incidence or prompt recognition of hyperglycemic crises.5 Additionally, accurate monitoring helps prevent recurrent episodes.5 However, real-world data to corroborate this idea is still needed. The SIDEBAR discusses options for BG monitoring.

                                                             

                                                             

                                                            SIDEBAR: Sweet Surveillance5,11-17

                                                            Early detection of DKA and HHS—via warning signs and urine or blood checks—allows patients or clinicians to start preventive measures or treatment promptly. The American Diabetes Association and European Association for the Study of Diabetes (ADA/EASD) recommend patients with T1D use a continuous glucose monitor (CGM) as the monitoring method of choice; patients with T2D may also use CGM.

                                                             

                                                            CGMs are automated devices that can continuously estimate a patient’s glucose level at any time. With three parts—a small sensor inserted into the skin, a transmitter, and a receiver (which is often a SmartPhone)—a CGM provides real-time updates, allowing patients to take preventive measures for hypo- or hyper-glycemia. A blood glucose meter (BGM), on the other hand, is not inserted into the skin. Instead, a BGM uses blood samples collected from fingerstick devices (known as lancing devices or lancets) to calculate BG. CGMs, however, are often preferred due to portability and, thus, convenience.

                                                             

                                                            Other tests to consider for DKA, specifically, are ketone concentration tests. Ketones can be measured by urine dipsticks (which measure acetoacetic acid) or blood samples (which measure β-hydroxybutyrate, the predominant ketone in DKA). Blood ketones provide real-time measurements. Urine ketones, instead, lag the concentration of blood ketones due to the shift of acetoacetic acid to β-hydroxybutyrate that occurs during early DKA. Thus, urine ketones may underestimate a patient’s current level of ketonemia (presence of ketone bodies in the blood) and are not preferred for diagnosing or monitoring DKA.

                                                             

                                                            Testing for BG and/or ketones allows patients to contact their providers or an emergency call service in a timely manner; this, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and ADA/EASD, can reduce DKA or HHS admissions.

                                                             

                                                             

                                                            Mortality is higher among those with HHS compared to DKA (5% to 20% compared to less than 1%, respectively).18,19 Several factors are attributed to HHS’s higher degree of mortality, including precipitating factors, age, and complications. Vascular complications, such as stroke or peripheral arterial and venous thrombosis, contribute to HHS’s high mortality rate.20

                                                             

                                                            Pathophysiology

                                                            In the U.S., 38 million (or one in 10) adults have DM, a group of metabolic diseases resulting from defects in insulin’s action, secretion, or both.21,22 Insulin’s major action is reducing BG levels by driving glucose into cells.23 When insulin becomes dysregulated (i.e., in DM), a patient’s blood sugar may rise. An elevated blood glucose is referred to as hyperglycemia. Though both T1D and T2D can lead to hyperglycemia, the preceding mechanism is different. To explain simply24,25

                                                            • T1D is caused by the autoimmune destruction of β cells in the pancreas, leading to insufficient insulin secretion or absolute insulin deficiency.
                                                            • T2D is caused by a non-immune mediated process resulting in insulin resistance (or the body’s lack of response to insulin) which, over several years, may lead to relative insulin deficiency.

                                                            Insulin dysregulation leads not only to the development of diabetes, but to the development of hyperglycemic crises.

                                                             

                                                            Insulin insufficiency and an increase in counterregulatory hormones—including cortisol, epinephrine, glucagon, growth hormone—are hallmarks of both types of hyperglycemic crises. The degree of the insulin deficit, however, plays a role in distinguishing between DKA and HHS; DKA is characterized by severe insulin deficiency compared to HHS, where less severe insulin deficiency is present.5

                                                             

                                                            Glucagon is the primary counterregulatory hormone in DKA. It should be known, however, glucagon alteration is not essential for DKA to develop.5,7 In DKA, changes to the glucagon-to-insulin ratio can lead to alterations in glucose synthesis, regulation, and utilization, resulting in hyperglycemia.5 Simultaneously, the severe insulin deficiency in DKA, along with the irregular counterregulatory hormones, results in release of free fatty acids (FFAs). Excess FFAs are oxidized to ketone bodies—acetone, acetoacetate, and β-hydroxybutyrate—leading to ketonemia and metabolic acidosis.5,7,19

                                                             

                                                            Ketoacidosis does not occur in HHS. Unlike DKA, sufficient insulin is present in patients with HHS, which prevents ketoacidosis from developing.5 Glucose production and use in the patient’s body, however, is still impacted, leading to hyperglycemia.5 HHS is also characterized by osmotic diuresis. Osmotic diuresis is increased urination due to the presence of certain substances (i.e., glucose) in the fluid filtered by the kidneys, creating a pressure imbalance between solutes and water in the kidneys. This process prevents water reabsorption and, instead, promotes water excretion in the form of urine. Osmotic diuresis occurs from reduced fluid intake (often caused by a precipitating event) and leads to HHS’s characteristic hyperosmolar state alongside severe dehydration and cognitive impairment.5,7,18

                                                             

                                                            PAUSE AND PONDER: What risk factors might you consider red flags for identifying these hyperglycemic crises in your pharmacy setting?

                                                             

                                                            Precipitating Events and Risk Factors

                                                            Patients with DM present with hyperglycemic crises for several reasons, including5,7

                                                            • difficulties in managing insulin therapy, such as omission or non-adherence
                                                            • metabolic stress
                                                            • intercurrent illness (a disease that occurs during the course of another disease) or infection

                                                            Challenges with therapy management is the most common cause of a hyperglycemic crisis in the U.S. (41% to 59.6% of patients). Worldwide, however, the predominant precipitating factor of a hyperglycemic crisis (occurring in 14% to 58% of cases) is intercurrent illness or infection. Common infectious causes include pneumonia and urinary tract infections (UTIs).7,26

                                                             

                                                            Several clinical and non-clinical factors put patients at risk for hyperglycemic crises. General risk factors for both DKA and HHS include5,9,26

                                                            • socioeconomic status (e.g., low income, low educational achievement)
                                                            • history of previous hypo- or hyper-glycemic crises
                                                            • comorbid chronic health or behavioral health conditions, such as DM-related conditions (e.g., neuropathy), kidney disease, eating disorders, and depression
                                                            • alcohol and/or substance use
                                                            • certain medications, such as sodium-glucose cotransporter-2 inhibitors (SGLT2i; e.g., canagliflozin, dapagliflozin, empagliflozin) and anti-psychotics (e.g., clozapine, olanzapine, quetiapine, risperidone)
                                                            • elevated hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c)

                                                             

                                                            Understanding risk factors and events that may trigger hyperglycemic crises is important for preventing both DKA and HHS. Counseling is important in these patient populations, specifically regarding monitoring (e.g., signs, symptoms, ketones, and BG) and self-management.9

                                                             

                                                            CLINICAL PRESENTATION AND DIAGNOSIS

                                                            Signs and Symptoms of DKA and HHS

                                                            With both crises, patients may present with a variety of symptoms, with some overlapping. The differences in presentation, outlined in Table 2, can help pharmacy technicians determine when an individual may require pharmacist intervention and guide pharmacists to recommend appropriate treatment.

                                                             

                                                            Table 2. Characteristic Features of DKA and HHS5,7,20,27,28
                                                              DKA HHS
                                                            Epidemiology ·       T1D

                                                            ·       Younger

                                                            ·       T2D

                                                            ·       Older

                                                            Onset ·       Rapid, hours to days ·       Slow, days to a week
                                                            Cognitive function ·       Mild-to-moderate confusion ·       Severe confusion, seizures, or coma
                                                            Compensation ·       Kussmaul respirations ·       None
                                                            Symptoms ·       Abdominal pain

                                                            ·       Mild dehydration

                                                            ·       Mild weight loss

                                                            ·       Nausea

                                                            ·       Polydipsia

                                                            ·       Polyuria

                                                            ·       Vomiting

                                                            ·       Higher degree of dehydration

                                                            ·       Higher degree of weight loss

                                                            ·       Polydipsia

                                                            ·       Polyuria

                                                            Additional signs ·       Tachycardia

                                                            ·       Tachypnea

                                                            ·       Poor skin turgor
                                                            ABBREVIATIONS: DKA, diabetic ketoacidosis; HHS, hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state; T1D, type 1 diabetes; T2D, type 2 diabetes

                                                             

                                                            When any patient presents with typical symptoms of hyperglycemia, such as polydipsia (excessive thirst), polyuria (excessive urination), and a change in cognitive state, clinicians should consider DKA or HHS in their differential diagnosis.9 However, it is important to be aware that not all patients present with these common signs; for example, patients with euglycemic DKA secondary to SGLT2i therapy often present with less polyuria and polydipsia.7 The SIDEBAR provides more information on euglycemic DKA.

                                                             

                                                            Kussmaul respirations—a pattern of deep breathing and hyperventilation accompanied by a fruity odor—is a manifestation specific to DKA.5,29 As previously discussed, patients with DKA have ketoacidosis, unlike HHS. Kussmaul respirations are the body’s compensatory response to the metabolic acidosis present during DKA as an attempt to normalize the disrupted acid-base balance.30

                                                             

                                                             

                                                            SIDEBAR: Sweet Lies: Euglycemic DKA5,9,31,32

                                                            DKA is a common complication of DM characterized by ketonemia, metabolic acidosis, and hyperglycemia (serum glucose at or exceeding 200 mg/dL [11.1 mmol/L]). However, 10% of patients present with an uncommon complication of DM and presentation of DKA—euglycemic DKA. Euglycemic DKA occurs without hyperglycemia but rather euglycemia (normal serum glucose of 200 mg/dL [11.1 mmol/L] or less). (PRO TIP: the prefix “eu-” means good or well, and in medicine is often used to mean “normal.”) Patients with euglycemic DKA, like DKA and HHS, have an insulin deficiency.

                                                             

                                                            Without clear signs of hyperglycemia present (e.g., polydipsia, polyuria), diagnosis or treatment may be delayed. Patients presenting with euglycemic DKA, therefore, are at risk of increased mortality and morbidity. Common causes of euglycemic DKA include

                                                            • alcohol use
                                                            • exogenous insulin injection
                                                            • liver failure
                                                            • pregnancy
                                                            • SGLT2i therapy
                                                            • starvation

                                                             

                                                            Of these, SGLT2i therapy accounts for the greatest number of euglycemic DKA cases. Cases of euglycemic DKA have continued to increase over the last couple of years. This has resulted in changes to the guideline recommendations for diagnosing DKA. The ADA/EASD, Joint British Diabetes Societies for Inpatient Care (JBDS), American Association of Clinical Endocrinology (AACE), and Diabetes Technology Society (DTS) recommend diagnosing DKA with either a blood glucose of greater than 200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L; previously 250 mg/dL [13.9 mmol/L]) or any BG level in a patient who presents with a history of DM.

                                                             

                                                             

                                                            DKA and HHS Diagnosis

                                                            Hiding is not their forte; DKA and HHS give their diagnostic criteria away immediately! Literally. It’s in their names. According to the ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS Hyperglycemic Crises in Adults with Diabetes Consensus Report, clinicians diagnose DKA based on the presence of all three of the following criteria5,9:

                                                            1. Diabetes/Hyperglycemia: an elevated BG level OR a prior history of DM regardless of BG level
                                                            2. Ketonemia: an elevated ketone body concentration in the blood OR urine
                                                            3. Acidosis: a diminished venous pH AND/OR reduced serum bicarbonate level

                                                             

                                                            Clinicians diagnose HHS based on the presence of all three of the following criteria:

                                                            1. Hyperosmolality: an elevated calculated effective or total serum osmolality
                                                            2. Hyperglycemia: an elevated BG level
                                                            3. AbSence of ketonemia (ketone body concentration is not elevated in the blood OR urine) AND acidosis (venous pH AND serum bicarbonate are within normal limits)

                                                             

                                                            Table 3 lists laboratory markers mentioned in the diagnostic criteria for DKA and HHS. Upon reviewing Table 3, revisit Lance’s laboratory findings (see Table 1) and his clinical picture to determine his diagnosis. His BG clearly demonstrates a hyperglycemic crisis, and these two types are related but not the same.

                                                             

                                                            Table 3. Laboratory Markers for Diagnosis of DKA and HHS5
                                                            Laboratory marker DKA HHS
                                                            Glucose ≥ 200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L)

                                                            OR

                                                            history of DM

                                                            ≥ 600 mg/dL (33.3 mmol/L)
                                                            BHB concentration

                                                             

                                                            ≥ 3.0 mmol/L

                                                            OR

                                                            urine ketone strip ≥ 2+

                                                            < 3.0 mmol/L

                                                            OR

                                                            urine ketone strip < 2+

                                                            Urine ketone strip
                                                            Venous pH pH < 7.3

                                                            AND/OR

                                                            < 18 mmol/L

                                                            pH ≥ 7.3

                                                            AND

                                                            ≥ 15 mmol/L

                                                            Serum bicarbonate
                                                            Serum osmolality NA > 300 mOsm/kg (calculated effective)

                                                            OR

                                                            > 320 mOsm/kg (total)

                                                            ABBREVIATIONS: BHB, β-hydroxybutyrate; DKA, diabetic ketoacidosis; DM, diabetes mellitus; HHS, hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state

                                                             

                                                            Patients and clinicians can measure ketone body concentrations using several methods, including urine, serum, and blood testing. Urine and serum testing measures concentration of acetoacetic acid while blood testing quantifies the concentration of β-hydroxybutyrate, which is preferred due to higher specificity for DKA.5 The patient care team should also acknowledge the potential overlaps in presentation. Clinicians diagnose HHS based on the absence of metabolic acidosis, indicated by normal venous pH and bicarbonate levels, and the absence of ketonemia, shown by low β-hydroxybutyrate or negative urine ketones. However, patients with HHS may have mild ketonemia due to modest ketone production, though ketone levels are generally much lower than in DKA.18 Similarly, patients with HHS may have mild metabolic acidosis resulting from dehydration secondary to the hyperosmolar state, as reduced volume promotes lactic acid production that disrupts the acid-base balance.18

                                                             

                                                            Given his combination of laboratory abnormalities and clinical presentation (i.e., signs and symptoms), Lance from the patient case presented is experiencing a classic episode of DKA.

                                                             

                                                            Patients suspected of having DKA or HHS must be referred for emergency evaluation, treatment, and a thorough work-up.7 All work-ups should evaluate vital signs and laboratory findings to not only confirm a hyperglycemic crises, but also to narrow down a precipitating event and anticipate complications.5,18,26 Outside of the parameters listed in Table 3, clinicians must measure blood electrolyte levels and perform an electrocardiogram.5 If an infection is the suspected precipitating cause, the ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommends a urinalysis (urine test) and/or chest X-ray to identify and/or diagnose a UTI or pneumonia, respectively.5,18 Based on lab results, patient history, and final diagnosis, clinicians initiate disease-specific therapy.

                                                             

                                                            Remember the pain and burning sensation Lance reported in the ED? His physician ordered a urinalysis, which found elevated bacteriuria (bacteria in the urine), and a urine culture, which was found to be positive and growing Escherichia coli. Turns out he has a UTI! With this information, the team is prepared to initiate appropriate antibiotics and prepare for complications of UTIs or DKA. This infection is what likely exacerbated his DM and led to this episode of DKA.

                                                             

                                                            TREATMENT OF DKA AND HHS

                                                            Goals of Therapy

                                                            DKA and HHS share several features, including some aspects of treatment and therapeutic goals. Successfully treating hyperglycemic crises requires the following5,33:

                                                            • correction of dehydration
                                                            • correction of hyperglycemia
                                                            • correction of electrolyte imbalance(s)
                                                            • identification and treatment of precipitating event(s)

                                                             

                                                            PAUSE AND PONDER: What medications can be used to lower blood sugar? Which should you use first in a hyperglycemic crisis?

                                                             

                                                            Dehydration

                                                            Intravenous (IV) fluids are first-line therapy for DKA and HHS.7,34 Treatment with IV fluids restores intravascular volume to perfuse organs and tissue, correct electrolyte abnormalities, and resolve metabolic acidosis and ketogenesis.5,7,35 Correcting the fluid deficit aids in decreasing BG and regulating counterregulatory hormone levels.34

                                                             

                                                            The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommend isotonic saline—also known as 0.9% sodium chloride (NaCl) or normal saline (NS)—as the fluid of choice for patients without renal or cardiac compromise.5 Use of a balanced crystalloid (e.g., lactated ringers [LR]), however, is an acceptable choice.5 During the first two to four hours, the administration rate is 500 to 1,000 mL/hour.5 Subsequent fluid replacement (i.e., 0.45% or 0.9% NS) and administration rate is based on hemodynamic stability and the patient’s fluid status.5,7

                                                             

                                                            Balanced crystalloids contain sodium, potassium, and chloride content resembling that of normal extracellular fluid and cause fewer adverse effects on acid-base balance compared to NS.5,36 A recent systematic review and meta-analysis of eight randomized controlled trials involving 482 patients found that LR shortened the time to DKA resolution and length of hospital stay.36 Patients treated with NS required 3.51 additional hours to recover from DKA and remained hospitalized for nearly an additional day (specifically, 0.89 days).36 LR may decrease costs for patients but may increase costs for hospitals. One liter of LR typically costs more than twice that of one liter of NS, with one source indicating they cost $4.50 and $2, respectively.37 While research suggests LR resolves hyperglycemic emergencies faster, the patient-care team and hospital’s procurement team must weigh the potential increase in clinical benefits against the increase in cost. Therefore, the ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS guidelines recommend physicians choose IV fluids based on availability, cost, and patient-specific information.5

                                                             

                                                            Fluid therapy decreases BG—slowly, but surely. In DKA, for example, a patient’s BG can fall to less than 250 mg/dL in four to eight hours.5 Using concomitant insulin compounds the reduction. If not closely monitored, patients become at risk of having a hypoglycemic (low BG) episode. As a result, 5% or 10% dextrose is a recommended addition to the fluid regimen once BG falls to less than 250 mg/dL to maintain BG and allow for ketoacidosis to resolve.5,38

                                                             

                                                            Hyperglycemia

                                                            Acute Management

                                                            Insulin, like fluid management, decreases BG and regulates ketogenesis.35 However, patients undergoing hyperglycemic crises should never receive insulin in place of or before fluid therapy. Insulin administration shifts fluids from the intravascular space into the cells, which can exacerbate hypovolemia (decreased blood volume) and lead to severe hypotension (decreased blood pressure).39 For this reason, insulin is recommended following initial fluid resusicitation.39

                                                             

                                                            Short-acting, IV insulin (e.g., insulin regular [Humulin R, Novolin R]) is the cornerstone of DKA and HHS management and prescribers should start IV insulin as soon as a patient is diagnosed and adequately hydrated.5 Rapid-acting insulin (e.g., insulin lispro [Humalog]) is considered for the treatment of mild or moderate DKA but not HHS.5,19

                                                             

                                                            The continuous insulin infusion rate used in DKA depends on a facility’s protocols and the severity of the patient’s condition. Preferred options include a fixed-rate starting at 0.1 units/kg/hour or a nurse-driven protocol (variable rates).5 Nurse-driven protocols and algorithms allow nurses to adjust treatment based on laboratory results. Different providers might choose different rates or fluids to treat patients, while a nurse-driven protocol makes sure all patients receive all the same guideline-driven medications, unless otherwise contraindicated.40 If obtaining venous access is delayed for any reason, it is recommended to initiate an intramuscular (IM) bolus dose (0.1 units/kg) of insulin.33

                                                             

                                                            HHS treatment depends on the presence of ketosis (metabolic state in which the body burns fat for energy), ketonemia, and acidosis. The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommends initiating insulin at 0.05 units/kg/hour in patients with HHS, no ketosis or mild-to-moderate ketonemia, and no acidosis.5

                                                             

                                                            Regardless of the crisis or regimen chosen, the insulin rate requires adjustment—like with fluid replacement—once BG falls below 250 mg/dL.5,34  Insulin’s rate should be corrected (based on institution specific protocols) to maintain BG at 150 to 200 mg/dL in DKA or 200 to 250 mg/dL in HHS until resolution (to be discussed later) of either crisis.5

                                                             

                                                            Maintenance Insulin Therapy

                                                            Following resolution of DKA or HHS and when patients can tolerate food and drink, they should transition from IV to subcutaneous insulin. During this transition period, patients are at an increased risk of hyperglycemia, ketoacidosis, and recurrent DKA or HHS.5,18 IV insulin’s half-life is short, around less than 10 minutes.41 Thus, to prevent these complications, an overlap between discontinuation of IV insulin and the initiation of subcutaneous insulin must occur over one to two hours.5,33

                                                             

                                                            The treatment team designs the patient’s subcutaneous insulin regimen based on current clinical situation, previous insulin use, and assessment of insulin requirements.41 The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommends that patients with known DM and previous insulin use receive their at-home regimen.5 For patients without known DM or prior insulin use, various methods are available to estimate total daily dose (TDD) of insulin. No consensus on a preferred method is available, but approaches often used include5,41

                                                            1. Weight-based calculation: 0.5 to 0.6 units/kg/day for insulin-naive patients; 0.3 units/kg/day for patients with risk factors for hypoglycemia, such as kidney failure
                                                            2. Pre-admission insulin requirements: for patients with history of insulin use prior to hospital admission, consider previous TDD of insulin and evaluate outpatient HbA1c levels
                                                            3. Hourly inpatient IV insulin requirements: uses the patient’s current in-hospital summation of hourly IV insulin requirements; evaluate a several-hour period (typically six-to-eight hours) during which the patient’s BG remains at goal and the IV insulin rate is stable

                                                             

                                                            With TDD calculated, it is time to choose an appropriate insulin regimen. Insulin regimens should be dosed properly to ensure 24-hour coverage.5,41 Additionally, certain insulin types are preferred over others. The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommended therapy is a basal-bolus (basal and rapid-acting) insulin regimen, as it is closely mimics physiologic state and reduces hypoglycemia risk.5 Short-acting insulin regimens are an acceptable alternative, but they may require a change in frequency (i.e., from once daily to twice daily) to ensure adequate coverage.5 SGLT2is should not be initiated or continued in a hospitalized patient.5 Non-insulin agents—excluding SGLT2is—may be considered in a patient with T2D undergoing insulin therapy or if they are ketosis-prone. Non-insulin agents are contraindicated in patients with T1D.5

                                                             

                                                            Electrolyte Imbalances

                                                            Electrolyte disorders—most commonly of potassium—occur in both DKA and HHS. Potassium-associated disorders may result from osmotic diuresis (in HHS) or metabolic acidosis (in DKA).5,18 Patients may present with low potassium (hypokalemia), normal potassium, or high potassium (hyperkalemia). One-third of patients arrive to the hospital in a hyperkalemic state, while the remaining patients typically present with normal potassium levels.42 (Potassium will decline within 48 hours of initiating treatment for DKA or HHS, like insulin therapy, so additional treatments for hyperkalemia are not required.5)

                                                             

                                                            A small proportion of patients—5% to 10%—have low potassium (less than 3.5 mmol/L) at admission.5 In this population, insulin initiation should be delayed. Insulin’s purpose in DKA and HHS management is to decrease BG. However, insulin also stimulates the movement of potassium into the cells, which may result in hypokalemia during infusion.5,18 Potassium replacement is initiated at 10 mmol/hour in individuals with hypokalemia.5 Once serum potassium is greater than 3.5 mmol/L, insulin infusion can begin.

                                                             

                                                            During DKA or HHS management, potassium serum levels are maintained at a goal level of 4 to 5 mmol/L.5 (Potassium is often presented in mEq/L; 1 mmol/L of potassium is equal to 1 mEq/L of potassium.) If not monitored and maintained at goal, hypokalemia may develop in 55% of patients undergoing insulin and fluid therapy.5,43 Without replenishment, patients are at risk of life-threatening arrythmias, myocardial infarction, and respiratory muscle weakness.18,42

                                                             

                                                            Upon treatment initiation with fluids and insulin, potassium levels will begin to decrease.5 If the team fails to monitor hyperkalemic patients closely, they may develop hypokalemia. Potassium replacement (20 to 30 mmol/L of potassium) is appropriate to add to IV fluids if the serum potassium level falls to 5 mmol/L or less.5,18

                                                             

                                                            Other electrolyte disorders—such as hypomagnesemia (low magnesium), hypophosphatemia (low phosphates), bicarbonate irregularities—are not regularly monitored or treated. It is important, however, to know when repletion is indicated and the available treatment options.5,18,39,42

                                                             

                                                            Hypophosphatemia results from an extracellular shift of phosphate. Severe hypophosphatemia may lead to decreased cardiac function, respiratory failure, rhabdomyolysis, and more.5,26 Phosphate therapy, however, is not indicated in all patients due to risk of hypocalcemia (low calcium) and hypomagnesmia.18,26 Patients with DKA and a phosphate level of less than 1 mg/dL or with evidence of muscle weakness (i.e., respiratory or cardiac compromise) are indicated for phosphate replacement.5,18 Information concerning phosphate replacement for patients with HHS is limited and often extrapolated from data for DKA. The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommends using a similar approach in patients with both DKA and HHS.5,18 If indicated, replacement fluids may be enhanced with 20 to 30 mmol of potassium phosphate.5

                                                             

                                                            Low serum levels of bicarbonate are a root cause of metabolic acidosis in DKA. Bicarbonate administration is not typically recommended, however, unless the patient develops severe metabolic acidosis or severe hyperkalemia with a decrease in cardiac function.5,26 Severe metabolic acidosis is defined as a venous pH less than 7.0.5 Clinicians may administer 100 mmol of sodium bicarbonate (8.4% solution) in 400 mL of sterile water every 2 hours to replenish bicarbonate until pH is greater than 7.0.5

                                                             

                                                            Magnesium abnormalities may appear in DKA and HHS but are not commonly treated. Hypomagnesemia may result in arrythmias, which can lead to Torsade’s de Pointes (a life-threatening rapid, abnormal heart rhythm), muscle weakness, and convulsions.18,39 The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS do not provide a recommendation for magnesium replacement initiation or regimen. The American Academy of Family Physicians recommends starting replacement therapy if magnesium levels are less than 1.2 mg/dL, but they do not provide a treatment regimen.26

                                                             

                                                            Returning to the case, Lance’s care team ordered an initial bolus of 1,000 mL/hour of 0.9% NS. After two hours, the team decides to reorder a POC glucose and electrolyte panel, resulting in a glucose drop to 309 mg/dL. Though this is a great initial reduction, Lance is still not at goal. Lance’s physician orders 9.38 units/hour of insulin regular. The pharmacist, however, denies the order. At first the physician believes the order is wrong (it is not; to check yourself, use the patient weight: 93.8 kg). But the pharmacist explains that insulin is currently not indicated since the patient’s electrolyte panel still shows hypokalemia (3.1 mmol/L). Grateful to the pharmacist for a great catch, the physician, instead, orders a potassium replacement regimen. The physician will add insulin to Lance’s regimen once indicated.

                                                             

                                                            ONGOING MANAGEMENT OF DKA AND HHS

                                                            Monitoring

                                                            Patients undergoing treatment for DKA or HHS require continuous monitoring until either crisis is resolved.5 Monitoring allows clinicians to assess treatment responses, adjust treatment regimens, and prevent possible complications.

                                                             

                                                            Monitoring parameters to be reviewed during the treatment of DKA and HHS include5,18,26

                                                            • serum BG, every hour
                                                            • electrolytes (i.e., potassium, sodium), β-hydroxybutyrate, phosphate, renal function (serum creatinine), and venous pH, every two to four hours
                                                            • serum osmolality (only in HHS), every two to four hours

                                                             

                                                            Resolution

                                                            The criteria for determining resolution of DKA and HHS differ, except for serum glucose; even then, the preferred glucose ranges are not the same. Table 4 provides details on the specific metabolic parameters assessed when determining resolution of DKA or HHS.

                                                             

                                                            Table 4. Criteria for Resolution of DKA and HHS5,18
                                                              DKA HHS
                                                            Serum glucose < 200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L) < 250 mg/dL (13.9 mmol/L)
                                                            Plasma ketones < 0.6 mmol/L NA
                                                            Serum bicarbonate ≥ 18 mmol/L NA
                                                            Venous pH ≥ 7.3 NA
                                                            Serum osmolality NA < 300 mOsm/kg
                                                            Urine output NA > 0.5 mL/kg/hour
                                                            Cognitive status NA Improved, return to normal

                                                             

                                                            Understanding which parameters indicate DKA resolution is important. Equally as important is knowing which values should not be used. The following parameters are used for DKA diagnosis but not to identify crisis resolution5,26,16:

                                                            • Anion gap: Patients undergoing treatment with large volumes of 0.9% NS (which contains a high chloride content) are at risk of hyperchloremic metabolic acidosis. The excess chloride in 0.9% NS displaces bicarbonate which can offset the acid-base balance leading to a seemingly normal anion gap. This may be misleading in assessing resolution of DKA.
                                                            • Urine ketones: These are unreliable in determining resolution due to conversion of β-hydroxybutyrate to acetoacetate (a ketone body excreted in the urine) as acidosis improves, resulting in an increase in urine ketone readings. This may be viewed as DKA worsening when, in reality, blood ketone levels are declining and DKA is resolving.

                                                             

                                                            PAUSE AND PONDER: What complications may you expect to see in DKA or HHS? Which are related to treatment options?

                                                             

                                                            Complications

                                                            Patients with DKA and HHS are at risk for several complications, including

                                                            • acute kidney injury (rapid decline in kidney function)
                                                            • cerebral edema (increased fluid content in the brain tissue)
                                                            • hyperchloremic non-anion gap
                                                            • hypoglycemia
                                                            • hypokalemia
                                                            • metabolic acidosis
                                                            • osmotic demyelinating syndrome (neurologic disorder caused by a rapid increase in sodium)
                                                            • thrombosis (blood clot)

                                                             

                                                            Hypoglycemia and hypokalemia are common, and previous sections discussed their treatments.

                                                             

                                                            Several complications may occur during a hyperglycemic crisis and its management; cerebral edema is the most life-threatening.7 Cerebral edema may occur in DKA and HHS within 12 hours of treatment initiation.19 Though rare in adults, it has a mortality rate of around 30%.5,26

                                                             

                                                            The exact mechanism of development is unknown. In HHS, for example, elevated BG and rapid decrease in BG (from fluid and insulin therapy) can both lead to this complication.18 Rapid BG decline causes an osmotic gradient (a difference in liquid pressure between different compartments) in the brain, causing water to shift into the brain.18

                                                             

                                                            The treatment team must not delay treatment for cerebral edema, even if results of imaging studies are not yet available.5,19 Thus, prompt recognition of signs and symptoms is necessary, which may include26,7

                                                            • altered level of consciousness
                                                            • altered respiration and heart rate
                                                            • incontinence (especially if inappropriate for age)
                                                            • new onset or worsening headache
                                                            • recurrent vomiting

                                                             

                                                            Recommended treatment includes a mannitol infusion with concomitant mechanical ventilation or hypertonic (3%) saline infusion.5,18,19 Specific regimens vary based on the guideline. Both infusion options result in the shift of water from the intracellular compartment to the vascular compartment.19 Slow correction of hyperglycemia and hyperosmolality in patients with HHS prevents cerebral edema.5,18 The decline of hyperglycemia and hyperosmolality should not exceed 90 to 120 mg/dL/hour and 3.0 to 8.0 mOsm/kg/hour, respectively.5 Prompt treatment can prevent neurologic deterioration.7

                                                             

                                                            PHARMACY TEAM IMPACT ON PREVENTION AND MANAGEMENT

                                                            Pharmacists and pharmacy technicians are vital members of the interdisciplinary team. Their roles include collaborating with providers to prevent and manage glycemic crises or recognize signs of a crisis.15,44

                                                             

                                                            In the inpatient setting, pharmacists can improve outcomes for patients with DKA and HHS by ensuring clinicians order fluid, insulin, and electrolyte regimens (dose and rate) correctly.44 Admission medication reconciliations, acquired by a medication history technician, can help the patient care team determine possible medication use issues at home.44 Concerns may include actual medication use, non-adherence, and barriers to adherence.44 These details are important for determining a precipitating event and/or preparing a patient-centered discharge plan to avoid future occurrences. Technicians should escalate their concerns to the pharmacist.

                                                             

                                                            Community and ambulatory care pharmacists can also assist with management and prevention of hyperglycemic crises. In these settings, pharmacists can detect patients at high risk of DKA or HHS. Pharmacists can review and determine adherence patterns (i.e., missing refills or needing refills too soon), insurance coverage, or other social determinants of health.15 Community pharmacists can help patients with limited or no insurance coverage acquire insulin and help insured patients navigate their prescription plan coverage.45

                                                             

                                                            Pharmacists and pharmacy technicians can also leverage their knowledge of hyperglycemic crises to identify at-risk patients in the community setting, acting as an added layer of protection for the community. By recognizing warning signs (“red flags”), technicians can escalate concerns to the pharmacist and pharmacists can recommend immediate referral to the ED. The following signs should prompt immediate medical attention, especially in the setting of a DM diagnosis9,12,13:

                                                            • fruity-smelling deep respirations or hyperventilation
                                                            • decreased cognitive function and/or increasing confusion
                                                            • elevated BG levels
                                                            • elevated urine or blood ketone levels
                                                            • inability to tolerate oral hydration
                                                            • polydipsia or polyuria
                                                            • signs and symptoms of worsening illness

                                                             

                                                            All pharmacists—with or without Certified Diabetes Educator credentials—are well positioned to provide medication counseling and patient education at discharge. This includes guidance on new medication and equipment or adjustments to existing at-home regimens.44-46 Specifically, pharmacists can emphasize the importance of proper medication use, adherence to the prescribed regimen, and consistent monitoring of BG or ketones.45 These interventions support safer recovery and can reduce the risk of complications and future admissions.46

                                                             

                                                            CONCLUSION

                                                            DKA and HHS are complications of DM, although their specific prevalence depends on the type of DM and the patient’s age, both are becoming increasingly common. Goals of treating hyperglycemic crises include correction of dehydration, hyperglycemia, and electrolyte imbalances. Fluid resuscitation, insulin infusion, and, potentially, potassium replacement can treat DKA and HHS. Though these goals and treatments appear straightforward, patient care teams—including pharmacists and pharmacy technicians—must pay close attention to the results of continual monitoring. Without attention to detail, patients may receive inappropriate treatment and be at risk of life-threatening complications. Through verifying or correcting orders (like Lance’s pharmacist) and counseling on new medications or BG monitoring at discharge, pharmacists can help treat a hyperglycemic crisis and prevent future episodes. Pharmacy technicians can assist in determining a precipitating event (e.g., non-adherence) and escalate symptom-related or medicinal concerns to pharmacists.

                                                             

                                                            Returning to Lance one last time, after his potassium was corrected, he was initiated on the previously ordered insulin NPH dose. Guideline recommended treatment adjustments were followed thereafter (i.e., reducing insulin dose, addition of dextrose). Two days after ICU admission, Lance’s DKA fully resolved. At discharge, a social worker helps Lance enroll in a patient assistance program and the pharmacist counsels him on appropriate treatment and monitoring. Feeling more confident in managing his T2D, Lance is ready continue enjoying his sweet life with Connie by his side.

                                                            Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

                                                            Pharmacist Post-test
                                                            25-061

                                                            LEARNING OBJECTIVES
                                                            After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

                                                            1. REVIEW the definition and causes of hyperglycemic crises, including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)
                                                            2. DISCUSS the pathophysiology and presentation of DKA and HHS
                                                            3. OUTLINE treatment recommendations for DKA and HHS
                                                            4. APPLY strategies for optimizing DKA and HHS management

                                                            *

                                                            1. The treatment team is considering therapy with an intravenous insulin infusion following initial fluid resuscitation in DKA and HHS. In which situation should the treatment team delay this therapy?
                                                            A. Hypomagnesemia
                                                            B. Hypophosphatemia
                                                            C. Hypokalemia

                                                            *

                                                            2. Which laboratory marker is specific to diagnosis of hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state?
                                                            A. Serum osmolality
                                                            B. Serum bicarbonate
                                                            C. Urine ketones

                                                            *

                                                            3. Hyperglycemic crises are complications of diabetes. However, there are other non-diabetes related factors that may precipitate DKA or HHS. Which of the following is the most common precipitating cause of DKA or HHS worldwide?
                                                            A. Insulin non-adherence
                                                            B. Intercurrent infection
                                                            C. Alcohol use

                                                            *

                                                            4. Several clinical and non-clinical risk factors exist for DKA and HHS development. Which of the following medications is associated with increased risk of a hyperglycemic crisis?
                                                            A. Clonazepam
                                                            B. Canagliflozin
                                                            C. Liraglutide

                                                            *

                                                            5. What complication can result if serum osmolality is corrected at a rapid pace in a patient with hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state?
                                                            A. Hypoglycemia
                                                            B. Cerebral edema
                                                            C. Thrombosis

                                                            *

                                                            6. Hugh arrives to the emergency department with an episode of DKA. His blood glucose at admission is 309 mg/dL. The team orders fluid resuscitation with 1,000 mL/hour of 0.9% NS and a fixed-rate 0.1 unit/kg/hour intravenous insulin infusion at 0800. Gloria—his nurse—draws his hourly blood glucose lab at 0900. His blood glucose returns at 232 mg/dL. Gloria reaches out to you, the pharmacist, to receive your input on next steps. Which of the following changes would you recommend the team and Gloria to do next?
                                                            A. Maintain current fluid resuscitation; decrease insulin infusion rate to 0.05 units/kg/hour
                                                            B. Add 10% dextrose to fluid resuscitation; maintain current insulin infusion rate
                                                            C. Add 10% dextrose to fluid resuscitation; decrease insulin infusion rate to 0.05 units/kg/hour

                                                            *

                                                            7. Beatrice is currently admitted for a DKA episode. At therapy initiation, the team retrieves labs to determine treatment options: potassium = 3.7 mmol/L; phosphate = 0.6 mg/dL; magnesium = 1.4 mg/dL. Based on these results alone (do not consider signs and symptoms), which electrolyte should be replenished?
                                                            A. Potassium
                                                            B. Magnesium
                                                            C. Phosphate

                                                            *

                                                            8. Which of the following is first-line treatment for a hyperglycemic crisis?
                                                            A. Fluid resuscitation
                                                            B. Insulin infusion
                                                            C. Mannitol infusion

                                                            Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

                                                            Pharmacy Technician Post-test
                                                            25-061

                                                            LEARNING OBJECTIVES
                                                            After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

                                                            1. REVIEW the definition and causes of hyperglycemic crises, including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)
                                                            2. DISCUSS the pathophysiology and presentation of DKA and HHS
                                                            3. OUTLINE treatment recommendations for DKA and HHS
                                                            4. RECOGNIZE when patients require pharmacist intervention for DKA and HHS

                                                            *

                                                            1. The treatment team is considering therapy with an intravenous insulin infusion following initial fluid resuscitation in DKA and HHS. In which situation should the treatment team delay this therapy?
                                                            A. Hypomagnesemia
                                                            B. Hypophosphatemia
                                                            C. Hypokalemia

                                                            *

                                                            2. Which laboratory marker is specific to diagnosis of hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state?
                                                            A. Serum osmolality
                                                            B. Serum bicarbonate
                                                            C. Urine ketones

                                                            *

                                                            3. Hyperglycemic crises are complications of diabetes. However, there are other non-diabetes related factors that may precipitate DKA or HHS. Which of the following is the most common precipitating cause of DKA or HHS worldwide?
                                                            A. Insulin non-adherence
                                                            B. Intercurrent infection
                                                            C. Alcohol use

                                                            *

                                                            4. There are several clinical and non-clinical risk factors for DKA and HHS development. Which of the following medications is associated with increased risk of a hyperglycemic crisis?
                                                            A. Clonazepam
                                                            B. Canagliflozin
                                                            C. Liraglutide

                                                            *

                                                            5. What complication of DKA and HHS is the most life-threatening?
                                                            A. Hypoglycemia
                                                            B. Cerebral edema
                                                            C. Thrombosis

                                                            *

                                                            6. Which of the following patients with diabetes should you refer to the pharmacist for additional evaluation?
                                                            A. A febrile patient with a fruity odor on their breath
                                                            B. An attentive patient with increased thirst
                                                            C. An afebrile patient tolerating oral rehydration

                                                            *

                                                            7. Electrolyte disorders can occur at the time of DKA or HHS presentation or during treatment. What electrolytes are commonly replenished in DKA or HHS, if indicated by serum levels?
                                                            A. Bicarbonate, chloride, phosphate
                                                            B. Magnesium, bicarbonate, sodium
                                                            C. Potassium, phosphate, magnesium

                                                            *

                                                            8. Which of the following is first-line treatment for a hyperglycemic crisis?
                                                            A. Fluid resuscitation
                                                            B. Insulin infusion
                                                            C. Mannitol infusion

                                                            References

                                                            Full List of References

                                                            1. Van Ness-Otunnu R, Hack JB. Hyperglycemic crisis. J Emerg Med. 2013;45(5):797-805. doi:10.1016/j.jemermed.2013.03.040
                                                            2. Benoit SR, Zhang Y, Geiss LS, Gregg EW, Albright A. Trends in Diabetic Ketoacidosis Hospitalizations and In-Hospital Mortality - United States, 2000-2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep. 2018;67(12):362-365. Published 2018 Mar 30. doi:10.15585/mmwr.mm6712a3
                                                            3. Buchert LK. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperglycemic hyperosmolar state. American Nurses Association. September 14, 2021. Accessed July 23, 2025. https://www.myamericannurse.com/dka-and-hhs/.
                                                            4. World Health Organization. Diabetes. November 14, 2024. Accessed July 23, 2025. https://www.who.int/news-room/fact-sheets/detail/diabetes
                                                            5. Umpierrez GE, Davis GM, ElSayed NA, et al. Hyperglycemic Crises in Adults With Diabetes: A Consensus Report. Diabetes Care. 2024;47(8):1257-1275. doi:10.2337/dci24-0032
                                                            6. Dingle HE, Slovis C. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic syndrome management. Emergency Medicine. 2018;50(8):161-171. doi:10.12788/emed.2018.0100
                                                            7. Karslioglu French E, Donihi AC, Korytkowski MT. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic syndrome: review of acute decompensated diabetes in adult patients. BMJ. 2019;365:l1114. Published 2019 May 29. doi:10.1136/bmj.l1114
                                                            8. Mustafa OG, Haq M, Dashora U, Castro E, Dhatariya KK; Joint British Diabetes Societies (JBDS) for Inpatient Care Group. Management of Hyperosmolar Hyperglycaemic State (HHS) in Adults: An updated guideline from the Joint British Diabetes Societies (JBDS) for Inpatient Care Group. Diabet Med. 2023;40(3):e15005. doi:10.1111/dme.15005
                                                            9. American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee. 6. Glycemic Goals and Hypoglycemia: Standards of Care in Diabetes-2025. Diabetes Care. 2025;48(1 Suppl 1):S128-S145. doi:10.2337/dc25-S006
                                                            10. McCoy RG, Herrin J, Galindo RJ, et al. Rates of Hypoglycemic and Hyperglycemic Emergencies Among U.S. Adults With Diabetes, 2011-2020. Diabetes Care. 2023;46(2):e69-e71. doi:10.2337/dc22-1673
                                                            11. American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Devices & Technology. Accessed July 20, 2025. https://diabetes.org/about-diabetes/devices-technology
                                                            12. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Diabetic Ketoacidosis. May 15, 2024. Accessed July 20, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/about/diabetic-ketoacidosis.html
                                                            13. Diabetes & DKA (ketoacidosis). Diabetic Ketoacidosis (DKA) – Warning Signs, Causes & Prevention. Accessed July 20, 2025. https://diabetes.org/about-diabetes/complications/ketoacidosis-dka/dka-ketoacidosis-ketones
                                                            14. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Considerations for Blood Glucose Monitoring and Insulin Administration. August 7, 2024. Accessed July 20, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/injection-safety/hcp/infection-control/index.html
                                                            15. Lee C-S, Rickard J. Review of Diabetic Ketoacidosis Management. November 20, 2018. Accessed July 2, 2025. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/review-of-diabetic-ketoacidosis-management
                                                            16. Nguyen KT, Xu NY, Zhang JY, et al. Continuous Ketone Monitoring Consensus Report 2021. J Diabetes Sci Technol. 2022;16(3):689-715. doi:10.1177/19322968211042656
                                                            17. Holt RIG, DeVries JH, Hess-Fischl A, et al. The Management of Type 1 Diabetes in Adults. A Consensus Report by the American Diabetes Association (ADA) and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD). Diabetes Care. 2021;44(11):2589-2625. doi:10.2337/dci21-0043
                                                            18. Lovegrove SS, Dubbs SB. Hyperosmolar Hyperglycemic State. Emerg Med Clin North Am. 2023;41(4):687-696. doi:10.1016/j.emc.2023.07.001
                                                            19. Dhatariya KK, Glaser NS, Codner E, Umpierrez GE. Diabetic ketoacidosis. Nat Rev Dis Primers. 2020;6(1):40. Published 2020 May 14. doi:10.1038/s41572-020-0165-1
                                                            20. Dhatariya K, Mustafa O, Stathi D. Hyperglycemic Crises. Endotext [Internet]. June 10, 2025. Accessed July 10, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK279052/
                                                            21. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Diabetes Basics. May 15, 2024. Accessed July 7, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/about/index.html
                                                            22. American Diabetes Association. Diagnosis and classification of diabetes mellitus. Diabetes Care. 2014;37 Suppl 1:S81-S90. doi:10.2337/dc14-S081
                                                            23. Thota S, Akbar A. Insulin. StatPearls [Internet]. July 10, 2023. Accessed July 10, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK560688/
                                                            24. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Type 1 Diabetes. May 15, 2024. Accessed July 7, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/about/about-type-1-diabetes.html
                                                            25. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Type 2 Diabetes. May 15, 2024. Accessed July 7, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/about/about-type-2-diabetes.html
                                                            26. Veauthier B, Levy-Grau B. Diabetic Ketoacidosis: Evaluation and Treatment. Am Fam Physician. 2024;110(5):476-486.
                                                            27. Adeyinka A, Kondamudi NP. Hyperosmolar Hyperglycemic Syndrome. StatPearls [Internet]. August 12, 2023. Accessed July 10, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK482142/
                                                            28. Lizzo JM, Goyal A, Gupta V. Adult Diabetic Ketoacidosis. StatPearls [Internet]. July 10, 2023. Accessed July 10, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK560723/
                                                            29. Elendu C, David JA, Udoyen AO, et al. Comprehensive review of diabetic ketoacidosis: an update. Ann Med Surg (Lond). 2023;85(6):2802-2807. Published 2023 May 23. doi:10.1097/MS9.0000000000000894
                                                            30. Gallo de Moraes A, Surani S. Effects of diabetic ketoacidosis in the respiratory system. World J Diabetes. 2019;10(1):16-22. doi:10.4239/wjd.v10.i1.16
                                                            31. Modi A, Agrawal A, Morgan F. Euglycemic Diabetic Ketoacidosis: A Review. Curr Diabetes Rev. 2017;13(3):315-321. doi:10.2174/1573399812666160421121307
                                                            32. Peters AL, Buschur EO, Buse JB, Cohan P, Diner JC, Hirsch IB. Euglycemic Diabetic Ketoacidosis: A Potential Complication of Treatment With Sodium-Glucose Cotransporter 2 Inhibition. Diabetes Care. 2015;38(9):1687-1693. doi:10.2337/dc15-0843
                                                            33. Kitabchi AE, Umpierrez GE, Miles JM, Fisher JN. Hyperglycemic crises in adult patients with diabetes. Diabetes Care. 2009;32(7):1335-1343. doi:10.2337/dc09-9032
                                                            34. Kitabchi AE, Umpierrez GE, Murphy MB, et al. Management of hyperglycemic crises in patients with diabetes. Diabetes Care. 2001;24(1):131-153. doi:10.2337/diacare.24.1.131
                                                            35. Evans K. Diabetic ketoacidosis: update on management. Clin Med (Lond). 2019;19(5):396-398. doi:10.7861/clinmed.2019-0284
                                                            36. Alghamdi NA, Major P, Chaudhuri D, et al. Saline Compared to Balanced Crystalloid in Patients With Diabetic Ketoacidosis: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials. Crit Care Explor. 2022;4(1):e0613. Published 2022 Jan 6. doi:10.1097/CCE.0000000000000613
                                                            37. Kwong YD, Liu KD. Selection of Intravenous Fluids. Am J Kidney Dis. 2018;72(6):900-902. doi:10.1053/j.ajkd.2018.05.007
                                                            38. Hassan EM, Mushtaq H, Mahmoud EE, et al. Overlap of diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state. World J Clin Cases. 2022;10(32):11702-11711. doi:10.12998/wjcc.v10.i32.11702
                                                            39. Stoner GD. Hyperosmolar Hyperglycemic State. Am Fam Physician. 2017;96(11):729-736.
                                                            40. Day H. Treatment of Ketoacidosis Related to Diabetes (DKA): Leveraging Guidelines and Protocols to Avoid Pitfalls. Glytec. October 26, 2023. Accessed on July 23, 2025. https://glytec.com/videos/optimizing-dka-management-a-comprehensive-approach-to-order-sets-guidelines/
                                                            41. Kreider KE, Lien LF. Transitioning safely from intravenous to subcutaneous insulin. Curr Diab Rep. 2015;15(5):23. doi:10.1007/s11892-015-0595-4
                                                            42. Liamis G, Liberopoulos E, Barkas F, Elisaf M. Diabetes mellitus and electrolyte disorders. World J Clin Cases. 2014;2(10):488-496. doi:10.12998/wjcc.v2.i10.488
                                                            43. Dhatariya KK, Nunney I, Higgins K, Sampson MJ, Iceton G. National survey of the management of Diabetic Ketoacidosis (DKA) in the UK in 2014. Diabet Med. 2016;33(2):252-260. doi:10.1111/dme.12875
                                                            44. Donihi AC, Moorman JM, Abla A, Hanania R, Carneal D, MacMaster HW. Pharmacists’ role in glycemic management in the inpatient setting: an opinion of the endocrine and metabolism practice and research network of the American College of Clinical Pharmacy. J Am Coll Clin Pharm. 2019;2:167-176.
                                                            45. Algarni A. Treatment Considerations and Pharmacist Collaborative Care in Diabetic Ketoacidosis Management. Journal of Pharmacology and Pharmacotherapeutics. 2022;13(3):215-221. doi:10.1177/0976500X221128643
                                                            46. Knezevich JT, Donihi AC, Drincic AT. Pharmacist Role in Providing Inpatient Diabetes Management. Curr Diab Rep. 2022;22(9):441-449. doi:10.1007/s11892-022-01487-8

                                                            Patient Safety: Strength in Scoops: A Primer in Creatine, Protein Powder, and Pre-workout Supplementation

                                                            Learning Objectives

                                                             

                                                            After completing this application-based continuing education activity, the pharmacist will be able to:

                                                            • Identify differences in composition and health benefits associated with creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements
                                                            • Describe creatine dosing, common adverse effects, contraindications, and differences in available formulations
                                                            • Determine dietary preferences, digestion tolerance, and patient's individual health goals when selecting protein powders
                                                            • Provide timing and dosing for protein powder supplementation to maximize exercise recovery and muscle support

                                                            After completing this application-based continuing education activity, the pharmacy technician will be able to:

                                                            • Identify differences in composition and health benefits associated with creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements
                                                            • Explain common misunderstandings about the use and safety of creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements
                                                            • Discuss nutrition labels to help patients select appropriate supplements based on patient's individual health needs
                                                            • Infer when to refer individuals' questions to the pharmacist

                                                              A blue scooper, which contains protein powder, sits in front of a purple container with a grey lid.

                                                              Release Date:

                                                              Release Date: September 20, 2025

                                                              Expiration Date: September 20, 2028

                                                              Course Fee

                                                              Pharmacists: $7

                                                              Pharmacy Technicians: $4

                                                              ACPE UANs

                                                              Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-033-H05-P

                                                              Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-033-H05-T

                                                              Session Codes

                                                              Pharmacist: 25YC33-HGJ14

                                                              Pharmacy Technician: 25YC33-JHG41

                                                              Accreditation Hours

                                                              2.0 hours of CE

                                                              Accreditation Statements

                                                              The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-033-H05-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                                                               

                                                              Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                                                              The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                                                              Faculty

                                                              Sydney A. Feeney
                                                              PharmD Candidate 2027
                                                              University of Connecticut
                                                              Storrs, CT
                                                               
                                                              Madison C. Righi
                                                              PharmD Candidate 2027
                                                              University of Connecticut
                                                              Storrs, CT
                                                               
                                                              Ava E. Vecchi
                                                              PharmD Candidate 2027
                                                              University of Connecticut
                                                              Storrs, CT
                                                               
                                                              Valentina L. Maturi
                                                              PharmD Candidate 2027
                                                              University of Connecticut
                                                              Storrs, CT
                                                               
                                                              Marissa C. Salvo, PharmD, BCACP, FCPA, FCCP
                                                              Clinical Professor of Pharmacy Practice
                                                              University of Connecticut
                                                              Storrs, CT

                                                              Faculty Disclosure

                                                              In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                                                              Sydney A. Feeney, PharmD Candidate 2027 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                                                              Madison C. Righi, PharmD Candidate 2027 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                                                              Ava E. Vecchi, PharmD Candidate 2027 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                                                              Valentina L. Maturi, PharmD Candidate 2027 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                                                              Marissa C. Salvo, PharmD, BCACP, FCPA, FCCP has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                                                              ABSTRACT

                                                              Dietary supplements such as creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements have gained significant popularity recently, especially among those seeking to enhance physical performance and physique. Many consumers use these products without a full understanding of safe and effective use. Patients frequently ask pharmacists and pharmacy technicians questions about these supplements and pharmacy staff may be limited in providing evidence-based recommendations with full confidence. This continuing education activity covers the basic essential information regarding creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplementation. It addresses safe and effective use, potential risks, and common misconceptions associated with these products. Finally, it provides practical counseling points for pharmacists and pharmacy technicians to better educate patients who are seeking guidance on these supplements.

                                                              CONTENT

                                                              Content

                                                              INTRODUCTION

                                                              The increasing prevalence of dietary supplement use among individuals who engage in regular physical activity has raised a variety of important health concerns.1 Manufacturers often market commonly used products—including creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements—as products that enhance athletic performance, promote muscle growth, and reduce recovery time. Recovery time refers to the period of time the body needs to repair and restore itself after physical activity, in particular after intense exercise or strength training (see SIDEBAR).2 These features attract many customers in pursuit of their fitness goals; however, the increase in consumption of these supplements is not always accompanied by accurate knowledge or professional guidance. This raises an array of concerns regarding the efficacy, safety, and long-term health implications of creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements.1 Given the increasing number of patients who use dietary supplements, it is imperative that pharmacy teams understand this topic to provide guidance and counseling and care.3

                                                               

                                                              SIDEBAR: Recovery Time and Physical Activity4

                                                              • To stay healthy and avoid injury, the body needs time to rest and recover after physical activity.
                                                              • Muscle fatigue depends on how much and how hard an individual exercises, and it varies from person to person.
                                                              • Physical activity puts stress on the muscles to build strength and improve performance.

                                                               

                                                              Supplements can help the body recover faster by supporting muscle repair and reducing the risk of overuse injuries.

                                                               

                                                              OVERVIEW OF DIETARY SUPPLEMENTS

                                                              The Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act (DSHEA) of 1994 defines a dietary supplement as a product intended for oral consumption that contains one or more dietary ingredients intended to supplement the diet. These dietary ingredients may include vitamins, minerals, herbs, botanicals, amino acids, or other substances found in the food supply, such as enzymes and live microorganisms.5 As the use of dietary supplements continues to grow, individuals turn to them for various reasons, most commonly to address nutrient or vitamin deficiencies, boost energy levels, and/or meet specific nutritional needs that may be difficult to achieve through a regular diet.6

                                                               

                                                              A widely used supplement, creatine, supports the rapid regeneration of adenosine triphosphate (ATP) during high-intensity, anaerobic exercise, contributing to improved strength, sprinting performance, and muscle mass.7 Protein powders are also commonly used particularly for their role in supporting and maintaining skeletal muscle mass.8 Pre-workout supplements—multi-nutrient products designed to enhance physical performance—have gained popularity for their potential to improve training capacity, accelerate recovery, and increase energy during workouts.9 Overall, creatine, protein powders, and pre-workout supplements are dietary supplements commonly used to boost physical performance, promote muscle growth, and support recovery. However, their effectiveness can vary based on the specific ingredients and formulations of each product.

                                                               

                                                              How Dietary Supplements are Regulated

                                                              The Food and Drug Administration’s (FDA) Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition (CFSAN) is the division responsible for overseeing dietary supplements, as these products are regulated as food under United States (U.S.) law.5 The FDA’s role includes5

                                                              • Inspecting manufacturing facilities
                                                              • Reviewing new dietary ingredient (NDI) notifications and related submissions
                                                              • Investigating consumer complaints
                                                              • Monitoring adverse event reports related to supplements on the market

                                                              While the FDA has specific and critical regulatory responsibilities, it does not approve dietary supplements or their labeling before they reach the market.5

                                                               

                                                              Over the past few decades, hundreds of dietary supplements have entered the market. This has limited the FDA’s ability to fulfill its responsibilities in comprehensively monitoring the supplement market.10 Because the FDA’s resources and capacity are limited, they have primarily acted only when significant quality concerns have emerged, including microbial and/or heavy metal contamination, adulteration with synthetic drugs, and inaccurate or incomplete ingredient labeling.10 When evaluating dietary supplements such as creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements, pharmacy team members can be essential consultants. They should recommend products that have been verified by third-party laboratories, such as the U.S. Pharmacopeia (USP), NSF International, or ConsumerLab.com. In addition, they should educate patients about potential quality and safety concerns.10

                                                               

                                                              Common Misconceptions About Dietary Supplements

                                                              Numerous misconceptions surround dietary supplements, and the growing influence of social media has accelerated their spread. One common belief is that the FDA tests and approves all dietary supplements before they reach consumers. However, the FDA does not have the capacity to evaluate these products for safety and efficacy prior to their sale.5 Another widespread misconception is that dietary supplements are safe for everyone; however, just because a product is classified as a supplement does not mean it is harmless. For example, even commonly used supplements, like creatine, are not suitable for everyone and may pose risks for certain populations who should avoid their use.

                                                               

                                                              CREATINE

                                                              Creatine is an endogenous substance made in the liver, pancreas, and kidney from L-arginine, glycine, and methionine by L-glycine-arginine aminotransferase (AGAT) and guanidinoacetate methyltransferase (GAMT) enzymes.11 Once it has been synthesized, creatine travels through the bloodstream via sodium- and chloride-dependent creatine transporters to reach its target tissues, like skeletal muscle and brain.12 Inside the cell, creatine kinase converts 65% of creatine into phosphocreatine.12 Phosphocreatine stores high-energy phosphate groups that can be used quickly by skeletal muscle to make ATP, the main energy source for cells, by donating phosphate groups to turn adenosine diphosphate (ADP) back into ATP.11 Muscles rely on this conversion into ATP for energy during short-duration and high-intensity exercise.12

                                                               

                                                              Creatine supplementation increases the rate of phosphocreatine synthesis during recovery periods. This enhances muscle performance, recovery, and overall training outcomes, which is why many individuals are inclined to use creatine.12 Creatine also helps increase muscle mass and reduce body fat percentage, and it has been shown to enhance performance in short, high-intensity exercise.11,13

                                                               

                                                              Dose

                                                              Individuals can begin using creatine with a total of 20 grams daily for up to seven days; this is described as a loading phase.14 Most creatine powder products contain 3 to 5 grams per scoop (it is important to read the product’s label), so achieving this dose typically requires using four to five scoops per day, consumed throughout the day. Mixing one scoop into a beverage of choice with each meal or snack can make it easier to incorporate into one’s routine.

                                                               

                                                              After the loading phase, individuals continue with the maintenance phase of 2.25 to 10 grams daily for up to 16 weeks.14 This typically equates to 1 to 2 scoops per day. While individuals may choose to continue supplementation beyond this 16-week period, most studies have been limited to around 16 weeks. Long-term data is limited, but the available studies have not reported any serious adverse effects.

                                                               

                                                              Of note, a loading or induction phase is not strictly necessary; alternatively, research shows that smaller, consistent daily doses are also effective if the loading phase is not desired.15 Some individuals prefer to skip the loading phase because consuming 20 grams per day (approximately four to five scoops) can be difficult to incorporate into their routine. Also, patients who experience mild adverse effects (described below) should divide their creatine consumption into smaller doses taken throughout the day.16

                                                               

                                                              PAUSE AND PONDER: How might a patient’s daily routine influence the recommendation between a creatine loading phase and a lower daily dose?

                                                               

                                                              Selecting a Product

                                                              Creatine is available in a wide range of commercial products (see Table 1), most commonly as a powder formulation.13 It can be found in both solid and liquid dosage forms. The liquid formulation is thought to improve creatine solubility, which may allow patients to consume less. However, it has limitations in shelf life, as creatine is not stable in liquid form over extended periods.17 The solid dosage form includes powders and capsules.16

                                                               

                                                              The most popular form is creatine monohydrate.14 Creatine monohydrate has been used extensively without resulting in major adverse events.17 While researchers have conducted studies to evaluate different forms of creatine, creatine monohydrate remains the most researched and superior available form.11,14,17

                                                               

                                                              Table 1. Available Creatine Products11,14

                                                              Type of Creatine Description Clinical Pearls
                                                              Creatine monohydrate The most common form of creatine.

                                                               

                                                              Stored in muscle for quick energy.

                                                              ·       Widely studied

                                                              ·       Proven safe and effective

                                                              ·       Affordable

                                                              Creatine nitrate Creatine bound to nitrate Claims of better absorption, but this is not strongly supported by studies.
                                                              Di-creatine malate Creatine bound to malate Claims to have increased water solubility, but research is limited.
                                                              Creatine ethyl ester Creatine bound to esterified ethanol Claims better absorption due to increased uptake across the membrane, but evidence does not support superior efficacy over creatine monohydrate.
                                                              Creatine gluconate Creatine bound to a glucose molecule Claims improved absorption and transport of creatine into muscle cells, but the research is limited.

                                                               

                                                              Should be avoided with diabetes because it could impact blood sugar levels.

                                                              Creatine citrate Creatine bound to citric acid Claims to improve creatine solubility and absorption but has not proven superior over monohydrate
                                                              Creatine magnesium chelate Creatine bound to magnesium Claims to enhance stability, absorption, and overall effectiveness of creatine supplementation, but further research is necessary to support these claims.

                                                               

                                                              Based on currently available data, creatine monohydrate is recommended when helping a patient select a creatine product. Creatine monohydrate has the strongest evidence supporting its use, primarily due to its high bioavailability and well-documented effectiveness in enhancing muscle strength and power. While formulation type is generally not a critical factor, powder is the most commonly used and widely available form.11 As mentioned earlier, when recommending dietary supplements like creatine, choosing a product that has undergone third-party testing is the safest option. For example, a creatine monohydrate supplement which has a USP or NSF seal is a reliable choice.14

                                                               

                                                              Safety

                                                              Creatine is overall well tolerated with minimal adverse effects.14 The most common adverse effects associated with oral creatine include14,16

                                                              • Dehydration
                                                              • Diarrhea
                                                              • Gastrointestinal upset
                                                              • Muscle cramps
                                                              • Water retention leading to weight gain

                                                               

                                                              It is rare to experience severe adverse effects when taking creatine, however, the following may occur14

                                                              • Interstitial nephritis
                                                              • Renal insufficiency
                                                              • Rhabdomyolysis
                                                              • Venous thrombosis

                                                               

                                                              Prior to beginning creatine supplementation, individuals with the following conditions should avoid its use until first discussed with their physician:16

                                                              • Bipolar disease (may increase mania)
                                                              • Diabetes
                                                              • Kidney disease
                                                              • Liver disease
                                                              • Parkinson’s disease, especially in combination with caffeine (may accelerate progression of disease)
                                                              • Pregnant or breastfeeding

                                                               

                                                              A pharmacy technician should refer to the pharmacist if the patient14,16

                                                              • Has a disease state or condition listed above
                                                              • Asks for a recommendation on which creatine supplement to use
                                                              • Has questions or concerns regarding possible drug interactions or adverse effects
                                                              • Has specific questions about dosing based on their condition, disease state, or current medications or use of other supplements

                                                               

                                                              Common Misconceptions

                                                              People share a considerable amount of information about dietary supplements like creatine online and on other platforms, but some of this information can be inaccurate or misleading. Misinformation may discourage individuals from using a supplement that could offer benefit. Therefore, it is essential for pharmacy team members to understand key facts about creatine in order to provide accurate information and help prevent the spread of false claims. Table 2 describes many common misperceptions and provide the evidence needed to respond.

                                                               

                                                              Table 2. Common Misconceptions and Evidence-based Facts11,15,18

                                                              Common Misconceptions Evidence-Based Facts
                                                              Creatine supplementation results in weight gain. Creatine supplementation may sometimes cause water retention, particularly during the initial stages of use. However, this effect is not universal, and creatine can actually offer benefits, such as improved intracellular hydration, which may enhance muscular strength and reduce fatigue.
                                                              Creatine is safe for everyone. Some studies have reported potential liver or kidney complications, which is why individuals with these conditions, as well as the other exclusion groups mentioned in the text, are advised to avoid creatine supplementation or need to consult with a physician prior to use.
                                                              A loading phase is required for creatine supplementation to be effective. Creatine supplementation at lower daily doses has also been shown to be effective, making the loading phase optional.
                                                              Creatine has the same effects as anabolic steroids. Creatine supplementation does not stimulate muscle growth via hormonal mechanisms, as anabolic steroids do.
                                                              Creatine causes hair loss. No direct evidence indicates creatine supplementation causes hair loss or baldness. Most research attributes hair loss in individuals taking creatine to genetics and hormonal factors rather than the supplement itself.
                                                              Creatine causes dehydration and cramping. Creatine does not increase the risk of dehydration or muscle cramping. Maintaining proper hydration during exercise is important whether or not an individual is using creatine.
                                                              Creatine only improves lower body strength. A 2021 meta-analysis demonstrated that creatine supplementation significantly improves upper limb strength performance during short-duration exercises. These effects were observed regardless of age, sex, training protocol, or dosage.

                                                               

                                                              PROTEIN POWDER

                                                              Protein is a fundamental component of a balanced diet and plays a critical role in a healthy lifestyle. It is found in both animal- and plant-based sources and is essential for biological functions, such as tissue-building and maintaining optimal health.19 However, many individuals struggle to meet their daily protein requirements, particularly when the goal is to enhance their physical appearance or athletic performance. Protein powder offers a convenient solution to help individuals reach these goals.20 Medically, it can also benefit patients who have difficulty consuming adequate daily protein intake due to chewing or swallowing limitations.21

                                                               

                                                              Dose

                                                              The recommended dietary protein intake in healthy adults is based on their body mass, lean body mass, and level of physical activity.22 The Recommended Dietary Allowance (RDA) and Acceptable Macronutrient Distribution Range (AMDR) are both used as guidance on the recommended amount of protein to consume each day.22 The RDA for protein is a minimum of 0.8 grams per kilogram per day (g/kg/day) to support healthy individuals’ nutritional needs.22 It should be noted that the RDA is the minimum requirement; therefore, individuals should aim to intake 1.2 to 1.7 g/kg/day to benefit from the effects of efficient protein intake.23 When this range is achieved, older adults are at less risk of muscle loss and frailty, and athletes can see significant changes in muscle and performance.23 This can be incorporated as 0.4 g/kg/meal or about 20 g per meal depending on weight.20 In addition, the AMDR states that 10% to 35% of an individual’s energy intake (calories) should be from protein.22

                                                               

                                                              For active individuals who want to maximize their muscle support, the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics, Dieticians of Canada, and the American College of Sports Medicine recommend doubling the RDA of protein.24 For example, individuals who are in resistance training may wish to consume 1.2 to 2 g/kg/day.22 In addition, to aid in recovery, active individuals may wish to consume 15 to 20 gs of protein within one to two hours after exercising. Older adults, who want to reduce their risk of muscle loss, may also consume a higher amount of protein per day.23

                                                               

                                                              Insufficient amounts of protein can result in adverse consequences for one’s health, including decreased protein synthesis.22 When protein synthesis is affected, it negatively influences other processes in the body including22

                                                              • Muscle mass density and function
                                                              • Bone and calcium homeostasis
                                                              • The immune system
                                                              • Fluid and electrolyte balance
                                                              • Enzyme production and activity

                                                               

                                                              By consuming protein above the RDA and within the AMDR, individuals can improve muscle preservation, reduce age-related muscle loss, maintain body composition and metabolic health, and increase muscle mass and strength.22

                                                               

                                                              Selecting a Product

                                                              Meeting daily protein intake goals is important for overall health and performance; however, it can be challenging through diet alone. In such cases, protein supplements, such as protein powder, can help to achieve those goals effectively.20 Selecting the appropriate type of protein powder is essential to optimize the benefits of adequate protein intake. Protein powder should be tailored to the individual’s specific needs and goals.

                                                               

                                                              For example, a study involving 18 women with bulimia nervosa or binge eating disorder found that consuming high-protein supplements three times daily significantly reduced the frequency of binge eating episodes. The participants reported feeling less hungry and fuller, which led to a reduction in overall food intake. This study suggests that protein supplementation may help manage disordered eating patterns in individuals with bulimia nervosa or binge eating disorder.25

                                                               

                                                              In contrast, protein supplements are also used in the treatment of anorexia nervosa, but to promote healthy weight gain. Registered dietitians recognize that the use of dietary supplements, including protein powders, which are often part of the standard of care in treating patients who struggle to meet their nutritional needs through food alone due to psychological or physical barriers.26 A case study reported protein supplementation helped to increase caloric intake, preserve lean body mass, and support gradual weight restoration.27

                                                               

                                                              Table 3 provides guidance to tailor protein powder selection.20

                                                               

                                                              Table 3. Types of Protein Powders20

                                                              Whey Concentrate ·       Vary in lactose and fat content

                                                              ·       In many protein drinks, bars, and nutritional products

                                                              ·       Used in infant formula

                                                              ·       Do not use if allergic to milk

                                                              Hydrolysate ·       Hydrolyzed whey protein

                                                              ·       Easiest to digest because its long protein chains are pre-broken down

                                                              ·       Used in specialized infant formulas and in medical supplements for nutritional deficiencies

                                                              ·       Do not use if allergic to milk

                                                              Isolate ·       High in protein, low in fat or lactose

                                                              ·       In protein bars and drinks

                                                              ·       Suitable for lactose intolerance

                                                              ·       Do not use if allergic to milk

                                                              Milk protein ·       Supports immune system

                                                              ·       Enhances muscle growth

                                                              ·       Do not use if allergic to milk

                                                              Egg protein ·       Released more slowly than whey

                                                              ·       Taken throughout the day

                                                              ·       Do not use if allergic to eggs

                                                              Plant-based Brown rice protein ·       Suitable for vegetarians or individuals who do not consume dairy

                                                              ·       Gluten-free

                                                              Pea protein ·       Highly digestible

                                                              ·       Hypo-allergenic (not likely to cause an allergy)

                                                              Hemp protein ·       Good source of omega-3 fatty acids

                                                               

                                                              As described in Table 3, protein powders are available in different formulations and can be selected based on an individual’s dietary needs, allergies, or fitness goals. Milk-derived proteins, such as whey (including concentrate, isolate, or hydrolysate forms) are commonly recommended for those aiming to promote muscle growth due to their rapid absorption and high biological value.

                                                               

                                                              However, it is important to note that whey protein is produced during the cheese-making process. Enzymes are added to milk to separate the solid curds from the liquid whey. The liquid whey is then pasteurized and dried to create protein powder.20 Because whey is derived from milk, it should not be used in individuals with a milk allergy.20 Similarly, milk protein powders, which contain both whey and casein (milk protein), may also enhance muscle growth but should not be used in those with milk allergies. These are important factors to consider when selecting a protein, as milk allergy is one of the most common allergies in the U.S., affecting over 4.7 million adults.28

                                                               

                                                              For those with lactose intolerance or dietary restrictions, whey protein isolate (which is low in lactose) or plant-based proteins (including brown rice, pea, and hemp protein) may be tolerated better.20

                                                               

                                                              PAUSE AND PONDER: When choosing a protein powder, how might an individual’s health conditions, allergies, or fitness goals influence the type of protein powder suitable for them?

                                                               

                                                              Safety

                                                              Protein is classified as a dietary supplement, and it is essential for patients to inform their healthcare providers about any supplements they are taking. Factors such as food intake, meal timing, and nutritional status can influence the pharmacokinetics of medications. The drug’s ability to be properly absorbed can be influenced by a high consumption of protein from meals and supplements. Medications such as levodopa, used in Parkinson’s disease, and beta-lactam antibiotics (such as penicillin, amoxicillin, and cephalexin) rely on transporter proteins for absorption, and their uptake may be reduced with a high protein intake. Additionally, a high-protein, low-carbohydrate diet can significantly increase the clearance of the beta-blocker propranolol and moderately increase the clearance of theophylline, potentially impacting the therapeutic efficacy of both medications. A high-protein meal can also increase the absorption of certain drugs, such as the immunosuppressant tacrolimus.29

                                                               

                                                              Protein supplementation for patients on anticoagulation is also a major concern because of vitamin K concentrations in protein supplements. It is important that patients, especially those on warfarin, notify their anticoagulation healthcare team about protein supplement use. Plant-based protein powders, such as those containing soy, may contain vitamin K; thus, decreasing the effect of warfarin.30 It is important to check the ingredient list in the Nutrition Facts labeled on protein supplements and look for Vitamin K. For example, protein supplement drinks such as Boost High Protein Nutritional Drink contains Vitamin K1 as an ingredient. In this situation, it is critical to select another protein powder formulation.

                                                               

                                                              Protein powder supplements may contain ingredients that can contribute to gastrointestinal discomfort, weight gain, or elevated blood glucose levels. Patients should review product ingredients carefully when experiencing adverse reactions. Since protein powder is a dietary supplement, the FDA does not evaluate it for safety or efficacy prior to marketing. Therefore, consumers cannot be certain that the product contains what is claimed on the label.31

                                                               

                                                              Furthermore, some products may contain added sugars or dextrin, maltodextrin, or sweeteners that can contribute to weight gain, which may not be ideal for individuals who want to lose or maintain weight.20 Patients with diabetes should also pay close attention to protein powders with sugar listed as one of the first three ingredients and verify that the product is low in carbohydrates.20 Patients with kidney disease may not be able to tolerate more than the recommended daily allowance of protein at one time because they can’t efficiently remove waste products during the metabolism of protein. These patients may need a product that is lower than average in protein. For example, they should select a protein powder with a lower-range protein content such as 10 to 15 g per serving.20 If patients have irritable bowel syndrome or are lactose intolerant, a protein powder without lactose sugars, artificial sweeteners, dextrin, or maltodextrin is recommended.20 It is also important to check and avoid ingredients containing gluten in patients with a gluten allergy or sensitivity.20

                                                               

                                                              The pharmacy technician should refer the patient to the pharmacist if the patient

                                                              • has diabetes, kidney, or liver disease, gastrointestinal problems, or any chronic illness that require dietary oversight
                                                              • takes prescription medications because timing of supplements may be considered
                                                              • is a child, teen, pregnant, or breastfeeding
                                                              • complains about adverse effects from a protein supplement
                                                              • takes multiple protein supplements, as they are at risk of overconsumption

                                                               

                                                              Common Misconceptions

                                                              Similar to other dietary supplements, information about protein used as a supplement may be inaccurate or misleading. Protein is a commonly used supplement, and it is important to address misconceptions about usage, concerns, and key information related to its use. Misinformation may come from peer influence, social media, and seemingly credible sources. It is essential for pharmacy team members to understand the uses of protein supplementation to provide accurate information and help prevent the spread of false claims.

                                                               

                                                              Protein powder can be used in those that need to meet their nutritional requirements and in those looking to build muscle. While it is commonly believed that only athletes require protein supplementation, individuals of all activity levels may benefit depending on their dietary needs. The RDA reflects the minimum daily protein intake needed, but it is mistaken as the target for everyone to follow.22 In contrast, the AMDR recommends that protein intake accounts for 10% to 35% of daily energy intake, measured in kilocalories.32 For example, people who consume 1,300 calories per day should aim to consume 33 to 114 grams of protein daily, based on individual needs and health goals.

                                                               

                                                              Some individuals may be hesitant to increase their protein intake due to concerns about its potential impact on comorbid conditions, although current evidence does not support their concerns. Table 4 clarifies misleading information to encourage individuals to use protein supplements knowledgeably and confidently as part of a healthy lifestyle.22

                                                               

                                                              Table 4. Common Misconceptions and Evidence-based Facts33-35

                                                              Common Misconceptions Evidence-Based Facts
                                                              High-protein diets weaken bones and increase the risk of osteoporosis. A high protein diet along with eating more dairy, calcium, and exercising daily can help protect the bones.
                                                              Consuming high amounts of protein will damage kidneys, even if the individual is healthy. The National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey found that even with very high protein intake from all sources, blood urea nitrogen levels remained within the normal range, indicating that there is no risk of developing chronic kidney disease or harming the kidneys.
                                                              High protein diets, especially from animal sources, increase the risk of heart disease and type 2 diabetes. An analysis of the Framingham Heart Study Offspring Cohort showed an inverse relationship between inflammation and dietary protein intake, showing that there was a beneficial effect for higher animal- and plant-based protein intake. No data demonstrates a relationship between dietary protein and cardiovascular disease or type 2 diabetes mellitus.

                                                               

                                                              PRE-WORKOUT

                                                              “Pre-workout” is a term used to describe supplements composed of multiple ingredients, intended to be taken before a workout.36 Manufacturers of these supplements propose pre-workout supplements enhance performance, energy, endurance, and focus during a workout; however, limited research supports these claims.37

                                                               

                                                              Common Ingredients

                                                              Pre-workout supplements can include countless combinations of ingredients, but most multi-nutrient formulas feature a core set of commonly used components, including9,36

                                                              • Caffeine
                                                              • Beta-alanine
                                                              • Creatine
                                                              • Citrulline
                                                              • Taurine
                                                              • Tyrosine
                                                              • B vitamins (B-6, B-12)

                                                               

                                                              While many pre-workout supplements share a core group of commonly used ingredients, their formulations can vary significantly.36 Unfortunately, many companies do not list all included ingredients and their specific quantities on the label; this variability makes it difficult for pharmacists to recommend or evaluate products.2 Much of the existing research on pre-workout supplements focuses on caffeine as the primary stimulant.37 It has been found that many products containing caffeine do not have accurate amounts listed on their label.2 Use of products with unreliable labeling can put patients at risk for adverse effects.2

                                                               

                                                              Selecting a Product

                                                              Since pre-workout supplements contain ingredients similar to those found in energy drinks, it is important to distinguish between the two. Pre-workout supplements are designed to enhance both short-term exercise performance and long-term training outcomes.37 In contrast, energy drinks and shots typically consist of caffeine along with a few vitamins or amino acids, aiming primarily to increase energy and alertness. They are intended for use at any time throughout the day.37 Because of the variability in composition and unreliability of the labeling on pre-workout supplement products, it is recommended to avoid their use and rather focus on eating a balanced diet to support energy needs.2

                                                               

                                                              Safety

                                                              Caffeine and beta-alanine are the most widely used ingredients included in pre-workout supplements found in 86% and 87% of products, respectively.36

                                                               

                                                              Beta-alanine is included because it enhances exercise capacity and performance by elevating muscle carnosine levels, which buffer the accumulation of lactic acid in muscles.38 This buffering effect helps delay fatigue during high-intensity exercise, making it especially beneficial for short bursts of activity such as weightlifting or sprinting.38 While both are generally well tolerated, long-term doses of beta-alanine that exceed 6.4 g per day or caffeine use beyond several weeks at doses above 400 mg/day may increase the risk of adverse events (see Table 5) and dependence.39,40

                                                               

                                                              Table 5. Potential Adverse Events of Beta-Alanine and Caffeine2,36,39-41

                                                              Ingredient Potential Adverse Events
                                                              Beta-Alanine

                                                               

                                                              ·       Mild:

                                                              o   Flushing

                                                              o   Paresthesia

                                                              o   Pruritus

                                                               

                                                              Caffeine

                                                               

                                                              ·       Mild to Moderate (> 400 mg per day):

                                                              o   Vomiting

                                                              o   Tachycardia

                                                              o   Hypokalemia

                                                              o   Hypoglycemia

                                                              o   Anxiety and restlessness

                                                              o   Gastrointestinal upset (including diarrhea and nausea)

                                                              o   Diuresis

                                                              o   Headache

                                                              o   Insomnia

                                                              o   Palpitations

                                                              o   Muscle tremors

                                                              ·       Severe (10 to 14 g per day):

                                                              o   Agitation

                                                              o   Seizures

                                                              o   Ventricular dysrhythmias

                                                              o   Hypotension

                                                              o   Shock

                                                               

                                                               

                                                              Patients should be aware of their total daily caffeine intake, which includes not only coffee and energy drinks but also caffeinated beverages, medications, and multivitamins that may also contain caffeine.37 To determine if a medication contains caffeine, patients can read their medications’ list of ingredients or ask their pharmacist.

                                                               

                                                              Caffeine is rapidly absorbed from the stomach and small intestine, reaching peak serum concentrations within 30 to 60 minutes following oral intake. Although food may slow the absorption rate, it does not reduce the total amount that will eventually be absorbed.41 Studies have found that individuals with lower CYP1A2 activity have increased reports of symptoms of toxicity, as caffeine is hepatically metabolized by CYP1A2 which causes caffeine to be absorbed more slowly.41-43 The plasma elimination half-life ranges from 3 to 7 hours in healthy adults and 3 to 4 hours in children. This range is shortened in smokers, due to the activation of the CYP1A2 enzyme by cigarette smoke, and prolonged in the last trimester of pregnancy, in patients with cirrhosis, and in infants.41

                                                               

                                                              In terms of safety, most adults can consume a maximum of 400 mg of caffeine per day, while children are typically safe when ingesting up to 2.5 mg/kg of caffeine per day.41

                                                               

                                                              Table 6. Approximate Caffeine Content in Select Beverages
                                                              Coffee 100 mg
                                                              Tea 20-90 mg
                                                              Celsius Energy Drink 200 mg
                                                              Monster Energy Drink 160 mg

                                                               

                                                              Toxicity and lethality risks increase with higher doses. Life-threatening events are seen when greater than 150 to 200 mg/kg of caffeine is consumed, and fatalities have been reported when 5 to 50 g of caffeine was ingested.41 However, recovery after ingestion of 50 g has also been reported.41

                                                               

                                                              Pharmacists should counsel patients who are taking caffeine-containing products while concomitantly using pre-workout supplements because they are consuming high levels of caffeine.37 This increased level of caffeine can increase the risk of adverse events described above.37

                                                               

                                                              Regarding pre-workout supplement use, the pharmacy technician should refer to the pharmacist if the patient

                                                              • Has pre-existing medical conditions, including high blood pressure, anxiety, seizure history, kidney or liver impairment, and heart disease or arrhythmias
                                                              • Is pregnant or breastfeeding
                                                              • Is asking for a recommendation on which pre-workout supplement to use
                                                              • Is experiencing or has questions regarding possible drug interactions and adverse effects
                                                              • Has specific questions about dosing based on their condition, disease state, or current medications/supplements

                                                               

                                                              For example, Jenny, a 58-year-old woman, is interested in using a pre-workout supplement to help motivate her to be active after a long day at work. When the technician asks about her current caffeine intake, she mentions that she drinks two cups of coffee each day and also has a Sparkling Fuji Apple Pear (her favorite flavor) Celsius. The technician explains that each cup of coffee contains approximately 100 mg of caffeine, and the Celsius drink contains about 200 mg. Most pre-workout supplements contain between 150 to 300 mg of caffeine. If Jenny were to add a pre-workout supplement to her routine, her total caffeine intake could exceed 500 mg per day, increasing her risk of experiencing adverse events.

                                                               

                                                              PAUSE AND PONDER: With the growing popularity of stimulant-containing products, how can you further assess patients’ consumption of caffeine? (Hint: Remember hidden sources of caffeine.)

                                                               

                                                              CONCLUSION

                                                              With the growing popularity of supplement use in the fitness industry, products such as creatine, protein powders, and pre-workout supplements continue to be widely used. Pre-workout supplements are typically taken before exercising to enhance performance and focus, while creatine and protein powders are commonly used to support muscle growth and recovery. When used appropriately, these supplements may improve physical performance, promote muscle development, and reduce recovery time.6

                                                               

                                                              As pharmacists and pharmacy technicians, it is part of our professional responsibility to educate the public about the potential risks and benefits of these products and to provide evidence-based recommendations. Our role also includes advocating for patients and staying informed about the latest developments, which are becoming increasingly prominent in the wellness market. Gaining a deeper understanding of these products is essential to recognize when we can confidently make recommendations or when to refer individuals to a physician or registered dietitian for more individualized guidance.

                                                               

                                                              It is also important to acknowledge that these products still require more research to establish their full safety and efficacy, standards that are already well established for prescription medications.10 Additionally, current research often overlooks key individual factors such as genetics, the gut microbiome, and habitual diet, all of which can significantly influence exercise performance, recovery, and muscle growth.6

                                                               

                                                              Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

                                                              Pharmacist Post-test
                                                              25-033

                                                              After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to
                                                              • Identify differences in composition and health benefits associated with creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements
                                                              • Describe creatine dosing, common adverse effects, contraindications, and differences in available formulations
                                                              • Determine dietary preferences, digestion tolerance, and patient’s individual health goals when selecting protein powders
                                                              • Provide timing and dosing for protein powder supplementation to maximize exercise recovery and muscle support

                                                              *

                                                              1. Which of the following is a counseling point you, as the pharmacist, can offer to a patient who is taking a pre-workout product and experiencing anxiety symptoms, including tachycardia?
                                                              A. Limit the use of other caffeinated products, including coffee, while using a pre-work product.
                                                              B. Stop using the pre-workout product immediately, as it may increase the risk of adverse neurological effects.
                                                              C. Inform the patient that their symptoms are unlikely to be related to the pre-workout product.

                                                              *

                                                              2. Which of the following is a common adverse effect of creatine?
                                                              A. Muscle cramps
                                                              B. Hair loss
                                                              C. Constipation

                                                              *

                                                              3. A 56 kg female patient comes in asking for guidance on how to adequately consume protein in her diet. The patient is allergic to dairy and has no other allergies. The patient goes on a 45-minute walk daily but does not perform resistance training. Which of the following is the best answer to provide for this patient?
                                                              A. The patient should have a goal of consuming about 22 grams of hemp protein per meal, having 3 meals per day.
                                                              B. The patient should have a goal of consuming about 32 grams of whey protein per meal, 3 meals per day.
                                                              C. The patient should have a goal of consuming about 10 grams of hemp protein per meal, having 3 meals per day.

                                                              *

                                                              4. A 45-year-old female patient wants to begin taking a dietary protein supplement. She is currently taking omeprazole, warfarin, and ibuprofen. Which of the following medications may have an interaction with dietary protein supplementation?
                                                              A. Omeprazole
                                                              B. Warfarin
                                                              C. Ibuprofen

                                                              *

                                                              5. A 70-year-old male recovering from surgery shows signs of fatigue and poor wound healing due to protein deficiency. What type of protein supplement would be most appropriate to support his energy levels and nutrition?
                                                              A. Whey protein concentrate
                                                              B. Whey protein hydrolysate
                                                              C. Whey protein isolate

                                                              *

                                                              6. Which of the following creatine products has the most evidence supporting its use?
                                                              A. Creatine Monohydrate
                                                              B. Creatine Nitrate
                                                              C. Creatine Citrate

                                                              *

                                                              7. A 85-year-old female asks her primary care provider about initiating daily supplementation with 20 grams of creatine. The physician asks you for assistance in answering this question. Upon reviewing her medical chart, you note that her estimated Glomerular Filtration Rate (eGFR) is 30 mL/min/1.73m2. Given this information, would you recommend the initiation of daily creatine supplementation?
                                                              A. Yes, creatine has no contraindications with reduced renal function and can be safely initiated.
                                                              B. No, creatine supplementation is not recommended in patients with reduced renal function, and this patient has kidney impairment.
                                                              C. Yes, studies have proven that reducing the creatine loading dose to 15 grams daily, rather than 20 grams, allows patients with reduced renal function to safely supplement, if renal function is closely monitored.

                                                              *

                                                              8. Why can it be difficult for pharmacists to recommend a pre-workout supplement?
                                                              A. Pre-workout supplements have variability in ingredients.
                                                              B. Pre-workout supplements have been well studied.
                                                              C. Pre-workout supplements have consistent ingredients.

                                                              *

                                                              9. A 39-year-old pregnant woman presents to the pharmacy seeking information about creatine supplementation. Upon reviewing her medication profile, you note that she is currently taking aripiprazole for bipolar disorder. What amount of creatine would you, as the pharmacist, recommend for her?
                                                              A. I would recommend 20 grams daily for 7 days, followed by 8 grams daily for 16 weeks.
                                                              B. I would recommend 11 grams daily for 20 weeks
                                                              C. I would not recommend creatine supplementation.

                                                              *

                                                              10. A 68 kg male patient seeks guidance on his recommended daily protein intake. He follows a strict vegan diet, avoiding all animal products, and does resistance training (lifts heavy weights) four times per week. What would you, as the pharmacist, recommend for this patient?
                                                              A. Consume a diet of 130 grams of plant-based protein per day, including consuming 20 grams of protein 1 hour after exercising.
                                                              B. Consume a diet of 130 grams of plant-based protein per day, including consuming 20 grams of protein 1 hour before exercising.
                                                              C. Consume a diet of 175 grams of plant-based protein per meal, including consuming 20 grams of protein 1 hour after exercising.

                                                              Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

                                                              Pharmacy Technician Post-test
                                                              25-033

                                                              After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to
                                                              • Identify differences in composition and health benefits associated with creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements.
                                                              • Explain common misunderstandings about the use and safety of creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements.
                                                              • Discuss nutrition labels to help patients select appropriate supplements based on patient’s individual health needs.
                                                              • Infer when to refer individuals' questions to the pharmacist.

                                                              *

                                                              1. In which one of the following situations should you, as the pharmacy technician, refer the patient to the pharmacist?
                                                              A. A patient with chronic kidney disease asks for supplements to improve their physical performance during strength training.
                                                              B. A patient with seasonal allergies asks for a recommendation between two creatine products, one with a USP seal and the other without.
                                                              C. A 25-year-old patient asks about what types of protein powder the pharmacy has in stock.

                                                              *

                                                              2. Which of the following is a plant-based protein option?
                                                              A. Pea protein
                                                              B. Milk protein
                                                              C. Whey protein

                                                              *

                                                              3. Choose the answer that correctly matches its corresponding statement.
                                                              A. Whey isolate protein – suitable for lactose intolerance and can be used in individuals allergic to milk.
                                                              B. Whey hydrolysate protein – easy to digest and suitable for individuals with nutritional deficiencies.
                                                              C. Protein powder with artificial sweeteners – can be given to patients with irritable bowel syndrome (IBS).

                                                              *

                                                              4. A 75-year-old individual with newly diagnosed osteoporosis is looking to improve muscle recovery as they are increasing their strength training. They are unsure which protein supplement to choose. Which response best supports the importance of selecting the right protein source?
                                                              A. Choosing the right protein powder depends on the patient’s individual needs, goals, and preferences.
                                                              B. Whey protein supplementation is beneficial for all individuals reaching their protein requirements; however, excessive amounts of protein will damage your kidneys.
                                                              C. Whey protein is better than other types of protein to lessen the risk of osteoporosis.

                                                              *

                                                              5. A 22-year-old male comes to the pharmacy with questions regarding creatine. He has heard rumors regarding creatine’s side effects and safety. He wants to know which of the rumors he has heard are true. Which of the following statements is true regarding creatine’s side effects?
                                                              A. Creatine may cause hair loss.
                                                              B. Creatine may cause diarrhea.
                                                              C. Creatine may cause kidney stones.

                                                              *

                                                              6. Which of the following ingredients are commonly found in pre-workout supplements?
                                                              A. Caffeine and taurine
                                                              B. Taurine and vitamin C
                                                              C. Caffeine and beta-alanine

                                                              *

                                                              7. Which of the following creatine products has the most evidence supporting its use?
                                                              A. Creatine Monohydrate
                                                              B. Creatine Nitrate
                                                              C. Creatine Citrate

                                                              *

                                                              8. A 22-year-old male patient wants to begin creatine supplementation. He is currently taking loratadine and acetaminophen and wants to know if creatine will interact with either of these medications. Which of the following is the best course of action you, the a pharmacy technician, should take?
                                                              A. Use an online resource to determine if there is an interaction.
                                                              B. Refer the patient to the pharmacist.
                                                              C. Recommend beginning supplementation, as there is no interaction with the medications.

                                                              *

                                                              9. An 18-year-old female patient is interested in starting weight training to gain muscle. She has seen TikTok influencers promoting the use of pre-workout supplements, protein powder, and creatine, claiming these products support muscle growth. However, she is skeptical, as many influencers have brand deals, and she wants to avoid being misled. Which of the products are the influencers promoting that have misleading claims about building muscle?
                                                              A. Protein powder
                                                              B. Creatine
                                                              C. Pre-workout supplements

                                                              *

                                                              10. A 19-year-old male is interested in starting creatine supplementation and wants to choose a safe and effective product. Which of the following is a counseling point to provide when making a recommendation?
                                                              A. Always start with a loading phase.
                                                              B. Creatine monohydrate is the most widely studied.
                                                              C. Use products without third-party testing to save money.

                                                              References

                                                              Full List of References

                                                              1. Calella P, Di Dio M, Pelullo CP, et al. Are knowledge, attitudes and practices about dietary supplements and nutraceuticals related with exercise practice and setting? A cross-sectional study among Italian adults. Int J Food Sci Nutr. 2025;76(2):194-202. doi:10.1080/09637486.2024.2437468
                                                              2. Cohen P. High-risk dietary supplements: Patient evaluation and counseling. UpToDate. UpToDate, Inc. Updated March 21, 2025. Accessed May 29, 2025. https://www.uptodate.com
                                                              3. Massey PB. Dietary supplements. Med Clin North Am. 2002;86(1):127-147. doi:10.1016/s0025-7125(03)00076-2
                                                              4. Peake JM. Recovery after exercise: What is the current state of play? Current Opinion in Physiology. 2019;10:17–26. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2468867319300379. doi: 10.1016/j.cophys.2019.03.007.
                                                              5. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Questions and Answers on Dietary Supplements. FDA. Updated December 4, 2023. Accessed May 22, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/food/information-consumers-using-dietary-supplements/questions-and-answers-dietary-supplements
                                                              6. Maughan RJ, Burke LM, Dvorak J, et al. IOC Consensus Statement: Dietary Supplements and the High-Performance Athlete. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab. 2018;28(2):104-125. doi: 10.1123/ijsnem.2018-0020
                                                              7. Mabrey G, Koozehchian MS, Newton AT, et al. The Effect of Creatine Nitrate and Caffeine Individually or Combined on Exercise Performance and Cognitive Function: A Randomized, Crossover, Double-Blind, Placebo-Controlled Trial. Nutrients. 2024;16(6):766. doi:10.3390/nu16060766
                                                              8. Nunes EA, Colenso-Semple L, McKellar SR, et al. Systematic review and meta-analysis of protein intake to support muscle mass and function in healthy adults. J Cachexia Sarcopenia Muscle. 2022;13(2):795-810. doi: 10.1002/jcsm.12922
                                                              9. Kedia AW, Hofheins JE, Habowski SM, et al. Effects of a pre-workout supplement on lean mass, muscular performance, subjective workout experience and biomarkers of safety. Int J Med Sci. 2014 Jan 2;11(2):116-26. doi: 10.7150/ijms.7073
                                                              10. White CM. Dietary Supplements Pose Real Dangers to Patients. Ann Pharmacother. 2020 Aug;54(8):815-819. doi: 10.1177/1060028019900504
                                                              11. Gutiérrez-Hellín J, Del Coso J, Franco-Andrés A, et al. Creatine Supplementation Beyond Athletics: Benefits of Different Types of Creatine for Women, Vegans, and Clinical Populations—A Narrative Review. Nutrients. 2025; 17(1):95. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu17010095
                                                              12. Graham AS, Hatton RC. Creatine: a review of efficacy and safety. J Am Pharm Assoc (Wash). 1999;39(6):803-877.
                                                              13. Fernandez MM, Hosey RG. Performance-enhancing drugs snare nonathletes, too. J Fam Pract. 2009;58(1):16-23.
                                                              14. Creatine. Natural Medicines. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://naturalmedicines-therapeuticresearch-com.ezproxy.lib.uconn.edu/
                                                              15. Antonio J, Candow DG, Forbes SC, et al. Common questions and misconceptions about creatine supplementation: what does the scientific evidence really show? J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2021;18(1):13. doi: 10.1186/s12970-021-00412-w.
                                                              16. Creatine. Cleveland Clinic. Updated April 26, 2023. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://my.clevelandclinic.org/health/treatments/17674-creatine.
                                                              17. Jäger R, Purpura M, Shao A, et al. Analysis of the efficacy, safety, and regulatory status of novel forms of creatine. Amino Acids. 2011;40(5):1369-1383. doi:10.1007/s00726-011-0874-6
                                                              18. Lanhers C, Pereira B, Naughton G, Trousselard M, Lesage FX, Dutheil F. Creatine Supplementation and Upper Limb Strength Performance: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. Sports Med. 2017;47(1):163-173. doi:10.1007/s40279-016-0571-4
                                                              19. Ferrari L, Panaite SA, Bertazzo A, Visioli F. Animal- and Plant-Based Protein Sources: A Scoping Review of Human Health Outcomes and Environmental Impact. Nutrients. 2022;14(23):5115. Published 2022 Dec 1. doi:10.3390/nu14235115
                                                              20. How to choose the best protein powder for you. Cleveland Clinic. June 12, 2020. Accessed June 3, 2025. https://health.clevelandclinic.org/7-tips-choosing-best-protein-powder.
                                                              21. Is whey protein good for you? Cleveland Clinic. January 4, 2021. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://health.clevelandclinic.org/is-whey-protein-good-for-you.
                                                              22. Carbone JW, Pasiakos SM. Dietary protein and muscle mass: Translating science to application and Health Benefit. Nutrients. 2019;11(5):1136. doi:10.3390/nu11051136
                                                              23. Wardlaw S. How Much Protein Do I Need if I Work Out? Mass General Brigham. January 4, 2024. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://www.massgeneralbrigham.org/en/about/newsroom/articles/how-much-protein-when-working-out.
                                                              24. Thomas DT, Erdman KA, Burke LM. Position of the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics, dietitians of Canada, and the American College of Sports Medicine: Nutrition and Athletic Performance. Journal of the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics. 2016;116(3):501-528. doi:10.1016/j.jand.2015.12.006
                                                              25. Latner JD, Wilson GT. Binge eating and satiety in bulimia nervosa and binge eating disorder: effects of macronutrient intake. Int J Eat Disord. 2004;36(4):402-415. doi:10.1002/eat.20060
                                                              26. Hewlings SJ. Eating Disorders and Dietary Supplements: A Review of the Science. Nutrients. 2023;15(9):2076. Published 2023 Apr 25. doi:10.3390/nu15092076
                                                              27. Hackert AN, Kniskern MA, Beasley TM. Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics: Revised 2020 Standards of Practice and Standards of Professional Performance for Registered Dietitian Nutritionists (Competent, Proficient, and Expert) in Eating Disorders. J Acad Nutr Diet. 2020;120(11):1902-1919.e54. doi:10.1016/j.jand.2020.07.014
                                                              28. Gupta RS, Warren CM, Smith BM, et al. The Public Health Impact of Parent-Reported Childhood Food Allergies in the United States. Pediatrics. 2018;142(6):e20181235. doi:10.1542/peds.2018-1235
                                                              29. Niederberger E, Parnham MJ. The Impact of Diet and Exercise on Drug Responses. Int J Mol Sci. 2021;22(14):7692. doi:10.3390/ijms22147692.
                                                              30. Why vitamin K can be dangerous if you take warfarin. Cleveland Clinic. October 28, 2019. Accessed June 4, 2025. https://health.clevelandclinic.org/vitamin-k-can-dangerous-take-warfarin.
                                                              31. The hidden dangers of protein powders. Harvard Health. August 15, 2022. Accessed July 8, 2025. https://www.health.harvard.edu/staying-healthy/the-hidden-dangers-of-protein-powders.
                                                              32. Kelly OJ, Gilman JC, Ilich JZ. Utilizing dietary nutrient ratios in nutritional research: Expanding the concept of nutrient ratios to macronutrients. MDPI. January 28, 2019. Accessed June 4, 2025. https://www.mdpi.com/2072-6643/11/2/282
                                                              33. Josse, A. R., Atkinson, S. A., Tarnopolsky, M. A., & Phillips, S. M. (2012). Diets higher in dairy foods and dietary protein support bone health during diet- and exercise-induced weight loss in overweight and obese premenopausal women. The Journal of clinical endocrinology and metabolism, 97(1), 251–260. https://doi.org/10.1210/jc.2011-2165
                                                              34. Berryman CE, Agarwal S, Lieberman HR, Fulgoni VL, Pasiakos SM. Diets higher in animal and plant protein are associated with lower adiposity and do not impair kidney function in US adults. The American Journal of Clinical Nutrition. July 27, 2016. Accessed August 4, 2025. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0002916522045981?via%3Dihub.
                                                              35. Adela H, Paul JF. Dietary protein and changes in biomarkers of inflammation and oxidative stress in the Framingham Heart Study Offspring Cohort. Current Developments in Nutrition. March 28, 2019. Accessed August 4, 2025. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2475299122130143.
                                                              36. Jagim AR, Harty PS, Camic CL. Common Ingredient Profiles of Multi-Ingredient Pre-Workout Supplements. Nutrients. 2019;11(2):254. doi: 10.3390/nu11020254
                                                              37. Martinez N, Campbell B, Franek M, et al. The effect of acute pre-workout supplementation on power and strength performance. J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2016;13:29. doi: 10.1186/s12970-016-0138-7
                                                              38. Saunders B, Elliott-Sale K, Artioli GG, et al. β-alanine supplementation to improve exercise capacity and performance: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Br J Sports Med. 2017;51(8):658-669. doi:10.1136/bjsports-2016-096396
                                                              39. Beta-Alanine. Natural Medicines. Accessed June 5 2025. https://naturalmedicines-therapeuticresearch-com.ezproxy.lib.uconn.edu/
                                                              40. Caffeine. Natural medicines. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://naturalmedicines-therapeuticresearch-com.ezproxy.lib.uconn.edu/
                                                              41. Hughes A. Acute Caffeine Poisoning. UpToDate. UpToDate, Inc. Updated April 7, 2025. Accessed June 3, 2025. https://www.uptodate.com
                                                              42. Cornelis MC, El-Sohemy A, Kabagambe EK, Campos H. Coffee, CYP1A2 genotype, and risk of myocardial infarction. JAMA. 2006;295(10):1135-1141. doi:10.1001/jama.295.10.1135
                                                              43. Sachse C, Brockmöller J, Bauer S, Roots I. Functional significance of a C-->A polymorphism in intron 1 of the cytochrome P450 CYP1A2 gene tested with caffeine. Br J Clin Pharmacol. 1999;47(4):445-449. doi:10.1046/j.1365-2125.1999.00898.x